Electronics and communications engineering Books

Book SynopsisThis book provides up-to-date developments, methods, and techniques in the field of GIS and remote sensing and features articles from internationally renowned authorities on three interrelated perspectives of scaling issues: scale in land surface properties, land surface patterns, and land surface processes.Table of ContentsACKNOWLEDGMENTS ix CONTRIBUTORS xi AUTHOR BIOGRAPHY xv INTRODUCTION 1 1 Characterizing, Measuring, Analyzing, and Modeling Scale in Remote Sensing: An Overview 3 Qihao Weng PART I SCALE, MEASUREMENT, MODELING, AND ANALYSIS 11 2 Scale Issues in Multisensor Image Fusion 13 Manfred Ehlers and Sascha Klonus 3 Thermal Infrared Remote Sensing for Analysis of Landscape Ecological Processes: Current Insights and Trends 34 Dale A. Quattrochi and Jeffrey C. Luvall 4 On the Issue of Scale in Urban Remote Sensing 61 Qihao Weng PART II SCALE IN REMOTE SENSING OF PLANTS AND ECOSYSTEMS 79 5 Change Detection Using Vegetation Indices and Multiplatform Satellite Imagery at Multiple Temporal and Spatial Scales 81 Edward P. Glenn, Pamela L. Nagler, and Alfredo R. Huete 6 Upscaling with Conditional Cosimulation for Mapping Above-Ground Forest Carbon 108 Guangxing Wang and Maozhen Zhang 7 Estimating Grassland Chlorophyll Content from Leaf to Landscape Level: Bridging the Gap in Spatial Scales 126 Yuhong He PART III SCALE AND LAND SURFACE PROCESSES 139 8 Visualizing Scale-Domain Manifolds: A Multiscale Geo-Object-Based Approach 141 Geoffrey J. Hay 9 Multiscale Segmentation and Classification of Remote Sensing Imagery with Advanced Edge and Scale-Space Features 170 Angelos Tzotsos, Konstantinos Karantzalos, and Demetre Argialas 10 Optimum Scale in Object-Based Image Analysis 197 Jungho Im, Lindi J. Quackenbush, Manqi Li, and Fang Fang PART IV SCALE AND LAND SURFACE PATTERNS 215 11 Scaling Issues in Studying the Relationship Between Landscape Pattern and Land Surface Temperature 217 Hua Liu and Qihao Weng 12 Multiscale Fractal Characteristics of Urban Landscape in Indianapolis, USA 230 Bingqing Liang and Qihao Weng 13 Spatiotemporal Scales of Remote Sensing Precipitation 253 Yang Hong and Yu Zhang PART V NEW FRONTIERS IN EARTH OBSERVATION TECHNOLOGY 265 14 Multiscale Approach for Ground Filtering from Lidar Altimetry Measurements 267 JoseeL. Silvan-Cárdenas and Le Wang 15 Hyperspectral Remote Sensing with Emphasis on Land Cover Mapping: From Ground to Satellite Observations 285 George P. Petropoulos, Kiril Manevski, and Toby N. Carlson INDEX 321

Read more less

Book SynopsisProvides the understanding and practical skills needed to develop and maintain an effective ESD control program for manufacturing, storage, and handling of ESD sensitive components This essential guide to ESD control programs explains the principles and practice of ESD control in an easily accessible way whilst also providing more depth and a wealth of references for those who want to gain a deeper knowledge of the subject. It describes static electricity and ESD principles such as triboelectrification, electrostatic fields, and induced voltages, with the minimum of theory or mathematics. It is designed for the reader to dip into as required, rather than need to read cover to cover. The ESD Control Program Handbook begins with definitions and commonly used terminology, followed by the principles of static electricity and ESD control. Chapter 3 discusses ESD susceptible electronic devices, and how ESD susceptibility of a component is measured. This is followed by the Seven habits of Table of ContentsIntroduction Foreword Preface Acknowledgements 1 Definitions and Terminology 1.1 Scientific notation and SI unit prefixes 1.2 Charge, electrostatic fields and voltage 1.2.1 Charge 1.2.2 Ions 1.2.3 Dissipation and neutralization of electrostatic charge 1.2.4 Voltage (potential) 1.2.5 Electric or electrostatic field 1.2.6 Gauss’s Law 1.2.7 Electrostatic attraction (ESA) 1.2.8 Permittivity 1.3 Electric current 1.4 Electrostatic discharge (ESD) 1.4.1 ESD Models 1.4.2 ElectroMagnetic Interference (EMI) 1.5 Earthing, grounding and equipotential bonding 1.6 Power and Energy 1.7 Resistance, resistivity and conductivity 1.7.1 Resistance 1.7.2 Resistivity and conductivity 1.7.2.1 Surface resistivity and surface resistance 1.7.2.2 Volume resistance, volume resistivity and conductivity 1.7.3 Insulators, conductors, conductive, dissipative and antistatic materials 1.7.4 Point to point resistance 1.7.5 Resistance to ground 1.7.6 Combination of resistances 1.8 Capacitance 1.9 Shielding 1.10 Dielectric breakdown strength 1.11 Relative humidity and dew point References 2 The principles of static electricity and electrostatic discharge (ESD) control 2.1 Overview 2.2 Contact charge generation (triboelectrification) 2.2.1 The polarity and magnitude of charging 2.3 Electrostatic charge build-up and dissipation 2.3.1 A simple electrical model of electrostatic charge build-up 2.3.2 Capacitance is variable 2.3.3 Charge decay time 2.3.4 Conductors and insulators revisited 2.3.5 The effect of relative humidity 2.4 Conductors in electrostatic fields 2.4.1 Voltage on conducting and insulating bodies and surfaces 2.4.2 Electrostatic field in practical situations 2.4.3 Faraday cage 2.4.4 Induction: An isolated conductive object attains a voltage when in an electric field 2.4.1 Induction charging: An object can become charged by grounding it 2.4.2 Faraday pail and shielding of charges within a closed object 2.5 Electrostatic discharges 2.5.1 ESD (sparks) between conducting objects 2.5.2 ESD from insulating surfaces 2.5.3 Corona discharge 2.5.4 Other types of discharge 2.6 Common electrostatic discharge sources 2.6.1 ESD from the human body 2.6.2 ESD from charged conductive objects 2.6.3 Charged device ESD 2.6.4 ESD from a charged board 2.6.5 ESD from a charged module 2.6.6 ESD from charged cables 2.7 Electronic models of ESD 2.8 Electrostatic attraction (ESA) 2.8.1 ESA and particle contamination 2.8.2 Neutralisation of surface voltages by air ions 2.8.3 Ionisers 2.8.4 Rate of charge neutralisation 2.8.5 The region of effective charge neutralisation around an ioniser 2.8.6 Ioniser balance and charging of a surface by an unbalanced ioniser 2.9 Electromagnetic interference (EMI) 2.10 How to avoid ESD damage of components 2.10.1 The circumstances leading to ESD damage of a component 2.10.2 Risk of ESD damage 2.10.3 The principles of ESD control References Bibliography 3 ESD sensitive devices (ESDS) 3.1 What are ESD sensitive devices? 3.2 Measuring ESD Susceptibility 3.2.1 Modelling electrostatic discharges 3.2.2 Standard ESD susceptibility tests 3.2.3 ESD withstand voltage 3.2.4 Human Body Model component susceptibility test 3.2.5 System level Human Body ESD susceptibility test 3.2.6 Machine Model component susceptibility test 3.2.7 Charged Device Model component susceptibility test 3.2.8 Comparison of test methods 3.2.9 Failure criteria used in ESD susceptibility test 3.2.10 Transmission line pulse techniques 3.2.11 The relation between ESD withstand voltage and ESD damage 3.2.12 Trends in component ESD test 3.3 ESD susceptibility of components 3.3.1 Introduction 3.3.2 Latent failures 3.3.3 Built-in on-chip ESD protection and ESD protection targets 3.3.4 ESD sensitivity of typical components 3.3.5 Discrete devices 3.3.6 The effect of scaling 3.3.7 Package effects 3.4 Some common types of ESD damage 3.4.1 Failure mechanisms 3.4.2 Breakdown of thin dielectric layers 3.4.3 MOSFETs 3.4.4 Susceptibility to electrostatic fields and breakdown between closely spaced conductors 3.4.5 Semiconductor junctions 3.4.6 Field effect structures and non-conductive device lids 3.4.7 Piezoelectric crystals 3.4.8 Light emitting diodes 3.4.9 Magnetoresistive heads 3.4.10 MicroElectroMechanical Systems (MEMS) 3.4.11 Burnout of device conductors or resistors 3.4.12 Passive components 3.4.13 Printed circuit boards and assemblies 3.4.14 Modules and system components 3.5 System level ESD 3.5.1 Introduction 3.5.2 The relationship between system level immunity and component ESD withstand 3.5.3 Charged cable ESD (Cable Discharge Events) 3.5.4 System-Efficient ESD Design (SEED) References Bibliography 4.1 Why habits? 4.2 The basis of ESD protection 4.3 What is an ESDS? 4.4 Habit 1: Always handle ESD sensitive components within an ESD Protected Area (EPA) 4.4.1 What is an EPA? 4.4.2 Defining the EPA boundary 4.4.3 Marking the EPA boundary 4.4.4 What is an insignificant level of ESD risk? 4.4.5 What are the sources of ESD risk? 4.4.6 What ESD protection measures are needed in the EPA? 4.4.7 Who will decide what ESD protection measures are required? 4.5 Habit 2: Where possible avoid use of insulators near ESDS 4.5.1 What is an insulator? 4.5.2 Essential and non-essential insulators 4.5.3 Remove non-essential insulators from the vicinity of ESDS 4.6 Habit 3: Reduce ESD risks from essential insulators 4.6.1 What is an insulator? 4.6.1 Insulators cannot be grounded 4.6.2 What to do about ESD risk from essential insulators 4.6.3 Using ionisers to reduce charge levels on insulators 4.7 Habit 4: Ground conductors, especially people 4.7.1 What is a conductor? 4.7.2 Conductive, dissipative or insulative? 4.7.3 Properties of a conductor 4.7.4 Charge and voltage decay time 4.7.5 The importance of material contact resistance in protecting ESDS 4.7.6 Safety considerations 4.7.7 Elimination of ESD by grounding and equipotential bonding 4.7.8 Understanding the grounding (earth) system 4.7.9 Grounding personnel handling ESDS 4.7.10 Grounding ESD control equipment 4.7.11 What if a conductor cannot be grounded? 4.8 Habit 5: Protect ESDS using ESD packaging 4.8.1 Don’t take ordinary packaging materials into an EPA 4.8.2 The basic functions of ESD packaging 4.8.3 Only open ESD packaging within an EPA 4.8.4 Don’t put papers or other unsuitable material in a package with an ESDS 4.9 Habit 6: Train personnel to know how to use ESD control equipment and procedures 4.9.1 Why train people? 4.9.2 Who needs ESD training? 4.9.3 What training do they need? 4.9.4 Refresher training 4.10 Habit 7: Check and test to make sure everything’s working 4.10.1 Why do we need to check and test? 4.10.2 What needs to be tested? 4.10.3 ESD control product qualification 4.10.4 ESD control product or system compliance verification 4.10.5 Test methods and pass criteria 4.10.6 How often should ESD control items be tested? 4.11 The seven habits and ESD standards 4.12 Handling very sensitive devices 4.13 Controlling other ESD sources References Bibliography 5 Automated systems 5.1 What makes automated handling and assembly different? 5.2 Conductive, static dissipative and insulative materials 5.3 Safety and AHE 5.4 Understanding ESD sources and risks 5.5 A strategy for ESD control 5.5.1 General principles of ESD control in AHE 5.5.2 The conditions leading to ESD damage 5.5.3 Strategies for ESD control in automated equipment 5.5.4 Qualification of ESD control measures 5.5.5 Compliance verification of ESD control measures 5.5.6 ESD training implications 5.5.7 Modification of existing AHE 5.6 Determination and implementation of ESD control measures in AHE 5.6.1 Define the critical path of ESDS 5.6.2 Examine the critical path and identify ESD risks 5.6.3 Determine appropriate ESD control measures 5.6.4 Include ESD control in new equipment specification 5.6.5 Document the ESD control measures used in the machine 5.6.6 Implement maintenance and compliance verification of ESD control measures 5.7 Materials, techniques and equipment used for ESD control in AHE 5.7.1 Grounding all conductors that make contact with ESDS 5.7.2 Isolated conductors 5.7.3 Preventing induced voltages on ESDS 5.7.4 Reducing tribocharging of ESDS 5.7.5 Using resistive contact materials to limit charged device ESD current 5.7.6 Anodisation 5.7.7 Bearings 5.7.8 Conveyor belts 5.7.9 Using ionisers to reduce charge levels on ESDS, essential insulators and isolated conductors 5.7.10 Vacuum pickers 5.8 ESD protective packaging 5.9 Measurements in AHE 5.9.1 Overview of measurements in AHE 5.9.2 Resistance measurements 5.9.3 Electrostatic field and voltage measurements 5.9.4 Charge measurements 5.9.5 Measurement of the voltage decay time and offset voltage due to neutralization by an ionizer 5.9.6 ESD current measurements 5.9.7 Detection of ESD using EMI detectors 5.1 Handling very sensitive components References Bibliography 6 ESD control standards 6.1 Introduction 6.2 The development of ESD control standards 6.3 Who writes the standards? 6.4 The IEC and ESDA standards 6.4.1 Standards numbering 6.4.2 The language of standards 6.4.3 Definitions used in standards 6.5 Requirements of IEC61340-5-1 and ANSI/ESD S20.20 standards 6.5.1 Background 6.5.2 Documentation and planning 6.5.3 Technical basis of the ESD control program 6.5.4 Personal safety 6.5.5 ESD Coordinator 6.5.6 Tailoring the ESD program 6.5.7 The ESD Program Plan 6.5.8 Training Plan 6.5.9 Product Qualification Plan 6.5.10 Compliance Verification Plan 6.5.11 Test methods 6.5.12 ESD Control Program Plan technical requirements 6.5.13 ESD Packaging 6.5.14 Marking References Bibliography 7 Selection, use, care and maintenance of equipment and materials for ESD control 7.1 Introduction 7.1.1 Selection and qualification of equipment 7.1.2 Use 7.1.3 Cleaning, care and maintenance of equipment 7.1.4 Compliance verification 7.2 ESD control earth (ground) 7.2.1 What does the ESD control earth do? 7.2.2 Choosing an ESD control earth 7.2.3 Qualification of ESD control earth 7.2.4 Compliance verification of ESD control earth 7.2.5 Common problems with ground connections 7.3 The ESD control floor 7.3.1 What does an ESD control floor do? 7.3.2 Permanent ESD control floor material 7.3.3 Semi-permanent or non-permanent ESD control floor materials 7.3.4 Selection of floor materials 7.3.5 Floor material qualification test 7.3.6 Acceptance of a floor installation 7.3.7 Use of floor materials 7.3.8 Care and maintenance of floors 7.3.9 Compliance verification test 7.3.10 Common problems 7.4 Earth bonding 7.4.1 The role of earth bonding points 7.4.2 Selection of earth bonding points 7.4.3 Qualification of earth bonding points 7.4.4 Use of earth bonding points 7.4.5 Compliance verification of earth bonding points 7.5 Personal grounding 7.5.1 What is the purpose of personal grounding? 7.5.2 Personal grounding and electrical safety 7.5.3 Wrist straps 7.5.4 Footwear and flooring grounding 7.5.5 Grounding via ESD control seating 7.5.1 Personal grounding via an ESD garment 7.6 Work surfaces 7.6.1 What does a work surface do? 7.6.2 Types of work surfaces 7.6.3 Selection of a work surface 7.6.4 Workstation qualification test 7.6.5 Acceptance of work surfaces 7.6.6 Cleaning and maintenance of work surfaces 7.6.7 Compliance verification test of work surfaces 7.6.8 Common problems 7.7 Storage racks and shelves 7.7.1 Should it be an EPA rack or shelf? 7.7.2 Selection, care and maintenance of racks and shelves 7.7.3 Qualification test of EPA shelves and racks 7.7.4 Acceptance of shelves and racks 7.7.5 Cleaning and maintenance of shelves and racks 7.7.6 Compliance verification test of shelves and racks 7.7.7 Common problems 7.8 Trolleys, carts and mobile equipment 7.8.1 Types of trolleys, carts and mobile equipment 7.8.2 Selection, care and maintenance of trolleys, carts and mobile equipment 7.8.3 Qualification of trolleys, carts and mobile equipment 7.8.4 Compliance verification of trolleys, carts and mobile equipment 7.8.5 Common problems 7.9 Seats 7.9.1 What is an ESD control seat for? 7.9.2 Types of ESD seating 7.9.3 Selection of seating 7.9.4 Qualification test of seating 7.9.5 Cleaning and maintenance of seating 7.9.6 Compliance verification test of seating 7.9.7 Common problems 7.9.8 Personal grounding via ESD control seating 7.10 Ionisers 7.10.1 What does an ioniser do? 7.10.2 Ion sources 7.10.3 Types of ioniser system 7.10.4 Selection of ionisers 7.10.5 Qualification test of ionisers 7.10.6 Cleaning and maintenance of ionisers 7.10.7 Compliance verification test of ionisers 7.10.8 Common problems 7.11 ESD control garments 7.11.1 What does an ESD control garment do? 7.11.2 Types of ESD control garments 7.11.3 Selection of ESD control garments 7.11.4 Qualification test of ESD control garments 7.11.5 Use of ESD control garments 7.11.6 Cleaning and maintenance of ESD control garments 7.11.7 Compliance verification of ESD control garments 7.11.8 Personal grounding via an ESD garment 7.12 Hand tools 7.12.1 Why have ESD hand tools? 7.12.2 Types of hand tool 7.12.3 Qualification test of hand tools 7.12.4 Use of hand tools 7.12.5 Compliance verification test of hand tools 7.12.6 Common problems with ESD control hand tools 7.13 Soldering or desoldering irons 7.13.1 ESD control issues with soldering or desoldering irons 7.13.2 Qualification of soldering irons 7.13.3 Compliance verification of soldering irons 7.14 Gloves and finger cots 7.14.1 Why have gloves and finger cots? 7.14.2 Types of gloves and finger cots 7.14.3 Selection of gloves or finger cots for ESD control 7.14.4 Qualification test of gloves and finger cots 7.14.5 Cleaning and maintenance of gloves 7.14.6 Compliance verification test of gloves and finger cots 7.14.7 Common problems with gloves and finger cots 7.15 Marking of ESD control equipment References Bibliography 8 ESD control packaging 8.1 Why is packaging important in ESD control? 8.2 Packaging functions 8.3 ESD control packaging terminology 8.3.1 Terminology in general usage 8.1 ESD packaging properties 8.1.1 Triboelectric charging 8.1.2 Surface resistance 8.1.3 Volume resistance 8.1.4 Electrostatic field shielding 8.1.5 ESD shielding 8.2 Use of ESD protective packaging 8.2.1 The importance of ESD packaging properties 8.2.2 Packaging used within the EPA 8.2.3 Packaging used to protect ESDS outside the EPA 8.2.4 Packaging used for non-ESD susceptible items 8.2.5 Avoiding charged cables and modules 8.3 Materials and processes used in ESD protective packaging 8.3.1 Introduction 8.3.2 Antistats, pink polythene and low charging materials 8.3.1 Static dissipative and conductive polymers 8.3.2 Intrinsically conductive or dissipative polymers 8.3.3 Metallised film 8.3.4 Anodised aluminium 8.3.5 Vacuum forming of filled polymers 8.3.6 Injection moulding 8.3.7 Embossing 8.3.8 Vapour deposition 8.3.9 Surface coating 8.3.10 Lamination 8.4 Types and forms of ESD protective packaging 8.4.1 Bags 8.4.2 Bubble wrap 8.4.3 Foam 8.4.4 Boxes, trays and PCB racks 8.4.5 Tape and reel 8.4.1 Sticks (tubes) 8.4.2 Self-adhesive tapes and labels 8.5 Packaging standards 8.5.1 ESD control and protection packaging standards 8.5.2 Moisture barrier packaging standards 8.5.3 ESD control packaging measurements 8.6 How to select an appropriate packaging system 8.6.1 Introduction 8.6.2 Customer requirements 8.6.3 What is the form of the ESDS? 8.6.4 ESD threats and ESD susceptibility 8.6.5 The intended packaging task 8.6.6 Evaluate the operational environment for the packaging 8.6.7 Selecting the ESD packaging type and ESD protective functions 8.6.8 Testing the packaging system 8.7 Marking of ESD protective packaging References Bibliography 9 How to evaluate an ESD Control Program 9.1 Introduction 9.2 Evaluation of ESD risks 9.2.1 Sources of ESD risk 9.2.2 Evaluation of ESD susceptibility of components and assemblies 2 9.3 Evaluating process capability based on HBM, MM and CDM data 9.3.1 Process capability evaluation 9.3.2 Human body ESD and manual handling processes 9.3.3 ESD risk due to ungrounded conductors 9.3.4 Charged device ESD risks 9.3.5 Damage to voltage sensitive structures such as a capacitor or a MOSFET gate 9.3.6 Evaluating ESD risk from electrostatic fields 9.3.7 Troubleshooting 9.4 Evaluating ESD protection needs 9.4.1 Standard ESD control precautions do not necessarily address all ESD risks 9.4.2 Evaluating return on investment for ESD protection measures 9.4.3 What is the maximum acceptable resistance to ground? 9.4.4 Should there be a minimum resistance to ground? 9.4.5 ESD from charged tools 9.4.6 Use of gloves or finger cots 9.4.7 Charged cable ESD 9.4.8 Charged board ESD 9.4.9 Charged module or assembly ESD 9.5 Evaluation of cost effectiveness of the ESD control program 9.5.1 The cost of an inadequate ESD control program 9.5.2 The benefit arising from of the ESD control program 9.5.3 Evaluation of the cost of an ESD control program 9.5.4 Return on investment (ROI) in ESD control 9.5.5 Optimising an ESD control program 9.6 Evaluation of compliance of an ESD control program with a standard 9.6.1 Two steps to compliance evaluation 9.6.2 Using checklists to evaluate compliance of documentation with a standard 9.6.3 Evaluation of compliance of a facility with the ESD control program 9.6.4 Common Problems References 10 How to develop an ESD control program 10.1 What do we need for a successful ESD control program? 10.1.1 The ESD control strategy 10.1.2 How to develop an ESD control program 10.1.3 Safety and ESD control 10.2 The EPA 10.2.1 Where do I need an EPA? 10.2.2 Boundaries and signage 10.3 What are the sources of ESD risk in the EPA? 10.4 How to determine appropriate ESD measures 10.4.1 ESD control principles 10.4.2 Select convenient ways of working 10.5 Documentation of ESD procedures 10.5.1 What should the documentation cover? 10.5.2 Writing an ESD Control Program Plan that is compliant with a standard 10.5.3 Introduction section 10.5.4 Scope 10.5.5 Terms and definitions 10.5.6 Personal safety 10.5.7 ESD Control Program 10.5.8 ESD Program Plan 10.5.9 ESD Training Plan 10.5.10 ESD control product qualification 10.5.11 Compliance verification plan 10.5.12 ESD Program Technical requirements 10.5.13 ESD Protected areas 10.5.14 ESD protective packaging 10.5.15 Marking of ESD related items 10.5.16 References 10.6 Evaluating ESD protection needs 10.7 Optimising the ESD control program 10.7.1 Costs and benefits of ESD control 10.7.2 Strategies for optimisation 10.8 Considerations for specific areas of the facility 10.8.1 The varying ESD control requirements of different areas 10.8.2 Goods In and Stores 10.8.3 Kitting 10.8.4 Despatch 10.8.5 Test 10.8.6 Research and development 10.9 Update and improvement 11 ESD Measurements 11.1 Introduction 11.2 Standard measurements 11.3 Product qualification or compliance verification? 11.3.1 Measurement methods for Product Qualification 11.3.2 Measurement methods for Compliance Verification 11.4 Environmental conditions 11.5 Summary of the standard test methods and their applications 11.6 Measurement equipment 11.6.1 Choosing a resistance meter for high resistance measurements 11.6.2 Low resistance meter for soldering iron grounding test 11.6.3 Resistance measurement electrodes 11.6.4 Concentric ring electrodes for packaging surface and volume resistance measurement 11.6.5 Two-point probe for packaging surface resistance measurements 11.6.6 Footwear test electrode 11.6.7 Hand-held electrode 11.6.8 Tool test electrode 11.6.9 Metal plate electrode for volume resistance measurements 11.6.10 Insulating supports 11.6.11 ESD ground connectors 11.6.12 Electrostatic field meters and voltmeters 11.6.13 Charge Plate Monitors (CPM) 11.7 Common problems with measurements 11.7.1 Humidity 11.7.2 Accidental measurement of parallel paths 11.8 Standard measurements specified by IEC 61340-5-1 and ANSI/ESD S20.20 11.8.1 Resistance to ground 11.8.2 Point to point resistance 11.8.3 Personal grounding equipment tests 11.8.4 Surface resistance of packaging materials 11.8.5 Volume resistance of packaging materials 11.8.6 ESD Shielding of bags 11.8.7 Evaluation of ESD Shielding of packaging systems 11.8.8 Measurement of ioniser decay time and offset voltage 11.8.9 Walk test of footwear and flooring 11.9 Useful measurements not specified by IEC 61340-5-1 and ESD S20.20 11.9.1 Electrostatic fields and voltages 11.9.2 Measurement of electric fields at the position of the ESDS 11.9.3 Measurement of surface voltages on large objects using an electrostatic field meter calibrated as a surface voltmeter 11.9.4 Measurement of voltage on devices or small conductors 11.9.5 Resistance of tools 11.9.6 Resistance of soldering irons 11.9.7 Resistance of gloves or finger cots 11.9.8 Charge decay measurements 11.9.9 Faraday pail measurement of charge on an object 11.9.10 ESD event detection References Bibliography  12 ESD Training 12.1 Why do we need ESD training? 12.2 Training planning 12.3 Who needs training? 12.4 Training form and content 12.4.1 Training goals 12.4.2 Initial training 12.4.3 Refresher training 12.4.4 Training methods 12.4.5 Supporting information 12.4.6 Training considerations 12.4.7 Public tutorials and courses 12.4.8 Qualifications and Certification 12.4.9 National and International ESD groups and electrostatics interest organisations 12.4.10 Conferences 12.4.11 Books, articles and online resources 12.5 Electrostatic and ESD theory 12.5.1 The pro’s and con’s of theory 12.5.2 A technical and non-technical explanation of electrostatic charging 12.6 Demonstrations of ESD control related issues 12.6.1 The role of demonstrations 12.6.2 Demonstrating real ESD damage 12.6.3 The cost of ESD damage 12.7 Electrostatic demonstrations 12.7.1 The value of electrostatic demonstrations 12.7.2 The pro’s and con’s of demonstrations 12.7.3 Useful equipment for demonstrations 12.7.4 Showing how easy it is to generate electrostatic charge 12.7.5 Understanding electrostatic fields 12.7.6 Understanding charge and voltage 12.7.7 Tribocharging 12.7.8 Production of ESD 12.7.9 Equipotential bonding and grounding 12.7.10 Induction charging 12.7.11 ESD on demand – the “perpetual ESD generator” 12.7.12 Body voltage and personal grounding 12.7.13 Charge generation and electrostatic field shielding of bags 12.7.14 Insulators cannot be grounded 12.7.15 Neutralising charge - Charge decay and voltage offset of ionisers 12.8 Evaluation 12.8.1 The need for evaluation 12.8.2 Practical test 12.8.3 Written tests 12.8.4 Pass criteria References Bibliography 13 The future 13.1 General trends 13.2 ESD withstand voltage trends 13.2.1 Integrated circuit ESD withstand voltage trends 13.2.2 Other component ESD withstand voltage trends 13.2.3 Availability of ESD withstand voltage data 13.2.4 Device ESD withstand test 13.3 ESD control programs and process controls 13.3.1 ESD control program development strategies 13.3.2 Human body ESD 13.3.3 ESD between ESDS and conductive items 13.3.4 Charged board, module and cable discharge events 13.3.5 Optimisation 13.4 Standards 13.5 ESD control equipment and materials 13.5.1 ESD control materials 13.5.2 ESD protective packaging 13.6 ESD related measurements 13.6.1 ESD protective packaging measurements 13.6.2 Voltage measurement on ESDS and ungrounded conductors 13.6.3 Measurements related to ESD risk in automated handling equipment 13.7 System ESD immunity 13.8 Education and training References Bibliography Appendix A. An example draft ESD control program A. ESD program plan at XXX LTD A.1 Introduction A.2 Scope A.3 Terms and definitions A.4 Personal safety A.5 ESD control program A.5.1 ESD control program requirements A.5.2 ESD Coordinator A.5.3 Tailoring ESD control requirements A.6 ESD control program technical requirements A.6.1 ESD ground A.6.2 Personal grounding A.6.3 ESD Protected Areas (EPA) A.6.4 ESD protective packaging A.6.5 Marking of ESD related items A.7 Compliance verification plan A.8 ESD training plan A.8.1 General requirements of the ESD Training Plan A.8.2 Training records A.8.3 Training content and frequency A.9 ESD control product qualification A.10 ESD control program references References

Read more less

Book SynopsisA unified, coherent treatment of current classifier ensemble methods, from fundamentals of pattern recognition to ensemble feature selection, now in its second edition The art and science of combining pattern classifiers has flourished into a prolific discipline since the first edition of Combining Pattern Classifiers was published in 2004. Dr. Kuncheva has plucked from the rich landscape of recent classifier ensemble literature the topics, methods, and algorithms that will guide the reader toward a deeper understanding of the fundamentals, design, and applications of classifier ensemble methods. Thoroughly updated, with MATLAB code and practice data sets throughout, Combining Pattern Classifiers includes: Coverage of Bayes decision theory and experimental comparison of classifiers Essential ensemble methods such as Bagging, Random forest, AdaBoost, Random subspace, Rotation forest, Random oracle, and Error Correcting Output Code, amTable of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgements xxi 1 Fundamentals of Pattern Recognition 1 1.1 Basic Concepts: Class, Feature, Data Set 1 1.1.1 Classes and Class Labels 1 1.1.2 Features 2 1.1.3 Data Set 3 1.1.4 Generate Your Own Data 6 1.2 Classifier, Discriminant Functions, Classification Regions 9 1.3 Classification Error and Classification Accuracy 11 1.3.1 Where Does the Error Come From? Bias and Variance 11 1.3.2 Estimation of the Error 13 1.3.3 Confusion Matrices and Loss Matrices 14 1.3.4 Training and Testing Protocols 15 1.3.5 Overtraining and Peeking 17 1.4 Experimental Comparison of Classifiers 19 1.4.1 Two Trained Classifiers and a Fixed Testing Set 20 1.4.2 Two Classifier Models and a Single Data Set 22 1.4.3 Two Classifier Models and Multiple Data Sets 26 1.4.4 Multiple Classifier Models and Multiple Data Sets 27 1.5 Bayes Decision Theory 30 1.5.1 Probabilistic Framework 30 1.5.2 Discriminant Functions and Decision Boundaries 31 1.5.3 Bayes Error 33 1.6 Clustering and Feature Selection 35 1.6.1 Clustering 35 1.6.2 Feature Selection 37 1.7 Challenges of Real-Life Data 40 Appendix 41 1.A.1 Data Generation 41 1.A.2 Comparison of Classifiers 42 1.A.2.1 MATLAB Functions for Comparing Classifiers 42 1.A.2.2 Critical Values for Wilcoxon and Sign Test 45 1.A.3 Feature Selection 47 2 Base Classifiers 49 2.1 Linear and Quadratic Classifiers 49 2.1.1 Linear Discriminant Classifier 49 2.1.2 Nearest Mean Classifier 52 2.1.3 Quadratic Discriminant Classifier 52 2.1.4 Stability of LDC and QDC 53 2.2 Decision Tree Classifiers 55 2.2.1 Basics and Terminology 55 2.2.2 Training of Decision Tree Classifiers 57 2.2.3 Selection of the Feature for a Node 58 2.2.4 Stopping Criterion 60 2.2.5 Pruning of the Decision Tree 63 2.2.6 C4.5 and ID3 64 2.2.7 Instability of Decision Trees 64 2.2.8 Random Trees 65 2.3 The Naïve Bayes Classifier 66 2.4 Neural Networks 68 2.4.1 Neurons 68 2.4.2 Rosenblatt’s Perceptron 70 2.4.3 Multi-Layer Perceptron 71 2.5 Support Vector Machines 73 2.5.1 Why Would It Work? 73 2.5.2 Classification Margins 74 2.5.3 Optimal Linear Boundary 76 2.5.4 Parameters and Classification Boundaries of SVM 78 2.6 The k-Nearest Neighbor Classifier (k-nn) 80 2.7 Final Remarks 82 2.7.1 Simple or Complex Models? 82 2.7.2 The Triangle Diagram 83 2.7.3 Choosing a Base Classifier for Ensembles 85 Appendix 85 2.A.1 MATLAB Code for the Fish Data 85 2.A.2 MATLAB Code for Individual Classifiers 86 2.A.2.1 Decision Tree 86 2.A.2.2 Naïve Bayes 89 2.A.2.3 Multi-Layer Perceptron 90 2.A.2.4 1-nn Classifier 92 3 An Overview of the Field 94 3.1 Philosophy 94 3.2 Two Examples 98 3.2.1 The Wisdom of the “Classifier Crowd” 98 3.2.2 The Power of Divide-and-Conquer 98 3.3 Structure of the Area 100 3.3.1 Terminology 100 3.3.2 A Taxonomy of Classifier Ensemble Methods 100 3.3.3 Classifier Fusion and Classifier Selection 104 3.4 Quo Vadis? 105 3.4.1 Reinventing the Wheel? 105 3.4.2 The Illusion of Progress? 106 3.4.3 A Bibliometric Snapshot 107 4 Combining Label Outputs 111 4.1 Types of Classifier Outputs 111 4.2 A Probabilistic Framework for Combining Label Outputs 112 4.3 Majority Vote 113 4.3.1 “Democracy” in Classifier Combination 113 4.3.2 Accuracy of the Majority Vote 114 4.3.3 Limits on the Majority Vote Accuracy: An Example 117 4.3.4 Patterns of Success and Failure 119 4.3.5 Optimality of the Majority Vote Combiner 124 4.4 Weighted Majority Vote 125 4.4.1 Two Examples 126 4.4.2 Optimality of the Weighted Majority Vote Combiner 127 4.5 Naïve-Bayes Combiner 128 4.5.1 Optimality of the Naïve Bayes Combiner 128 4.5.2 Implementation of the NB Combiner 130 4.6 Multinomial Methods 132 4.7 Comparison of Combination Methods for Label Outputs 135 Appendix 137 4.A.1 Matan’s Proof for the Limits on the Majority Vote Accuracy 137 4.A.2 Selected MATLAB Code 139 5 Combining Continuous-Valued Outputs 143 5.1 Decision Profile 143 5.2 How Do We Get Probability Outputs? 144 5.2.1 Probabilities Based on Discriminant Scores 144 5.2.2 Probabilities Based on Counts: Laplace Estimator 147 5.3 Nontrainable (Fixed) Combination Rules 150 5.3.1 A Generic Formulation 150 5.3.2 Equivalence of Simple Combination Rules 152 5.3.3 Generalized Mean Combiner 153 5.3.4 A Theoretical Comparison of Simple Combiners 156 5.3.5 Where Do They Come From? 160 5.4 The Weighted Average (Linear Combiner) 166 5.4.1 Consensus Theory 166 5.4.2 Added Error for the Weighted Mean Combination 167 5.4.3 Linear Regression 168 5.5 A Classifier as a Combiner 172 5.5.1 The Supra Bayesian Approach 172 5.5.2 Decision Templates 173 5.5.3 A Linear Classifier 175 5.6 An Example of Nine Combiners for Continuous-Valued Outputs 175 5.7 To Train or Not to Train? 176 Appendix 178 5.A.1 Theoretical Classification Error for the Simple Combiners 178 5.A.1.1 Set-up and Assumptions 178 5.A.1.2 Individual Error 180 5.A.1.3 Minimum and Maximum 180 5.A.1.4 Average (Sum) 181 5.A.1.5 Median and Majority Vote 182 5.A.1.6 Oracle 183 5.A.2 Selected MATLAB Code 183 6 Ensemble Methods 186 6.1 Bagging 186 6.1.1 The Origins: Bagging Predictors 186 6.1.2 Why Does Bagging Work? 187 6.1.3 Out-of-bag Estimates 189 6.1.4 Variants of Bagging 190 6.2 Random Forests 190 6.3 AdaBoost 192 6.3.1 The AdaBoost Algorithm 192 6.3.2 The arc-x4 Algorithm 194 6.3.3 Why Does AdaBoost Work? 195 6.3.4 Variants of Boosting 199 6.3.5 A Famous Application: AdaBoost for Face Detection 199 6.4 Random Subspace Ensembles 203 6.5 Rotation Forest 204 6.6 Random Linear Oracle 208 6.7 Error Correcting Output Codes (ECOC) 211 6.7.1 Code Designs 212 6.7.2 Decoding 214 6.7.3 Ensembles of Nested Dichotomies 216 Appendix 218 6.A.1 Bagging 218 6.A.2 AdaBoost 220 6.A.3 Random Subspace 223 6.A.4 Rotation Forest 225 6.A.5 Random Linear Oracle 228 6.A.6 ECOC 229 7 Classifier Selection 230 7.1 Preliminaries 230 7.2 Why Classifier Selection Works 231 7.3 Estimating Local Competence Dynamically 233 7.3.1 Decision-Independent Estimates 233 7.3.2 Decision-Dependent Estimates 238 7.4 Pre-Estimation of the Competence Regions 239 7.4.1 Bespoke Classifiers 240 7.4.2 Clustering and Selection 241 7.5 Simultaneous Training of Regions and Classifiers 242 7.6 Cascade Classifiers 244 Appendix: Selected MATLAB Code 244 7.A.1 Banana Data 244 7.A.2 Evolutionary Algorithm for a Selection Ensemble for the Banana Data 245 8 Diversity in Classifier Ensembles 247 8.1 What is Diversity? 247 8.1.1 Diversity for a Point-Value Estimate 248 8.1.2 Diversity in Software Engineering 248 8.1.3 Statistical Measures of Relationship 249 8.2 Measuring Diversity in Classifier Ensembles 250 8.2.1 Pairwise Measures 250 8.2.2 Nonpairwise Measures 251 8.3 Relationship Between Diversity and Accuracy 256 8.3.1 An Example 256 8.3.2 Relationship Patterns 258 8.3.3 A Caveat: Independent Outputs ≠ Independent Errors 262 8.3.4 Independence is Not the Best Scenario 265 8.3.5 Diversity and Ensemble Margins 267 8.4 Using Diversity 270 8.4.1 Diversity for Finding Bounds and Theoretical Relationships 270 8.4.2 Kappa-error Diagrams and Ensemble Maps 271 8.4.3 Overproduce and Select 275 8.5 Conclusions: Diversity of Diversity 279 Appendix 280 8.A.1 Derivation of Diversity Measures for Oracle Outputs 280 8.A.1.1 Correlation 𝜌 280 8.A.1.2 Interrater Agreement 𝜅 281 8.A.2 Diversity Measure Equivalence 282 8.A.3 Independent Outputs ≠ Independent Errors 284 8.A.4 A Bound on the Kappa-Error Diagram 286 8.A.5 Calculation of the Pareto Frontier 287 9 Ensemble Feature Selection 290 9.1 Preliminaries 290 9.1.1 Right and Wrong Protocols 290 9.1.2 Ensemble Feature Selection Approaches 294 9.1.3 Natural Grouping 294 9.2 Ranking by Decision Tree Ensembles 295 9.2.1 Simple Count and Split Criterion 295 9.2.2 Permuted Features or the “Noised-up” Method 297 9.3 Ensembles of Rankers 299 9.3.1 The Approach 299 9.3.2 Ranking Methods (Criteria) 300 9.4 Random Feature Selection for the Ensemble 305 9.4.1 Random Subspace Revisited 305 9.4.2 Usability, Coverage, and Feature Diversity 306 9.4.3 Genetic Algorithms 312 9.5 Nonrandom Selection 315 9.5.1 The “Favorite Class” Model 315 9.5.2 The Iterative Model 315 9.5.3 The Incremental Model 316 9.6 A Stability Index 317 9.6.1 Consistency Between a Pair of Subsets 317 9.6.2 A Stability Index for K Sequences 319 9.6.3 An Example of Applying the Stability Index 320 Appendix 322 9.A.1 MATLAB Code for the Numerical Example of Ensemble Ranking 322 9.A.2 MATLAB GA Nuggets 322 9.A.3 MATLAB Code for the Stability Index 324 10 A Final Thought 326 References 327 Index 353

Read more less

Book SynopsisAutonomic Intelligence Evolved Cooperative Networkingoffers a comprehensive advancement of the state-of-the art technological developments in the fields of Cooperative Networking and Autonomic Computing. Based on his track record in industrial standardisation, as well as academic and applied research, the author presents a fully-fledged Autonomic Cooperative Networking Architectural Model that encompasses the relevant workings of both the Layers of the Open Systems Interconnection Reference Model and the Levels of the Generic Autonomic Network Architecture. .Table of ContentsAbout the Author ix Preface xi Acknowledgements xiii Acronyms xv Notation xxiii 1 Introduction 1 2 Autonomically Driven Cooperative Design 7 2.1 Introduction 7 2.2 Biologically Inspired Autonomics 8 2.2.1 Rationale and Vision 8 2.2.2 Nomenclatural Perspectives 12 2.2.3 Towards Self-Management 17 2.3 Emergent Autonomic Networking 21 2.3.1 Generic Autonomic Network Architecture 21 2.3.2 Decision-Making Entities 25 2.3.3 Abstraction Levels and Control Loops 30 2.4 Synergetic Cooperative Approach 34 2.4.1 Vertical Technological Pillars 34 2.4.2 Horizontal Architectural Extensions 38 2.4.3 Incremental Conceptual Outline 42 2.5 Conclusion 47 References 48 3 Protocol Level Spatio-Temporal Processing 51 3.1 Introduction 51 3.2 Multiple-InputMultiple-Output Channel 52 3.2.1 Diversity-Rooted Origins 52 3.2.2 Radio Channel Virtualisation 56 3.2.3 Capacity,Modelling, and Gains 60 3.3 Space-Time Coding Techniques 64 3.3.1 Orthogonal Block-Coded Designs 64 3.3.2 Derivation of Decoding Metrics 68 3.3.3 Trellis-Coded Approach 71 3.4 Protocol Level Overlay Logic 76 3.4.1 Autonomic Cooperative Node 76 3.4.2 Cooperative Transmission Decision Element 80 3.4.3 Architectural Integration Aspects 83 3.5 Conclusion 88 References 89 4 Function Level Relaying Techniques 93 4.1 Introduction 93 4.2 Conventional and Cooperative Relaying 94 4.2.1 Classification of Relaying Protocols 94 4.2.2 Collaborative and Supportive Protocols 98 4.2.3 Virtual Antenna Arrays 103 4.3 Fixed Relay Deployment Concepts 106 4.3.1 Grid-Based Manhattan Scenario 106 4.3.2 Noncooperative Approach Limitations 110 4.3.3 Cooperation-Enabled Indoor Scenario 111 4.4 Function Level Overlay Logic 119 4.4.1 Roots of Autonomic Cooperative Behaviour 119 4.4.2 Cooperative Re-Routing Decision Element 123 4.4.3 Architectural Integration Aspects 127 4.5 Conclusion 131 References 132 5 Node Level Routing Mechanisms 137 5.1 Introduction 137 5.2 Optimised Link State Routing Protocol 138 5.2.1 Functional and Structural Characteristics 138 5.2.2 Multi-Point Relay Station Selection Heuristics 142 5.2.3 Information Storage Repositories 146 5.3 Routing Information Enhanced Cooperation 150 5.3.1 Justification and Algorithmic Outline 150 5.3.2 Evolved Messaging Structure 154 5.3.3 Address Auto-Configuration and Duplication 158 5.4 Node Level Overlay Logic 162 5.4.1 Autonomic Cooperative Networking Protocol 162 5.4.2 Cooperation Management Decision Element 166 5.4.3 Architectural Integration Aspects 170 5.5 Conclusion 175 References 176 6 Network Level SystemOrchestration 179 6.1 Introduction 179 6.2 Standardisation Driven Design 180 6.2.1 Research and Investment Perspective 180 6.2.2 Staged Instantiation of Reference Model 183 6.2.3 Cross-Specification Extensions 187 6.3 Cooperative Emergency Networking 192 6.3.1 Emergency System Requirements 192 6.3.2 Autonomic Control Incorporation 197 6.3.3 Cooperative Enhancement Justification 201 6.4 Network Level Overlay Logic 203 6.4.1 Autonomic Cooperative Networking Architectural Model 203 6.4.2 Cooperation Orchestration Decision Element 209 6.4.3 Architectural Integration Aspects 213 6.5 Conclusion 217 References 218 7 Conclusion 223 A Appendix 227 Index 253

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers the state-of-the-art in digital games research and development for anyone working with or studying digital games and those who are considering entering into this rapidly growing industry.Trade Review“The broad overview of the field and the varied perspectives different chapters offer are valuable summaries of the state of the art in video game research. Both graduate students starting their research work and professional developers can benefit from this wide-ranging appraisal.” (Computing Reviews, 10 June 2015) Table of ContentsContributors ix Introduction 1 Marios C. Angelides and Harry Agius Part I Gaming Techniques and Tools 1. Toward the Adaptive Generation of Bespoke Game Content 17 Cameron Browne, Simon Colton, Michael Cook, Jeremy Gow, and Robin Baumgarten 2. Procedural Content Generation 62 Tom Betts 3. Content Generation in a Collaborative Browser-Based Game Environment 92 Juha-Matti Vanhatupa and Janne Lautamaki 4. Automatic Narratives in MMORPGs 111 Hao Wang 5. Collision Detection with Navigation Meshes 130 D. Hunter Hale and G. Michael Youngblood 6. Mass Population: Plausible and Practical Crowd Simulation 146 Sybren A. Stüvel, Cathy Ennis, and Arjan Egges 7. Synchronization in Multiplayer Online Games 175 Stefano Ferretti 8. Exchanging Social Information in Online Social Games 197 Fabrizio Davide, Stefano Triberti, and Francesco Collovà 9. Collaboration through Gaming 235 Damon Daylamani Zad, Marios C. Angelides, and Harry Agius 10. AI for General Strategy Game Playing 274 Jon Lau Nielsen, Benjamin Fedder Jensen, Tobias Mahlmann, Julian Togelius, and Georgios N. Yannakakis 11. Rated A for Advertising: A Critical Reflection on In-Game Advertising 305 Laura Herrewijn and Karolien Poels Part II Game Play 12. Immersion in Digital Games: Review of Gaming Experience Research 339 Paul Cairns, Anna Cox, and A. Imran Nordin 13. Know Thy Player: An Integrated Model of Player Experience for Digital Games Research 362 Malte Elson, Johannes Breuer, and Thorsten Quandt 14. At the Core of Player Experience: Continuation Desire in Digital Games 388 Henrik Schoenau-Fog 15. Empirical Game Aesthetics 411 Chris Bateman 16. Mobile Game Play and Everyday Life 444 Barbara Grüter, Nassrin Hajinejad, and Iaroslav Sheptykin 17. Video Games, Machinima, and Classic Cinema: Meaningful Gaming 471 Pilar Lacasa, María Ruth García-Pernía, and Sara Cortés 18. Video Games in Educational Settings: Developing Skills for New Media Learning 502 Ana Belen García Varela, Héctor Del Castillo, David Herrero, Natalia Monjelat, and Mirian Checa 19. Retro-Computing Community Sites and the Museum 523 Helen Stuckey and Melanie Swalwell 20. From the Deceptively Simple to the Pleasurably Complex: The Rise of Cooperative Address in the History of Video Games 548 Carl Therrien Part III Game Design and Development 21. Emotion in Games 575 Celso M. de Melo, Ana Paiva, and Jonathan Gratch 22. Task Deployment in Three Types of Game Spatial Structures 593 Chuen-Tsai Sun and Sheng-yi Hsu 23. Social Ontology of Digital Games 607 Ivan Mosca 24. Gaming with Purpose: Heuristic Understanding of Ubiquitous Game Development and Design for Human Computation 645 Lindsay D. Grace and Peter Jamieson 25. Beyond Stereotypes of Gender and Gaming: Video Games Made by Middle School Students 667 Jill Denner, Eloy Ortiz, Shannon Campe, and Linda Werner 26. Decade of Game Making for Learning: From Tools to Communities 689 Quinn Burke and Yasmin B. Kafai 27. Designing Interactive Tangible Games for Diverse Forms of Play 710 Tilde Bekker, Ben Schouten, and Mark de Graaf 28. Artisanal Local Networks: Game Work and Culture in Independent Game Production 730 Orlando Guevara-Villalobos Index 751

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book offers a thorough treatment of system and product development, where technical, productivity, and end user elements come together to generate value for stakeholders. Compiling over twenty years of research, the book applies a value approach to design, manufacturing, delivery, operations, and maintenance.Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xv 1 Preview of Best Practices 1 Resource and Note 3 Review Checklist 4 2 Stakeholder Values 5 2.1. Value and Stakeholder Identities 6 2.2. The Stakeholder Connection 7 Resources and Notes 11 Review Checklist 11 3 Role of Systems Engineering 13 3.1. Definition of a System 13 3.2. Industry Views 16 3.3. Stakeholders and Systems 17 3.4. System Value Stream 18 Resources and Notes 19 Review Checklist 19 4 Stakeholder Value Drivers 21 4.1. Value Analysis in a Strategic Framework 22 4.2. The QFD Stakeholder Values Matrix Process 22 4.3. QFD Process Summary 24 Resources and Notes 27 Review Checklist 27 5 Value-Driven Requirements Development 29 5.1. Establishing the Parameters 29 5.2. Translating Values to Requirements 32 5.3. Changing Requirements 34 5.4. Quantifying Requirements 35 5.5. Requirements Process Summary 37 Resources and Notes 39 Review Checklist 40 6 Functional Analysis 41 6.1. Functional Flows 41 6.2. Functional Block Diagrams 43 Resources and Notes 46 Review Checklist 46 7 Interface Definition and Management 47 7.1. Interface Complexity 48 7.2. The N-Squared Matrix 50 7.3. Interface Control 53 Resources and Notes 54 Review Checklist 54 8 Concept Selection and Trades 55 8.1. Concept Options 55 8.2. Concept Creativity 57 8.3. Decision Processes 59 8.4. Multidiscipline Analysis and Optimization 66 Resources and Notes 67 Review Checklist 67 9 Architectures and “Architecting” 69 9.1. Selecting an Architecture 69 9.2. Architectural Design 71 9.3. Architectural Imperatives and Precautions 72 Resources and Notes 78 Review Checklist 79 10 Failure Modes and Fault Tolerance 81 10.1. Causes of Failure 81 10.2. Failure Modes and Effects 84 10.3. Fault Tolerance 87 10.4. Redundancy Concepts 88 10.5. Human Factors and Hazards 91 10.6. Programmatic Failures and Fault Tolerance 93 10.7. Summary 93 Resources and Notes 94 Review Checklist 94 11 Risk Analysis 95 11.1. Risk Philosophies 95 11.2. Risk Management 96 11.3. Risk Mitigation Practices 100 Resources and Notes 105 Review Checklist 105 12 Integration, Verification, and Validation 107 12.1. Definitions 107 12.2. Planning Issues 109 12.3. Design Verification and Validation 109 12.4. Quality Assurance 110 12.5. Test Considerations 113 Resources and Notes 115 Review Checklist 116 13 Integrated Product and Process Development 117 13.1. Definitions 117 13.2. Integrated Project Teams 119 13.3. IPPD Benefits 123 Resources and Notes 125 Review Checklist 125 14 Design for X 127 Resources and Notes 130 Review Checklist 130 15 Development Management 131 15.1. Key Integrations 131 15.2. Strategic Approaches 132 15.3. Measuring Progress 133 Resources and Notes 141 Review Checklist 142 16 Cost Estimating 143 16.1. Stakeholder Involvement 143 16.2. Costing Factors 144 16.3. Estimating Methods 144 16.4. Learning Curves 148 16.5. Cost-Estimating Problems 149 Resources and Notes 151 Review Checklist 151 17 Lean Principles and Practices 153 17.1. Thinking Lean Precepts 154 17.2. Dealing with Waste 156 17.3. Lean Models 159 Resources and Notes 161 Review Checklist 162 18 Value Stream Mapping 163 18.1. Streamlining the Process 163 18.2. Adapting to New Developments 167 Resources and Notes 170 Review Checklist 171 19 Case Studies 173 Case Study 1: Health Management System for a Next-Generation UAV 173 Case Study 2: Product and Systems Development for the Unique Identification Authority of India 189 Case Study 3: Software Development for a Photovoltaic System Construction Project 196 Review Checklist 208 20 Process Summary and Tools 209 Appendix I: Notes on the Design Structure Matrix 215 Tyson R. Browning Appendix II: Lean Systems Engineering and Lean Enablers for Systems Engineering 221 Bohdan W. Oppenheim Appendix III: Introduction to Modeling and Simulation 235 Heinz Stoewer Appendix IV: Introduction to Multidisciplinary Analysis and Optimization 241 Juan J. Alonso Bibliography 247 Index 251

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe only book on integrated circuits for optical communications that fully covers High-Speed IOs, PLLs, CDRs, and transceiver design including optical communication The increasing demand for high-speed transport of data has revitalized optical communications, leading to extensive work on high-speed device and circuit design.Table of ContentsPreface to First Edition xiii Preface xv About the Author xvii 1 Introduction to Optical Communications 1 1.1 Brief History 1 1.2 Generic Optical System 2 1.3 Design Challenges 5 1.4 State of the Art 6 2 Basic Concepts 8 2.1 Properties of Random Binary Data 8 2.2 Generation of Random Data 12 2.3 Data Formats 14 2.4 Effect of Bandwidth Limitation on Random Data 16 2.5 Effect of Noise on Random Data 21 2.6 Phase Noise and Jitter 24 2.7 Transmission Lines 30 3 Optical Devices 36 3.1 Laser Diodes 36 3.2 Optical Fibers 46 3.3 Photodiodes 55 3.4 Optical Systems 58 4 Transimpedance Amplifiers 62 4.1 General Considerations 62 4.2 Open-Loop TIAs 73 4.3 Feedback TIAs 87 4.4 Supply Rejection 97 4.5 Differential TIAs 100 4.6 High-Performance Techniques 103 4.7 Automatic Gain Control 114 4.8 Case Studies 118 4.9 New Developments in TIA Design 122 5 Limiting Amplifiers and Output Buffers 130 5.1 General Considerations 130 5.2 Broadband Techniques 138 5.3 Output Buffers 149 5.4 Distributed Amplification 159 5.5 Other Broadband Techniques 171 6 Oscillator Fundamentals 185 6.1 General Considerations 185 6.2 Ring Oscillators 187 6.3 LC Oscillators 198 6.4 Voltage-Controlled Oscillators 211 6.5 Mathematical Model of VCOs 227 7 LC Oscillators 233 7.1 Monolithic Inductors 233 7.2 Monolithic Varactors 246 7.3 Basic LC Oscillators 248 7.4 Quadrature Oscillators 255 7.5 Distributed Oscillators 261 8 Phase-Locked Loops 264 8.1 Simple PLL 264 8.2 Charge-Pump PLLs 280 8.3 Nonideal Effects in PLLs 293 8.4 Delay-Locked Loops 300 8.5 Applications 302 9 Clock and Data Recovery 308 9.1 General Considerations 308 9.2 Phase Detectors for Random Data 320 9.3 Frequency Detectors for Random Data 333 9.4 CDR Architectures 338 9.5 Jitter in CDR Circuits 344 10 Multiplexers and Laser Drivers 356 10.1 Multiplexers 356 10.2 Frequency Dividers 364 10.3 Laser and Modulator Drivers 374 10.4 Design Principles 378 10.5 New Developments in Laser Driver Design 385 11 Burst-Mode Circuits 393 11.1 Passive Optical Networks 393 11.2 Burst-Mode TIAs 395 11.3 Burst-Mode CDR Circuits 404 11.4 Alternative BM CDR Architectures 413 Index 417

Read more less

Book SynopsisProviding a working level of expertise for the numerous non-specialists entering this rapidly growing industry, Electricity from Wave and Tide introduces all relevant topics in wind and tidal energy, from global resources and historical background to today's wave and tidal machines.Trade Review“This thoroughly readable and attractively illustrated volume certainly deserves a place on many a bookshelf.” (Underwater Technology, 1 March 2014) “With 165 full-colour illustrations and photographs of devices at an advanced stage, this book is both a valuable primer on marine energy and an inspiring picture of today’s most promising marine energy devices and developments.” (Real Power magazine, 1 October 2013) Table of ContentsPreface ix Acknowledgements xi 1. Introduction 1 1.1 Marine energy and Planet Earth 1 1.2 Marine resources 5 1.2.1 Waves of the world 5 1.2.2 Tides of the world 11 1.3 A piece of history 18 1.3.1 Working with waves 18 1.3.2 Tapping tides 23 1.4 Power, energy and performance 27 1.5 Into the future 34 References 37 2. Capturing marine energy 39 2.1 Ocean waves 39 2.1.1 Linear waves 39 2.1.2 Random waves 43 2.1.3 Wave spectra48 2.1.4 Wave modification 52 2.1.5 Wave measurement 56 2.2 Wave energy conversion 59 2.2.1 Introductory 59 2.2.2 Types of wave energy converter 60 2.2.3 Principles of wave energy capture 62 2.2.3.1 Floating devices 62 2.2.3.2 Tuning and damping 64 2.2.3.3 When waves meet WECs 68 2.3 Tidal streams 71 2.3.1 Hydrodynamics 71 2.3.2 Tidal harmonics 76 2.3.3 Predicting tidal streams 83 2.4 Tidal stream energy conversion 86 2.4.1 Introductory 86 2.4.2 Tidal stream turbines 89 2.4.2.1 Turbine sizes and power ratings 89 2.4.2.2 Extracting energy: the Betz Limit 93 2.4.2.3 Lift and drag 96 2.4.2.4 Rotor speed and power coefficient 102 2.4.3 Turbine siting 105 2.5 Research and development 108 2.5.1 Models and test tanks 108 2.5.2 The European Marine Energy Centre (EMEC) 111 2.5.2.1 Wave and tidal test sites 111 2.5.2.2 Research activities 121 References 124 3. Generating electricity 125 3.1 Introductory 125 3.2 Power take-off 126 3.3 AC electricity 130 3.4 Generators 141 3.4.1 Introductory 141 3.4.2 Synchronous generators 147 3.4.3 Asynchronous generators 151 3.4.3.1 Squirrel-cage and wound-rotor induction machines 151 3.4.3.2 Doubly-fed induction generators 157 3.4.4 Linear motion generators 162 3.5 Connecting to the grid 166 3.5.1 Setting the scene 166 3.5.2 Grid strength and fault levels 169 3.5.3 Electrical quality 173 3.6 Large-scale renewable energy 175 3.6.1 Introductory 175 3.6.2 Intermittency and variability176 3.6.3 Capacity credit and backup generation 179 References 183 4. Case studies: Wave energy converters 185 4.1 Introductory 185 4.2 Case studies 186 4.2.1 Pelamis 186 4.2.2 Oyster 192 4.2.3 Limpet andMutriku 199 4.2.4 Wave Dragon 205 4.2.5 PowerBuoy® 211 4.2.6 Penguin 216 References 221 5. Case studies: Tidal stream energy converters 223 5.1 Introductory 223 5.2 Case studies 224 5.2.1 Andritz Hydro Hammerfest 224 5.2.2 Atlantis Resources 229 5.2.3 Marine Current Turbines 234 5.2.4 OpenHydro 240 5.2.5 Pulse Tidal 245 5.2.6 Scotrenewables Tidal Power 251 5.2.7 Tidal Generation 258 References 262 Index 263

Read more less

Book SynopsisExtensively updated evaluation of current and future network technologies, applications and devices This book follows on from its successful predecessor with an introduction to next generation network technologies, mobile devices, voice and multimedia services and the mobile web 2.0.Table of ContentsPreface xi 1 Evolution from 2G over 3G to 4G 1 1.1 First Half of the 1990s—Voice-Centric Communication 1 1.2 Between 1995 and 2000: The Rise of Mobility and the Internet 1 1.3 Between 2000 and 2005: Dot Com Burst, Web 2.0, Mobile Internet 2 1.4 Between 2005 and 2010: Global Coverage, Fixed Line VoIP, and Mobile Broadband 4 1.5 2010 and Beyond 5 1.6 All over IP in Mobile—The Biggest Challenge 6 1.7 Summary 6 2 Beyond 3G Network Architectures 9 2.1 Overview 9 2.2 UMTS, HSPA, and HSPA+ 10 2.3 LTE 43 2.4 802.11 Wi-Fi 74 3 Network Capacity and Usage Scenarios 95 3.1 Usage in Developed Markets and Emerging Economies 95 3.2 How to Control Mobile Usage 96 3.3 Measuring Mobile Usage from a Financial Point of View 99 3.4 Cell Capacity in Downlink 100 3.5 Current and Future Frequency Bands for Cellular Wireless 105 3.6 Cell Capacity in Uplink 106 3.7 Per-User Throughput in Downlink 109 3.8 Per-User Throughput in Uplink 114 3.9 Traffic Estimation Per User 116 3.10 Overall Wireless Network Capacity 117 3.11 Network Capacity for Train Routes, Highways, and Remote Areas 124 3.12 When will GSM be Switched Off? 125 3.13 Cellular Network VoIP Capacity 127 3.14 Wi-Fi VoIP Capacity 130 3.15 Wi-Fi and Interference 132 3.16 Wi-Fi Capacity in Combination with DSL, Cable, and Fiber 134 3.17 Backhaul for Wireless Networks 138 3.18 A Hybrid Cellular/Wi-Fi Network Today and in the Future 143 4 Voice over Wireless 149 4.1 Circuit-Switched Mobile Voice Telephony 150 4.2 Packet-Switched Voice Telephony 153 4.3 SIP Telephony over Fixed and Wireless Networks 157 4.4 Voice and Related Applications over IMS 169 4.5 Voice over DSL and Cable with Femtocells 223 4.6 Unlicensed Mobile Access and Generic Access Network 228 4.7 Network Operator Deployed Voice over IP Alternatives 231 4.8 Over-the-Top (OTT) Voice over IP Alternatives 236 4.9 Which Voice Technology will Reign in the Future? 237 5 Evolution of Mobile Devices and Operating Systems 241 5.1 Introduction 241 5.2 The System Architecture for Voice-Optimized Devices 246 5.3 The System Architecture for Multimedia Devices 248 5.4 Mobile Graphics Acceleration 253 5.5 Hardware Evolution 256 5.6 Multimode, Multifrequency Terminals 273 5.7 Wireless Notebook Connectivity 276 5.8 Impact of Hardware Evolution on Future Data Traffic 277 5.9 Power Consumption and User Interface as the Dividing Line in Mobile Device Evolution 279 5.10 Feature Phone Operating Systems 280 5.11 Smartphone Operating Systems 282 5.12 Operating System Tasks 288 6 Mobile Web 2.0, Apps, and Owners 297 6.1 Overview 297 6.2 (Mobile) Web 1.0—How Everything Started 298 6.3 Web 2.0—Empowering the User 299 6.4 Web 2.0 from the User’s Point of View 299 6.5 The Ideas behind Web 2.0 306 6.6 Discovering the Fabrics of Web 2.0 310 6.7 Mobile Web 2.0—Evolution and Revolution of Web 2.0 321 6.8 (Mobile) Web 2.0 and Privacy and Security Considerations 334 6.9 Mobile Apps 340 6.10 Android App Programing Introduction 342 6.11 Impact of Mobile Apps on Networks and Power Consumption 349 6.12 Mobile Apps Security and Privacy Considerations 351 6.13 Summary 354 7 Conclusion 357 Index 361

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe confluence of cloud computing, parallelism and advanced machine intelligence approaches has created a world in which the optimum knowledge system will usually be architected from the combination of two or more knowledge-generating systems. There is a need, then, to provide a reusable, broadly-applicable set of design patterns to empower the intelligent system architect to take advantage of this opportunity. This book explains how to design and build intelligent systems that are optimized for changing system requirements (adaptability), optimized for changing system input (robustness), and optimized for one or more other important system parameters (e.g., accuracy, efficiency, cost). It provides an overview of traditional parallel processing which is shown to consist primarily of task and component parallelism; before introducing meta-algorithmic parallelism which is based on combining two or more algorithms, classification engines or other systems. Key features:Table of Contents1 Introduction and Overview 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Why Is This Book Important? 2 1.3 Organization of the Book 3 1.4 Informatics 4 1.5 Ensemble Learning 6 1.6 Machine Learning/Intelligence 7 1.7 Artificial Intelligence 22 1.8 Data Mining/Knowledge Discovery 31 1.9 Classification 32 1.10 Recognition 38 1.11 System-Based Analysis 39 1.12 Summary 39 References 40 2 Parallel Forms of Parallelism 42 2.1 Introduction 42 2.2 Parallelism by Task 43 2.3 Parallelism by Component 52 2.4 Parallelism by Meta-algorithm 64 2.5 Summary 71 References 72 3 Domain Areas: Where Is This Relevant? 73 3.1 Introduction 73 3.2 Overview of the Domains 74 3.3 Primary Domains 75 3.4 Secondary Domains 86 3.5 Summary 101 References 102 4 Applications of Parallelism by Task 104 4.1 Introduction 104 4.2 Primary Domains 105 4.3 Summary 135 References 136 5 Application of Parallelism by Component 137 5.1 Introduction 137 5.2 Primary Domains 138 5.3 Summary 172 References 173 6 Introduction to Meta-algorithmics 175 6.1 Introduction 175 6.2 First-Order Meta-algorithmics 178 6.3 Second-Order Meta-algorithmics 195 6.4 Third-Order Meta-algorithmics 218 6.5 Summary 240 References 240 7 First-Order Meta-algorithmics and Their Applications 241 7.1 Introduction 241 7.2 First-Order Meta-algorithmics and the “Black Box” 241 7.3 Primary Domains 242 7.4 Secondary Domains 257 7.5 Summary 271 References 271 8 Second-Order Meta-algorithmics and Their Applications 272 8.1 Introduction 272 8.2 Second-Order Meta-algorithmics and Targeting the “Fringes” 273 8.3 Primary Domains 279 8.4 Secondary Domains 304 8.5 Summary 308 References 308 9 Third-Order Meta-algorithmics and Their Applications 310 9.1 Introduction 310 9.2 Third-Order Meta-algorithmic Patterns 311 9.3 Primary Domains 313 9.4 Secondary Domains 328 9.5 Summary 340 References 341 10 Building More Robust Systems 342 10.1 Introduction 342 10.2 Summarization 342 10.3 Cloud Systems 350 10.4 Mobile Systems 353 10.5 Scheduling 355 10.6 Classification 356 10.7 Summary 358 Reference 359 11 The Future 360 11.1 Recapitulation 360 11.2 The Pattern of all Patience 362 11.3 Beyond the Pale 365 11.4 Coming Soon 367 11.5 Summary 368 References 368 Index

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn in-depth look at the latest research, methods, and applications in the field of protein bioinformatics This book presents the latest developments in protein bioinformatics, introducing for the first time cutting-edge research results alongside novel algorithmic and AI methods for the analysis of protein data.Table of ContentsPREFACE ix CONTRIBUTORS xv I FROM PROTEIN SEQUENCE TO STRUCTURE 1 EMPHASIZING THE ROLE OF PROTEINS IN CONSTRUCTION OF THE DEVELOPMENTAL GENETIC TOOLKIT IN PLANTS 3 Anamika Basu and Anasua Sarkar 2 PROTEIN SEQUENCE MOTIF INFORMATION DISCOVERY 41 Bernard Chen 3 IDENTIFYING CALCIUM BINDING SITES IN PROTEINS 57 Hui Liu and Hai Deng 4 REVIEW OF IMBALANCED DATA LEARNING FOR PROTEIN METHYLATION PREDICTION 71 Zejin Ding and Yan-Qing Zhang 5 ANALYSIS AND PREDICTION OF PROTEIN POSTTRANSLATIONAL MODIFICATION SITES 91 Jianjiong Gao, Qiuming Yao, Curtis Harrison Bollinger, and Dong Xu II PROTEIN ANALYSIS AND PREDICTION 6 PROTEIN LOCAL STRUCTURE PREDICTION 109 Wei Zhong, Jieyue He, Robert W. Harrison, Phang C. Tai, and Yi Pan 7 PROTEIN STRUCTURAL BOUNDARY PREDICTION 125 Gulsah Altun 8 PREDICTION OF RNA BINDING SITES IN PROTEINS 153 Zhi-Ping Liu and Luonan Chen 9 ALGORITHMIC FRAMEWORKS FOR PROTEIN DISULFIDE CONNECTIVITY DETERMINATION 171 Rahul Singh, William Murad, and Timothy Lee 10 PROTEIN CONTACT ORDER PREDICTION: UPDATE 205 Yi Shi, Jianjun Zhou, David S. Wishart, and Guohui Lin 11 PROGRESS IN PREDICTION OF OXIDATION STATES OF CYSTEINES VIA COMPUTATIONAL APPROACHES 217 Aiguo Du, Hui Liu, Hai Deng, and Yi Pan 12 COMPUTATIONAL METHODS IN CRYOELECTRON MICROSCOPY 3D STRUCTURE RECONSTRUCTION 231 Fa Zhang, Xiaohua Wan, and Zhiyong Liu III PROTEIN STRUCTURE ALIGNMENT AND ASSESSMENT 13 FUNDAMENTALS OF PROTEIN STRUCTURE ALIGNMENT 255 Mark Brandt, Allen Holder, and Yosi Shibberu 14 DISCOVERING 3D PROTEIN STRUCTURES FOR OPTIMAL STRUCTURE ALIGNMENT 281 Tomáš Novosád, Václav Snášel, Ajith Abraham, and Jack Y. Yang 15 ALGORITHMIC METHODOLOGIES FOR DISCOVERY OF NONSEQUENTIAL PROTEIN STRUCTURE SIMILARITIES 299 Bhaskar DasGupta, Joseph Dundas, and Jie Liang 16 FRACTAL RELATED METHODS FOR PREDICTING PROTEIN STRUCTURE CLASSES AND FUNCTIONS 317 Zu-Guo Yu, Vo Anh, Jian-Yi Yang, and Shao-Ming Zhu 17 PROTEIN TERTIARY MODEL ASSESSMENT 339 Anjum Chida, Robert W. Harrison, and Yan-Qing Zhang IV PROTEIN–PROTEIN ANALYSIS OF BIOLOGICAL NETWORKS 18 NETWORK ALGORITHMS FOR PROTEIN INTERACTIONS 357 Suely Oliveira 19 IDENTIFYING PROTEIN COMPLEXES FROM PROTEIN–PROTEIN INTERACTION NETWORKS 377 Jianxin Wang, Min Li, and Xiaoqing Peng 20 PROTEIN FUNCTIONAL MODULE ANALYSIS WITH PROTEIN–PROTEIN INTERACTION (PPI) NETWORKS 393 Lei Shi, Xiujuan Lei, and Aidong Zhang 21 EFFICIENT ALIGNMENTS OF METABOLIC NETWORKS WITH BOUNDED TREEWIDTH 413 Qiong Cheng, Piotr Berman, Robert W. Harrison, and Alexander Zelikovsky 22 PROTEIN–PROTEIN INTERACTION NETWORK ALIGNMENT: ALGORITHMS AND TOOLS 431 Valeria Fionda V APPLICATION OF PROTEIN BIOINFORMATICS 23 PROTEIN-RELATED DRUG ACTIVITY COMPARISON USING SUPPORT VECTOR MACHINES 451 Wei Zhong and Jieyue He 24 FINDING REPETITIONS IN BIOLOGICAL NETWORKS: CHALLENGES, TRENDS, AND APPLICATIONS 461 Simona E. Rombo 25 MeTaDoR: ONLINE RESOURCE AND PREDICTION SERVER FOR MEMBRANE TARGETING PERIPHERAL PROTEINS 481 Nitin Bhardwaj, Morten Källberg, Wonhwa Cho, and Hui Lu 26 BIOLOGICAL NETWORKS–BASED ANALYSIS OF GENE EXPRESSION SIGNATURES 495 Gang Chen and Jianxin Wang INDEX 507

Read more less

Book SynopsisAcoustics deals with the production, control, transmission, reception, and effects of sound. Owing to acoustics being an interdisciplinary field, this book is intended to be equally accessible to readers from a range of backgrounds including electrical engineering, physics and mechanical engineering.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors ix Preface xi List of Symbols xiii 1 Introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of Acoustic Wave Motion 3 2.1 Fundamental Acoustic Concepts 3 2.2 The Wave Equation 5 3 Simple Sound Fields 11 3.1 Plane Waves 11 3.2 Sound Transmission Between Fluids 18 3.3 Simple Spherical Waves 22 4 Basic Acoustic Measurements 25 4.1 Introduction 25 4.2 Frequency Analysis 25 4.3 Levels and Decibels 29 4.4 Noise Measurement Techniques and Instrumentation 32 5 The Concept of Impedance 41 5.1 Mechanical Impedance 41 5.2 Acoustic Impedance 43 5.3 Specific Impedance, Wave Impedance and Characteristic Impedance 46 6 Sound Energy, Sound Power, Sound Intensity and Sound Absorption 49 6.1 Introduction 49 6.2 Conservation of Sound Energy 50 6.3 Active and Reactive Intensity 55 6.4 Measurement of Sound Intensity 61 6.4.1 Errors Due to the Finite Difference Approximation 63 6.4.2 Errors Due to Scattering 64 6.4.3 Errors Due to Phase Mismatch 64 6.5 Applications of Sound Intensity 68 6.5.1 Sound Power Determination 68 6.5.2 Noise Source Identification and Visualisation of Sound Fields 70 6.5.3 Transmission Loss of Structures and Partitions 70 6.5.4 Measurement of the Emission Sound Pressure Level 71 6.6 Sound Absorption 71 7 Duct Acoustics 75 7.1 Introduction 75 7.2 Plane Waves in Ducts with Rigid Walls 75 7.2.1 The Sound Field in a Tube Terminated by an Arbitrary Impedance 75 7.2.2 Radiation of Sound from an Open-ended Tube 82 7.3 Sound Transmission Through Coupled Pipes 86 7.3.1 The Transmission Matrix 87 7.3.2 System Performance 92 7.3.3 Dissipative Silencers 97 7.4 Sound Propagation in Ducts with Mean Flow 99 7.5 Three-dimensional Waves in Ducts with Rigid Walls 101 7.5.1 The Sound Field in a Duct with Rectangular Cross Section 101 7.5.2 The Sound Field in a Duct with Circular Cross Section 107 7.5.3 The Sound Field in a Duct with Arbitrary Cross-sectional Shape 114 7.6 The Green’s Function in a Semi-infinite Duct 116 7.7 Sound Propagation in Ducts with Walls of Finite Impedance 122 7.7.1 Ducts with Nearly Hard Walls 123 7.7.2 Lined Ducts 125 8 Sound in Enclosures 127 8.1 Introduction 127 8.2 The Modal Theory of Sound in Enclosures 127 8.2.1 Eigenfrequencies and Mode Shapes 128 8.2.2 The Modal Density 132 8.2.3 The Green’s Function in an Enclosure 133 8.3 Statistical Room Acoustics 137 8.3.1 The Perfectly Diffuse Sound Field 139 8.3.2 The Sound Field in a Reverberation Room Driven with a Pure Tone 142 8.3.3 Frequency Averaging 147 8.3.4 The Sound Power Emitted by a Point Source in a Lightly Damped Room 148 8.4 The Decay of Sound in a Lightly Damped Room 151 8.4.1 The Modal Approach to Decay of Sound 151 8.4.2 The Statistical Approach to Decay of Sound 154 8.5 Applications of Reverberation Rooms 155 8.5.1 Sound Power Determination 155 8.5.2 Measurement of Sound Absorption 156 8.5.3 Measurement of Transmission Loss 156 9 Sound Radiation and Scattering 159 9.1 Introduction 159 9.2 Point Sources 159 9.2.1 Reciprocity 165 9.2.2 Sound Power Interaction of Coherent Sources 166 9.2.3 Fundamentals of Beamforming 169 9.3 Cylindrical Waves 171 9.3.1 Radiation from Cylindrical Sources 171 9.3.2 Scattering by Cylinders 183 9.4 Spherical Waves 187 9.4.1 Radiation from Spherical Sources 187 9.4.2 Scattering by Spheres 199 9.4.3 Ambisonics 201 9.5 Plane Sources 202 9.5.1 The Rayleigh Integral 203 9.5.2 The Wavenumber Approach 207 9.5.3 Fundamentals of Near Field Acoustic Holography 211 9.6 The Kirchhoff-Helmholtz Integral Equation 213 Appendix A Complex Representation of Harmonic Functions of Time 217 Appendix B Signal Analysis and Processing 221 B.1 Introduction 221 B.2 Classification of Signals 221 B.3 Transient Signals 222 B.3.1 The Fourier Transform 223 B.3.2 Time Windows 229 B.4 Periodic Signals 230 B.4.1 Fourier Series 230 B.4.2 The Fourier Transform of a Periodic Signal 232 B.4.3 Estimation of the Spectrum of a Periodic Signal 234 B.5 Random Signals 235 B.5.1 Autocorrelation Functions and Power Spectra 237 B.5.2 Cross-correlation Functions and Cross-power Spectra 239 B.5.3 Estimation of Correlation Functions and Power Spectra 241 B.6 Linear Systems 243 B.6.1 Impulse Response and Frequency Response 244 B.6.2 Estimation of the Frequency Response of a Linear System 248 B.6.3 Estimation of the Frequency Response of a Weakly Nonlinear System 254 B.7 Digital Signal Processing 255 B.7.1 Sampling 255 B.7.2 The Discrete Fourier Transform 256 B.7.3 Signal Analysis with the 'Fast Fourier Transform' (FFT) 257 B.7.4 The Method Based on 'Maximum Length Sequences' (MLS) 260 Appendix C Cylindrical and Spherical Bessel Functions; Legendre Functions; and Expansion Coefficients 263 C.1 Cylindrical Bessel Functions 263 C.2 Legendre Functions 265 C.3 Spherical Bessel Functions 266 C.4 Expansion Coefficients 267 Appendix D Fundamentals of Probability and Random Variables 269 D.1 Random Variables 269 D.2 The Central Limit Theorem 270 D.3 Chi and Chi-Square Statistics 270 Reference 271 Bibliography 273 Index 275

Read more less

Book SynopsisWinner, 2013 PROSE Award, Engineering and Technology Concise, high quality and comparative overview of state-of-the-art electron device development, manufacturing technologies and applications Guide to State-of-the-Art Electron Devices marks the 60th anniversary of the IRE electron devices committee and the 35th anniversary of the IEEE Electron Devices Society, as such it defines the state-of-the-art of electron devices, as well as future directions across the entire field. Spans full range of electron device types such as photovoltaic devices, semiconductor manufacturing and VLSI technology and circuits, covered by IEEE Electron and Devices Society Contributed by internationally respected members of the electron devices community A timely desk reference with fully-integrated colour and a unique lay-out with sidebars to highlight the key terms Discusses the historical developments and speculates on future trends to Table of ContentsForeword xi Preface xiii Contributors xvii Acknowledgments xix Introduction: Historic Timeline xxi PART I BASIC ELECTRON DEVICES 1 Bipolar Transistors 3 John D. Cressler and Katsuyoshi Washio 1.1 Motivation 3 1.2 The pn Junction and its Electronic Applications 5 1.3 The Bipolar Junction Transistor and its Electronic Applications 10 1.4 Optimization of Bipolar Transistors 15 1.5 Silicon-Germanium Heterojunction Bipolar Transistors 17 References 19 2 MOSFETs 21 Hiroshi Iwai, Simon Min Sze, Yuan Taur and Hei Wong 2.1 Introduction 21 2.2 MOSFET Basics 21 2.3 The Evolution of MOSFETs 27 2.4 Closing Remarks 31 References 31 3 Memory Devices 37 Kinam Kim and Dong Jin Jung 3.1 Introduction 37 3.2 Volatile Memories 39 3.3 Non-Volatile Memories 41 3.4 Future Perspectives of MOS Memories 43 3.5 Closing Remarks 45 References 46 4 Passive Components 49 Joachim N. Burghartz and Colin C. McAndrew 4.1 Discrete and Integrated Passive Components 49 4.2 Application in Analog ICs and DRAM 52 4.3 The Planar Spiral Inductor–A Case Study 54 4.4 Parasitics in Integrated Circuits 57 References 57 5 Emerging Devices 59 Supriyo Bandyopadhyay, Marc Cahay and Avik W. Ghosh 5.1 Non-Charge-Based Switching 59 5.2 Carbon as a Replacement for Silicon and the Rise of Grpahene Electronics and Moletronics 63 5.3 Closing Remarks 66 References 67 PART II ASPECTS OF DEVICE AND IC MANUFACTURING 6 Electronic Materials 71 James C. Sturm, Ken Rim, James S. Harris and Chung-Chih Wu 6.1 Introduction 71 6.2 Silicon Device Technology 71 6.3 Compound Semiconductor Devices 75 6.4 Electronic Displays 79 6.5 Closing Remarks 82 References 83 7 Compact Modeling 85 Colin C. McAndrew and Laurence W. Nagel 7.1 The Role of Compact Models 85 7.2 Bipolar Transistor Compact Modeling 87 7.3 MOS Transistor Compact Modeling 89 7.4 Compact Modeling of Passive Components 92 7.5 Benchmarking and Implementation 94 References 94 8 Technology Computer Aided Design 97 David Esseni, Christoph Jungemann, J¨urgen Lorenz, Pierpaolo Palestri, Enrico Sangiorgi and Luca Selmi 8.1 Introduction 97 8.2 Drift-Diffusion Model 98 8.3 Microscopic Transport Models 100 8.4 Quantum Transport Models 101 8.5 Process and Equipment Simulation 102 References 105 9 Reliability of Electron Devices, Interconnects and Circuits 107 Anthony S. Oates, Richard C. Blish, Gennadi Bersuker and Lu Kasprzak 9.1 Introduction and Background 107 9.2 Device Reliability Issues 109 9.3 Circuit-Level Reliability Issues 114 9.4 Microscopic Approaches to Assuring Reliability of ICs 117 References 117 10 Semiconductor Manufacturing 121 Rajendra Singh, Luigi Colombo, Klaus Schuegraf, Robert Doering and Alain Diebold 10.1 Introduction 121 10.2 Substrates 122 10.3 Lithography and Etching 122 10.4 Front-End Processing 124 10.5 Back-End Processing 125 10.6 Process Control 128 10.7 Assembly and Test 129 10.8 Future Directions 131 References 131 PART III APPLICATIONS BASED ON ELECTRON DEVICES 11 VLSI Technology and Circuits 135 Kaustav Banerjee and Shuji Ikeda 11.1 Introduction 135 11.2 MOSFET Scaling Trends 136 11.3 Low-Power and High-Speed Logic Design 137 11.4 Scaling Driven Technology Enhancements 139 11.5 Ultra-Low Voltage Transistors 144 11.6 Interconnects 144 11.7 Memory Design 148 11.8 System Integration 150 References 152 12 Mixed-Signal Technologies and Integrated Circuits 157 Bin Zhao and James A. Hutchby 12.1 Introduction 157 12.2 Analog/Mixed-Signal Technologies in Scaled CMOS 159 12.3 Data Converter ICs 161 12.4 Mixed-Signal Circuits for Low Power Displays 164 12.5 Image Sensor Technologies and Circuits 166 References 168 13 Memory Technologies 171 Stephen Parke, Kristy A. Campbell and Chandra Mouli 13.1 Semiconductor Memory History 171 13.2 State of Mainstream Semiconductor Memory Today 178 13.3 Emerging Memory Technologies 183 13.4 Closing Remarks 185 References 186 14 RF and Microwave Semiconductor Technologies 189 Giovanni Ghione, Fabrizio Bonani, Ruediger Quay and Erich Kasper 14.1 III-V-Based: GaAs and InP 189 14.2 Si and SiGe 194 14.3 Wide Bandgap Devices (Group-III Nitrides, SiC and Diamond) 197 References 199 15 Power Devices and ICs 203 Richard K. Williams, Mohamed N. Darwish, Theodore J. Letavic and Mikael O¨stling 15.1 Overview of Power Devices and ICs 203 15.2 Two-Carrier and High-Power Devices 205 15.3 Power MOSFET Devices 206 15.4 High-Voltage and Power ICs 209 15.5 Wide Bandgap Power Devices 210 References 211 16 Photovoltaic Devices 213 Steven A. Ringel, Timothy J. Anderson, Martin A. Green, Rajendra Singh and Robert J. Walters 16.1 Introduction 213 16.2 Silicon Photovoltaics 215 16.3 Polycrystalline Thin-Film Photovoltaics 218 16.4 III-V Compound Photovoltaics 219 16.5 Future Concepts in Photovoltaics 220 References 222 17 Large Area Electronics 225 Arokia Nathan, Arman Ahnood, Jackson Lai and Xiaojun Guo 17.1 Thin-Film Solar Cells 225 17.2 Large Area Imaging 229 17.3 Flat Panel Displays 233 References 235 18 Microelectromechanical Systems (MEMS) 239 Darrin J. Young and Hanseup Kim 18.1 Introduction 239 18.2 The 1960s – First Micromachined Structures Envisioned 239 18.3 The 1970s – Integrated Sensors Started 240 18.4 The 1980s – Surface Micromachining Emerged 241 18.5 The 1990s – MEMS Impacted Various Fields 244 18.6 The 2000s – Diversified Sophisticated Systems Enabled by MEMS 247 18.7 Future Outlook 248 References 248 19 Vacuum Device Applications 251 David K. Abe, Baruch Levush, Carter M. Armstrong, Thomas Grant and William L. Menninger 19.1 Introduction 251 19.2 Traveling-Wave Devices 252 19.3 Klystrons 255 19.4 Inductive Output Tubes 258 19.5 Crossed-Field Devices 259 19.6 Gyro-Devices 260 References 262 20 Optoelectronic Devices 265 Leda Lunardi, Sudha Mokkapati and Chennupati Jagadish 20.1 Introduction 265 20.2 Light Emission in Semiconductors 266 20.3 Photodetectors 268 20.4 Integrated Optoelectronics 269 20.5 Optical Interconnects 271 20.6 Closing Remarks 271 References 271 21 Devices for the Post CMOS Era 275 Wilfried Haensch 21.1 Introduction 275 21.2 Devices for the 8-nm Node with Conventional Materials 277 21.3 New Channel Materials and Devices 282 21.4 Closing Remarks 287 References 287 Index 291

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresented in three parts, this book provides readers with an immersive introduction to this rapidly growing segment of the computer industry.Table of ContentsPreface xv Contributors xvii 1 Low Power Multicore Processors for Embedded Systems 1 Fumio Arakawa 1.1 Multicore Chip with Highly Efficient Cores 1 1.2 SuperH RISC Engine Family (SH) Processor Cores 5 1.3 SH-X: A Highly Efficient CPU Core 9 1.4 SH-X FPU: A Highly Efficient FPU 20 1.5 SH-X2: Frequency and Efficiency Enhanced Core 33 1.6 SH-X3: Multicore Architecture Extension 34 1.7 SH-X4: ISA and Address Space Extension 47 2 Special-Purpose Hardware for Computational Biology 61 Siddharth Srinivasan 2.1 Molecular Dynamics Simulations on Graphics Processing Units 62 2.2 Special-Purpose Hardware and Network Topologies for MD Simulations 72 2.3 Quantum MC Applications on Field-Programmable Gate Arrays 77 2.4 Conclusions and Future Directions 82 3 Embedded GPU Design 85 Byeong-Gyu Nam and Hoi-Jun Yoo 3.1 Introduction 85 3.2 System Architecture 86 3.3 Graphics Modules Design 88 3.4 System Power Management 95 3.5 Implementation Results 99 3.6 Conclusion 102 4 Low-Cost VLSI Architecture for Random Block-Based Access of Pixels in Modern Image Sensors 107 Tareq Hasan Khan and Khan Wahid 4.1 Introduction 107 4.2 The DVP Interface 108 4.3 The iBRIDGE-BB Architecture 109 4.4 Hardware Implementation 116 4.5 Conclusion 123 5 Embedded Computing Systems on FPGAs 127 Lesley Shannon 5.1 FPGA Architecture 128 5.2 FPGA Confi guration Technology 129 5.3 Software Support 133 5.4 Final Summary of Challenges and Opportunities for Embedded Computing Design on FPGAs 135 6 FPGA-Based Emulation Support for Design Space Exploration 139 Paolo Meloni, Simone Secchi, and Luigi Raffo 6.1 Introduction 139 6.2 State of the Art 140 6.3 A Tool for Energy-Aware FPGA-Based Emulation: The MADNESS Project Experience 144 6.4 Enabling FPGA-Based DSE: Runtime-Reconfi gurable Emulators 147 6.5 Use Cases 161 7 FPGA Coprocessing Solution for Real-Time Protein Identifi cation Using Tandem Mass Spectrometry 169 Daniel Coca, István Bogdán, and Robert J. Beynon 7.1 Introduction 169 7.2 Protein Identifi cation by Sequence Database Searching Using MS/MS Data 171 7.3 Reconfi gurable Computing Platform 174 7.4 FPGA Implementation of the MS/MS Search Engine 176 7.5 Summary 180 8 Real-Time Confi gurable Phase-Coherent Pipelines 185 Robert L. Shuler, Jr., and David K. Rutishauser 8.1 Introduction and Purpose 185 8.2 History and Related Methods 188 8.3 Implementation Framework 191 8.4 Prototype Implementation 204 8.5 Assessment Compared with Related Methods 207 9 Low Overhead Radiation Hardening Techniques for Embedded Architectures 211 Sohan Purohit, Sai Rahul Chalamalasetti, and Martin Margala 9.1 Introduction 211 9.2 Recently Proposed SEU Tolerance Techniques 213 9.3 Radiation-Hardened Reconfi gurable Array with Instruction Rollback 223 9.4 Conclusion 234 10 Hybrid Partially Adaptive Fault-Tolerant Routing for 3D Networks-on-Chip 239 Sudeep Pasricha and Yong Zou 10.1 Introduction 239 10.2 Related Work 240 10.3 Proposed 4NP-First Routing Scheme 242 10.4 Experiments 250 10.5 Conclusion 255 11 Interoperability in Electronic Systems 259 Andrew Leone 11.1 Interoperability 259 11.2 The Basis for Interoperability: The OSI Model 261 11.3 Hardware 263 11.4 Firmware 266 11.5 Partitioning the System 268 11.6 Examples of Interoperable Systems 270 12 Software Modeling Approaches for Presilicon System Performance Analysis 273 Kenneth J. Schultz and Frederic Risacher 12.1 Introduction 273 12.2 Methodologies 275 12.3 Results 283 12.4 Conclusion 288 13 Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) Implementation in Embedded Systems 291 Issam Hammad, Kamal El-Sankary, and Ezz El-Masry 13.1 Introduction 291 13.2 Finite Field 292 13.3 The AES 293 13.4 Hardware Implementations for AES 300 13.5 High-Speed AES Encryptor with Efficient Merging Techniques 306 13.6 Conclusion 315 14 Reconfi gurable Architecture for Cryptography over Binary Finite Fields 319 Samuel Antão, Ricardo Chaves, and Leonel Sousa 14.1 Introduction 319 14.2 Background 320 14.3 Reconfigurable Processor 333 14.4 Results 350 14.5 Conclusions 358 References 359 Index 363

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe simulation of electromagnetic transients is a mature field that plays an important role in the design of modern power systems. Since the first steps in this field to date, a significant effort has been dedicated to the development of new techniques and more powerful software tools.Table of ContentsPreface xv About the Editor xvii List of Contributors xix 1 Introduction to Electromagnetic Transient Analysis of Power Systems 1 Juan A. Martinez-Velasco 1.1 Overview 1 1.2 Scope of the Book 4 References 6 2 Solution Techniques for Electromagnetic Transients in Power Systems 9 Jean Mahseredjian, Ilhan Kocar and Ulas Karaagac 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 Application Field for the Computation of Electromagnetic Transients 10 2.3 The Main Modules 11 2.4 Graphical User Interface 11 2.5 Formulation of Network Equations for Steady-State and Time-Domain Solutions 12 2.5.1 Nodal Analysis and Modified-Augmented-Nodal-Analysis 13 2.5.2 State-Space Analysis 20 2.5.3 Hybrid Analysis 21 2.5.4 State-Space Groups and MANA 25 2.5.5 Integration Time-Step 27 2.6 Control Systems 28 2.7 Multiphase Load-Flow Solution and Initialization 29 2.7.1 Load-Flow Constraints 31 2.7.2 Initialization of Load-Flow Equations 33 2.7.3 Initialization from Steady-State Solution 33 2.8 Implementation 34 2.9 Conclusions 36 References 36 3 Frequency Domain Aspects of Electromagnetic Transient Analysis of Power Systems 39 José L. Naredo, Jean Mahseredjian, Ilhan Kocar, JoséA.Gutiérrez–Robles and Juan A. Martinez-Velasco 3.1 Introduction 39 3.2 Frequency Domain Basics 40 3.2.1 Phasors and FD Representation of Signals 40 3.2.2 Fourier Series 43 3.2.3 Fourier Transform 46 3.3 Discrete-Time Frequency Analysis 48 3.3.1 Aliasing Effect 50 3.3.2 Sampling Theorem 51 3.3.3 Conservation of Information and the DFT 53 3.3.4 Fast Fourier Transform 54 3.4 Frequency-Domain Transient Analysis 56 3.4.1 Fourier Transforms and Transients 56 3.4.2 Fourier and Laplace Transforms 62 3.4.3 The Numerical Laplace Transform 63 3.4.4 Application Examples with the NLT 65 3.4.5 Brief History of NLT Development 65 3.5 Multirate Transient Analysis 66 3.6 Conclusions 69 Acknowledgement 70 References 70 4 Real-Time Simulation Technologies in Engineering 72 Christian Dufour and Jean Bélanger 4.1 Introduction 72 4.2 Model-Based Design and Real-Time Simulation 73 4.3 General Considerations about Real-Time Simulation 74 4.3.1 The Constraint of Real-Time 74 4.3.2 Stiffness Issues 75 4.3.3 Simulator Bandwidth Considerations 75 4.3.4 Simulation Bandwidth vs. Applications 75 4.3.5 Achieving Very Low Latency for HIL Application 76 4.3.6 Effective Parallel Processing for Fast EMT Simulation 77 4.3.7 FPGA-Based Multirate Simulators 79 4.3.8 Advanced Parallel Solvers without Artificial Delays or Stublines: Application to Active Distribution Networks 79 4.3.9 The Need for Iterations in Real-Time 80 4.4 Phasor-Mode Real-Time Simulation 82 4.5 Modern Real-Time Simulator Requirements 82 4.5.1 Simulator I/O Requirements 83 4.6 Rapid Control Prototyping and Hardware-in-the-Loop Testing 85 4.7 Power Grid Real-Time Simulation Applications 85 4.7.1 Statistical Protection System Study 85 4.7.2 Monte Carlo Tests for Power Grid Switching Surge System Studies 87 4.7.3 Modular Multilevel Converter in HVDC Applications 88 4.7.4 High-End Super-Large Power Grid Simulations 89 4.8 Motor Drive and FPGA-Based Real-Time Simulation Applications 90 4.8.1 Industrial Motor Drive Design and Testing Using CPU Models 90 4.8.2 FPGA Modelling of SRM and PMSM Motor Drives 91 4.9 Educational System: RPC-Based Study of DFIM Wind Turbine 94 4.10 Mechatronic Real-Time Simulation Applications 95 4.10.1 Aircraft Flight Training Simulator 95 4.10.2 Aircraft Flight Parameter Identification 95 4.10.3 International Space Station Robotic Arm Testing 95 4.11 Conclusion 97 References 97 5 Calculation of Power System Overvoltages 100 Juan A. Martinez-Velasco and Francisco González-Molina 5.1 Introduction 100 5.2 Power System Overvoltages 101 5.2.1 Temporary Overvoltages 101 5.2.2 Slow-Front Overvoltages 102 5.2.3 Fast-Front Overvoltages 102 5.2.4 Very-Fast-Front Overvoltages 103 5.3 Temporary Overvoltages 103 5.3.1 Introduction 103 5.3.2 Modelling Guidelines for Temporary Overvoltages 103 5.3.3 Faults to Grounds 104 5.3.4 Load Rejection 110 5.3.5 Harmonic Resonance 115 5.3.6 Energization of Unloaded Transformers 120 5.3.7 Ferroresonance 125 5.3.8 Conclusions 133 5.4 Switching Overvoltages 135 5.4.1 Introduction 135 5.4.2 Modelling Guidelines 135 5.4.3 Switching Overvoltages 139 5.4.4 Case Studies 149 5.4.5 Validation 154 5.5 Lightning Overvoltages 154 5.5.1 Introduction 154 5.5.2 Modelling Guidelines 155 5.5.3 Case Studies 163 5.5.4 Validation 172 5.6 Very Fast Transient Overvoltages in Gas Insulated Substations 174 5.6.1 Introduction 174 5.6.2 Origin of VFTO in GIS 174 5.6.3 Propagation of VFTs in GISs 176 5.6.4 Modelling Guidelines 180 5.6.5 Case Study 9: VFT in a 765 kV GIS 182 5.6.6 Statistical Calculation 183 5.6.7 Validation 185 5.7 Conclusions 187 Acknowledgement 187 References 187 6 Analysis of FACTS Controllers and their Transient Modelling Techniques 195 Kalyan K. Sen 6.1 Introduction 195 6.2 Theory of Power Flow Control 199 6.3 Modelling Guidelines 206 6.3.1 Representation of a Power System 206 6.3.2 Representation of System Control 206 6.3.3 Representation of a Controlled Switch 209 6.3.4 Simulation Errors and Control 210 6.4 Modelling of FACTS Controllers 210 6.4.1 Simulation of an Independent PFC in a Single Line Application 212 6.4.2 Simulation of a Voltage Regulating Transformer 212 6.4.3 Simulation of a Phase Angle Regulator 214 6.4.4 Simulation of a Unified Power Flow Controller 215 6.5 Simulation Results of a UPFC 230 6.6 Simulation Results of an ST 238 6.7 Conclusion 245 Acknowledgement 245 References 245 7 Applications of Power Electronic Devices in Distribution Systems 248 Arindam Ghosh and Farhad Shahnia 7.1 Introduction 248 7.2 Modelling of Converter and Filter Structures for CPDs 250 7.2.1 Three-Phase Converter Structures 250 7.2.2 Filter Structures 251 7.2.3 Dynamic Simulation of CPDs 252 7.3 Distribution Static Compensator (DSTATCOM) 253 7.3.1 Current Control Using DSTATCOM 253 7.3.2 Voltage Control Using DSTATCOM 256 7.4 Dynamic Voltage Restorer (DVR) 258 7.5 Unified Power Quality Conditioner (UPQC) 263 7.6 Voltage Balancing Using DSTATCOM and DVR 267 7.7 Excess Power Circulation Using CPDs 271 7.7.1 Current-Controlled DSTATCOM Application 271 7.7.2 Voltage-Controlled DSTATCOM Application 272 7.7.3 UPQC Application 276 7.8 Conclusions 278 References 278 8 Modelling of Electronically Interfaced DER Systems for Transient Analysis 280 Amirnaser Yazdani and Omid Alizadeh 8.1 Introduction 280 8.2 Generic Electronically Interfaced DER System 281 8.3 Realization of Different DER Systems 283 8.3.1 PV Energy Systems 283 8.3.2 Fuel-Cell Systems 284 8.3.3 Battery Energy Storage Systems 284 8.3.4 Supercapacitor Energy Storage System 285 8.3.5 Superconducting Magnetic Energy Storage System 285 8.3.6 Wind Energy Systems 286 8.3.7 Flywheel Energy Storage Systems 287 8.4 Transient Analysis of Electronically Interfaced DER Systems 287 8.5 Examples 288 8.5.1 Example 1: Single-Stage PV Energy System 288 8.5.2 Example 2: Direct-Drive Variable-Speed Wind Energy System 298 8.6 Conclusion 315 References 315 9 Simulation of Transients for VSC-HVDC Transmission Systems Based on Modular Multilevel Converters 317 Hani Saad, Sébastien Dennetière, Jean Mahseredjian, Tarek Ould-Bachir and Jean-Pierre David 9.1 Introduction 317 9.2 mmc Topology 318 9.3 mmc Models 320 9.3.1 Model 1 – Full Detailed 320 9.3.2 Model 2 – Detailed Equivalent 321 9.3.3 Model 3 – Switching Function of MMC Arm 322 9.3.4 Model 4 – AVM Based on Power Frequency 325 9.4 Control System 327 9.4.1 Operation Principle 327 9.4.2 Upper-Level Control 328 9.4.3 Lower-Level Control 333 9.4.4 Control Structure Requirement Depending on MMC Model Type 336 9.5 Model Comparisons 336 9.5.1 Step Change on Active Power Reference 337 9.5.2 Three-Phase AC Fault 337 9.5.3 Influence of MMC Levels 338 9.5.4 Pole-to-Pole DC Fault 338 9.5.5 Startup Sequence 340 9.5.6 Computational Performance 340 9.6 Real-Time Simulation of MMC Using CPU and FPGA 342 9.6.1 Relation between Sampling Time and N 344 9.6.2 Optimization of Model 2 for Real-Time Simulation 345 9.6.3 Real-Time Simulation Setup 346 9.6.4 CPU-Based Model 347 9.6.5 FPGA-Based Model 350 9.7 Conclusions 356 References 357 10 Dynamic Average Modelling of Rectifier Loads and AC-DC Converters for Power System Applications 360 Sina Chiniforoosh, Juri Jatskevich, Hamid Atighechi and Juan A. Martinez-Velasco 10.1 Introduction 360 10.2 Front-End Diode Rectifier System Configurations 361 10.3 Detailed Analysis and Modes of Operation 365 10.4 Dynamic Average Modelling 368 10.4.1 Selected Dynamic AVMs 370 10.4.2 Computer Implementation 372 10.5 Verification and Comparison of the AVMs 372 10.5.1 Steady-State Characteristics 372 10.5.2 Model Dynamic Order and Eigenvalue Analysis 376 10.5.3 Dynamic Performance Under Balanced and Unbalanced Conditions 377 10.5.4 Input Sequence Impedances under Unbalanced Conditions 382 10.5.5 Small-Signal Input/Output Impedances 383 10.6 Generalization to High-Pulse-Count Converters 386 10.6.1 Detailed Analysis 387 10.6.2 Dynamic Average Modelling 388 10.7 Generalization to PWM AC-DC Converters 391 10.7.1 PWM Voltage-Source Converters 391 10.7.2 Dynamic Average-Value Modelling of PWM Voltage-Source Converters 392 10.8 Conclusions 394 Appendix 394 References 395 11 Protection Systems 398 Juan A. Martinez-Velasco 11.1 Introduction 398 11.2 Modelling Guidelines for Power System Components 400 11.2.1 Line Models 400 11.2.2 Insulated Cables 401 11.2.3 Source Models 401 11.2.4 Transformer Models 401 11.2.5 Circuit Breaker Models 403 11.3 Models of Instrument Transformers 403 11.3.1 Introduction 403 11.3.2 Current Transformers 404 11.3.3 Rogowski Coils 408 11.3.4 Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformers 410 11.3.5 Voltage Transformers 412 11.4 Relay Modelling 412 11.4.1 Introduction 412 11.4.2 Classification of Relay Models 412 11.4.3 Relay Models 413 11.5 Implementation of Relay Models 418 11.5.1 Introduction 418 11.5.2 Sources of Information for Building Relay Models 419 11.5.3 Software Tools 420 11.5.4 Implementation of Relay Models 421 11.5.5 Interfacing Relay Models to Recorded Data 422 11.5.6 Applications of Relay Models 423 11.5.7 Limitations of Relay Models 424 11.6 Validation of Relay Models 424 11.6.1 Validation Procedures 424 11.6.2 Relay Model Testing Procedures 425 11.6.3 Accuracy Assessment 426 11.6.4 Relay Testing Facilities 426 11.7 Case Studies 427 11.7.1 Introduction 427 11.7.2 Case Study 1: Simulation of an Electromechanical Distance Relay 428 11.7.3 Case Study 2: Simulation of a Numerical Distance Relay 430 11.8 Protection of Distribution Systems 450 11.8.1 Introduction 450 11.8.2 Protection of Distribution Systems with Distributed Generation 451 11.8.3 Modelling of Distribution Feeder Protective Devices 451 11.8.4 Protection of the Interconnection of Distributed Generators 460 11.8.5 Case Study 3 460 11.8.6 Case Study 4 465 11.9 Conclusions 471 Acknowledgement 475 References 476 12 Time-Domain Analysis of the Smart Grid Technologies: Possibilities and Challenges 481 Francisco de León, Reynaldo Salcedo, Xuanchang Ran and Juan A. Martinez-Velasco 12.1 Introduction 481 12.2 Distribution Systems 482 12.2.1 Radial Distribution Systems 483 12.2.2 Networked Distribution Systems 484 12.3 Restoration and Reconfiguration of the Smart Grid 487 12.3.1 Introduction 487 12.3.2 Heavily Meshed Networked Distribution Systems 487 12.4 Integration of Distributed Generation 498 12.4.1 Scope 498 12.4.2 Radial Distribution Systems 499 12.4.3 Heavily Meshed Networked Distribution Systems 503 12.5 Overvoltages in Distribution Networks 515 12.5.1 Introduction 515 12.5.2 Ferroresonant Overvoltages 516 12.5.3 Long-Duration Overvoltages due to Backfeeding 519 12.6 Development of Data Translators for Interfacing Power-Flow Programs with EMTP-Type Programs 529 12.6.1 Introduction 529 12.6.2 Power-Flow to EMTP-RV Translator 530 12.6.3 Example of the Translation of a Transmission Line 533 12.6.4 Challenges of Development 533 12.6.5 Model Validation 535 12.6.6 Recommendations 542 Acknowledgement 546 References 546 13 Interfacing Methods for Electromagnetic Transient Simulation: New Possibilities for Analysis and Design 552 Shaahin Filizadeh 13.1 Introduction 552 13.2 Need for Interfacing 553 13.3 Interfacing Templates 554 13.3.1 Static Interfacing 554 13.3.2 Dynamic Interfacing and Memory Management 555 13.3.3 Wrapper Interfaces 555 13.4 Interfacing Implementation Options: External vs Internal Interfaces 555 13.4.1 External Interfaces 556 13.4.2 Internal Interfaces 556 13.5 Multiple Interfacing 556 13.5.1 Core-Type Interfacing 557 13.5.2 Chain-Type Interfacing 557 13.5.3 Loop Interfacing 558 13.6 Examples of Interfacing 558 13.6.1 Interfacing to Matlab/Simulink 558 13.6.2 Wrapper Interfacing: Run-Controllers and Multiple-Runs 560 13.7 Design Process Using EMT Simulation Tools 560 13.7.1 Parameter Selection Techniques 561 13.7.2 Uncertainty Analysis 563 13.8 Conclusions 566 References 566 Annex A: Techniques and Computer Codes for Rational Modelling of Frequency-Dependent Components and Subnetworks 568 Bjørn Gustavsen A. 1 Introduction 568 A. 2 Rational Functions 569 A. 3 Time-Domain Simulation 569 A. 4 Fitting Techniques 569 A.4. 1 Polynomial Fitting 569 A.4. 2 Bode’s Asymptotic Fitting 570 A.4. 3 Vector Fitting 570 A. 5 Passivity 571 A. 6 Matrix Fitting Toolbox 572 A.6. 1 General 572 A.6. 2 Overview 572 A. 7 Example A.1: Electrical Circuit 573 A. 8 Example 6.2: High-Frequency Transformer Modelling 575 A.8. 1 Measurement 575 A.8. 2 Rational Approximation 575 A.8. 3 Passivity Enforcement 575 A.8. 4 Time-Domain Simulation 576 A.8. 5 Comparison with Time-Domain Measurement 577 References 579 Annex B: Dynamic System Equivalents 581 Udaya D. Annakkage B. 1 Introduction 581 B. 2 High-Frequency Equivalents 582 B.2. 1 Introduction 582 B. 2 Frequency-Dependent Network Equivalent (FDNE) 582 B.2. 3 Examples of High-Frequency FDNE 583 B.2. 4 Two-Layer Network Equivalent (TLNE) 586 B.2. 5 Modified Two-Layer Network Equivalent 592 B.2. 6 Other Methods 594 B.2. 7 Numerical Issues 594 B. 3 Low-Frequency Equivalents 595 B.3. 1 Introduction 595 B.3. 2 Modal Methods 596 B. 3 Coherency Methods 596 B.3. 4 Measurement or Simulation-Based Methods 597 B. 4 Wideband Equivalents 597 B. 5 Conclusions 597 References 598 Index 601

Read more less

Book SynopsisUltra-capacitors, used as short-term energy storage devices, are growing in popularity especially in the transportation and renewable energy sectors. This text provides an up-to-date and comprehensive analysis of ultra-capacitor theory, modeling and module design from an application perspective, focusing on the practical aspects of power conversion and ultra-capacitor integration with power electronics systems. Key features: clearly explains the theoretical and practical aspects of ultra-capacitor, analysis, modelling and design describes different power conversion applications such as variable speed drives, renewable energy systems, traction, power quality, diesel electric hybrid applications provides detailed guidelines for the design and selection of ultra-capacitor modules and interface dc-dc converters includes end-of-chapter exercises and design examples This is an essential reference for power electronics engTable of ContentsPreface ix 1 Energy Storage Technologies and Devices 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Direct Electrical Energy Storage Devices 3 1.3 Indirect Electrical Energy Storage Technologies and Devices 11 1.4 Applications and Comparison 19 2 Ultra-Capacitor Energy Storage Devices 22 2.1 Background of Ultra-Capacitors 22 2.2 Electric Double-Layer Capacitors—EDLC 24 2.3 The Ultra-Capacitor Macro (Electric Circuit) Model 27 2.4 The Ultra-Capacitor’s Energy and Power 42 2.5 The Ultra-Capacitor’s Charge/Discharge Methods 47 2.6 Frequency Related Losses 59 2.7 The Ultra-Capacitor’s Thermal Aspects 65 2.8 Ultra-Capacitor High Power Modules 72 2.9 Ultra-Capacitor Trends and Future Development 74 2.10 Summary 76 3 Power Conversion and Energy Storage Applications 78 3.1 Fundamentals of Static Power Converters 78 3.2 Interest in Power Conversion with Energy Storage 84 3.3 Controlled Electric Drive Applications 90 3.4 Renewable Energy Source Applications 102 3.5 Autonomous Power Generators and Applications 113 3.6 Energy Transmission and Distribution Applications 121 3.7 Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) Applications 128 3.8 Electric Traction Applications 131 3.9 Summary 145 4 Ultra-Capacitor Module Selection and Design 149 4.1 Introduction 149 4.2 The Module Voltage Rating and Voltage Level Selection 152 4.3 The Capacitance Determination 164 4.4 Ultra-Capacitor Module Design 173 4.5 The Module's Thermal Management 189 4.6 Ultra-Capacitor Module Testing 207 4.7 Summary 214 5 Interface DC–DC Converters 216 5.1 Introduction 216 5.2 Background and Classification of Interface DC–DC Converters 216 5.3 State-of-the-Art Interface DC–DC Converters 223 5.4 The Ultra-Capacitor’s Current and Voltage Definition 229 5.5 Multi-Cell Interleaved DC–DC Converters 231 5.6 Design of a Two-Level N-Cell Interleaved DC–DC Converter 254 5.7 Conversion Power Losses: A General Case Analysis 295 5.8 Power Converter Thermal Management: A General Case Analysis 299 5.9 Summary 313 References 314 Index 317

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers instantaneous power theory as well as the importance of design of shunt, series, and combined shunt-series power active filters and hybrid passive-active power filters Illustrates pioneering applications of the p-q theory to power conditioning, which highlights distinct differences from conventional theories Explores p-q-r theory to give a new method of analyzing the different powers in a three-phase circuit Provides exercises at the end of many chapters that are unique to the second edition Table of ContentsPREFACE xiii CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 1.1 Concepts and Evolution of Electric Power Theory 1 1.2 Applications of the P-q Theory to Power Electronics Equipment 4 1.3 Harmonic Voltages in Power Systems 5 1.4 Identified and Unidentified Harmonic-Producing Loads 6 1.5 Harmonic Current and Voltage Sources 8 1.6 Basic Principles of Harmonic Compensation 9 1.7 Basic Principle of Power Flow Control 13 References 15 CHAPTER 2 ELECTRIC POWER DEFINITIONS: BACKGROUND 17 2.1 Power Definitions Under Sinusoidal Conditions 18 2.2 Voltage and Current Phasors and Complex Impedance 20 2.3 Complex Power and Power Factor 21 2.4 Concepts of Power Under Nonsinusoidal Conditions: Conventional Approaches 22 2.4.1 Power Definitions by Budeanu 22 2.4.1.A Power Tetrahedron and Distortion Factor 25 2.4.2 Power Definitions by Fryze 27 2.5 Electric Power in Three-Phase Systems 28 2.5.1 Classifications of Three-Phase Systems 28 2.5.2 Power in Balanced Three-Phase Systems 31 2.5.3 Power in Three-Phase Unbalanced Systems 33 2.6 Summary 34 2.7 Exercises 34 References 35 CHAPTER 3 THE INSTANTANEOUS POWER THEORY 37 3.1 Basis of the p-q Theory 37 3.1.1 Historical Background of the p-q Theory 38 3.1.2 The Clarke Transformation 39 3.1.2.A Calculation of Voltage and Current Vectors When Zero-Sequence Components Are Excluded 41 3.1.3 Three-Phase Instantaneous Active Power in Terms of Clarke Components 43 3.1.4 The Instantaneous Powers of the p-q Theory 44 3.2 The p-q Theory in Three-Phase, Three-Wire Systems 44 3.2.1 Comparisons with the Conventional Theory 48 3.2.1.A Example #1—Sinusoidal Voltages and Currents 49 3.2.1.B Example #2—Balanced Voltages and Capacitive Loads 49 3.2.1.C Example #3—Sinusoidal Balanced Voltage and Nonlinear Load 50 3.2.2 Use of the p-q Theory for Shunt Current Compensation 54 3.2.2.A Examples of Appearance of Hidden Currents 59 3.2.3 The Dual p-q Theory 63 3.3 The p-q Theory in Three-Phase, Four-Wire Systems 65 3.3.1 The Zero-Sequence Power in a Three-Phase Sinusoidal Voltage Source 67 3.3.2 Presence of Negative-Sequence Components 68 3.3.3 General Case Including Distortions and Imbalances in the Voltages and in the Currents 69 3.3.4 Physical Meanings of the Instantaneous Real, Imaginary, and Zero-Sequence Powers 74 3.3.5 Avoiding the Clarke Transformation in the p-q Theory 75 3.3.6 Modified p-q Theory 77 3.4 Instantaneous abc Theory 81 3.4.1 Active and Nonactive Current Calculation by Means of a Minimization Method 83 3.4.2 Generalized Fryze Currents Minimization Method 88 3.5 Comparisons Between the p-q Theory and the abc Theory 91 3.5.1 Selection of Power Components to be Compensated 95 3.6 The p-q-r Theory 97 3.7 Summary 104 3.8 Exercises 105 References 106 CHAPTER 4 SHUNT ACTIVE FILTERS 111 4.1 General Description of Shunt Active Filters 113 4.1.1 PWM Converters for Shunt Active Filters 114 4.1.2 Active Filter Controllers 115 4.2 Three-Phase, Three-Wire Shunt Active Filters 118 4.2.1 Active Filters for Constant Power Compensation 119 4.2.2 Active Filters for Sinusoidal Current Control 135 4.2.2.A Positive-Sequence Voltage Detector 138 4.2.2.B Simulation Results 145 4.2.3 Active Filters for Current Minimization 145 4.2.4 Active Filters for Harmonic Damping 149 4.2.4.A Shunt Active Filter Based on Voltage Detection 151 4.2.4.B Active Filter Controller Based on Voltage Detection 152 4.2.4.C An Application Case of an Active Filter for Harmonic Damping 156 4.2.5 A Digital Controller 171 4.2.5.A System Configuration of the Digital Controller 172 4.2.5.B Current Control Methods 177 4.3 Three-Phase, Four-Wire Shunt Active Filters 180 4.3.1 Converter Topologies for Three-Phase, Four-Wire Systems 181 4.3.2 Dynamic Hysteresis-Band Current Controller 182 4.3.3 Active Filter dc Voltage Regulator 184 4.3.4 Optimal Power Flow Conditions 185 4.3.5 Constant Instantaneous Power Control Strategy 187 4.3.6 Sinusoidal Current Control Strategy 189 4.3.7 Performance Analysis and Parameter Optimization 192 4.3.7.A Influence of the System Parameters 192 4.3.7.B Dynamic Response of the Shunt Active Filter 193 4.3.7.C Economical Aspects 198 4.3.7.D Experimental Results 199 4.4 Compensation Methods Based on the p-q-r Theory 204 4.4.1 Reference Power Control Method 206 4.4.2 Reference Current Control Method 211 4.4.3 Alternative Control Method 213 4.4.4 The Simplified Sinusoidal Source Current Strategy 215 4.4.4.A The PLL Circuit and the Positive-Sequence Detector 215 4.4.4.B The Sinusoidal Source Current Control Strategy with Energy Balance Inside the Active Filter 217 4.5 Comparisons Between Control Methods Based on the p-q Theory and the p-q-r Theory 218 4.6 Shunt Selective Harmonic Compensation 224 4.7 Summary 231 4.8 Exercises 231 References 233 CHAPTER 5 HYBRID AND SERIES ACTIVE FILTERS 237 5.1 Basic Series Active Filter 237 5.2 Combined Series Active Filter and Shunt Passive Filter 239 5.2.1 Example of an Experimental System 242 5.2.1.A Compensation Principle 243 5.2.1.B Filtering Characteristics 245 5.2.1.C Control Circuit 246 5.2.1.D Filter to Suppress Switching Ripples 248 5.2.1.E Experimental Results 249 5.2.2 Some Remarks about the Hybrid Filters 252 5.3 Series Active Filter Integrated with a Double-Series Diode Rectifier 253 5.3.1 The First-Generation Control Circuit 255 5.3.1.A Circuit Configuration and Delay Time 255 5.3.1.B Stability of the Active Filter 257 5.3.2 The Second-Generation Control Circuit 258 5.3.3 Stability Analysis and Characteristics Comparison 260 5.3.3.A Transfer Function of the Control Circuits 260 5.3.3.B Characteristics Comparisons 261 5.3.4 Design of a Switching-Ripple Filter 263 5.3.4.A Design Principle 263 5.3.4.B Effect on the System Stability 263 5.3.4.C Experimental Testing 264 5.3.5 Experimental Results 266 5.4 Comparisons Between Hybrid and Pure Active Filters 268 5.4.1 Low-Voltage Transformerless Hybrid Active Filter 268 5.4.2 Low-Voltage, Transformerless, Pure Shunt Active Filter 271 5.4.3 Comparisons through Simulation Results 273 5.5 Hybrid Active Filters for Medium-Voltage Motor Drives 274 5.5.1 Hybrid Active Filter for a Three-Phase Six-Pulse Diode Rectifier 275 5.5.1.A System Configuration 275 5.5.1.B Experimental System 277 5.5.1.C Control System 277 5.5.1.D Common Sixth-Harmonic Zero-Sequence Voltage Injection 281 5.5.1.E Three-Phase Second-Harmonic Negative Sequence Voltages Injection 283 5.5.1.F Experimental Results 286 5.5.1.G Appendix 292 5.5.2 Hybrid Active Filter for a Three-Phase 12-Pulse Diode Rectifier 292 5.5.2.A Medium-Voltage High-Power Motor Drive Systems 293 5.5.2.B Experimental System 295 5.5.2.C Control System 298 5.5.2.D Three-Phase Second-Harmonic Negative Sequence Voltages Injection 300 5.5.2.E Experimental Results 303 5.5.2.F Overall System Efficiency 308 5.6 Summary 308 5.7 Exercises 309 References 310 CHAPTER 6 COMBINED SERIES AND SHUNT POWER CONDITIONERS 313 6.1 The Unified Power Flow Controller 314 6.1.1 FACTS and UPFC Principles 315 6.1.1.A Voltage Regulation Principle 317 6.1.1.B Power Flow Control Principle 318 6.1.2 A Controller Design for the UPFC 321 6.1.3 UPFC Approach Using a Shunt Multipulse Converter 328 6.1.3.A Six-Pulse Converter 328 6.1.3.B Quasi 24-Pulse Converter 332 6.1.3.C Control of Active and Reactive Power in Multipulse Converters 334 6.1.3.D Shunt Multipulse Converter Controller 336 6.2 The Unified Power Quality Conditioner 339 6.2.1 General Description of the UPQC 340 6.2.2 A Three-Phase, Four-Wire UPQC 342 6.2.2.A Power Circuit of the UPQC 343 6.2.2.B The UPQC Controller 344 6.2.2.C Analysis of the UPQC Dynamic 353 6.2.3 The UPQC Combined with Passive Filters (the Hybrid UPQC) 370 6.2.3.A Controller of the Hybrid UPQC 374 6.2.3.B Experimental Results 380 6.3 The Universal Active Power Line Conditioner 386 6.3.1 General Description of the UPLC 386 6.3.2 The Controller of the UPLC 389 6.3.2.A Controller for Configuration #2 of the UPLC 396 6.3.3 Performance of the UPLC 397 6.3.3.A Normalized System Parameters 397 6.3.3.B Simulation Results of Configuration #1 of the UPLC 401 6.3.3.C Simulation Results of Configuration #2 of the UPLC 409 6.3.4 General Aspects 411 6.4 Combined Shunt-Series Filters for AC and DC Sides of Three-Phase Rectifiers 411 6.4.1 The Combined Shunt-Series Filter 414 6.4.2 Instantaneous Real and Imaginary Powers in the ac Source 415 6.4.3 The Instantaneous Power in the dc Side of the Rectifier 416 6.4.4 Comparison of Instantaneous Powers on the ac and dc Sides of the Rectifier 418 6.4.5 Control Algorithm of the Active Shunt-Series Filter 418 6.4.6 The Common dc Link 421 6.4.7 Digital Simulation 424 6.4.8 Experimental Results 426 6.5 Summary 427 6.6 Exercises 428 References 429 INDEX 431

Read more less

Book SynopsisSystemic thinking is the process of understanding how systems influence one another within a world of systems and has been defined as an approach to problem solving by viewing problems as parts of an overall system, rather than reacting to a specific part, outcome, or event. This book provides a complete overview of systemic thinking, exploring a framework and graphical technique for understanding and identifying new ways to more efficiently solve problems and create solutions. Demystifying the conjunction of systems concepts and systemic diagramming techniques, this comprehensive pocket guide introduces and explains the basis of systemigrams, how to create a systemigram and a SystemiShow, illuminates multiple complex problems, and provides an overview of what purpose they serve for today''s industry professionals. Systemic Thinking: Building Maps for Worlds of Systems: Includes illustrative systemigrams and case studies Includes the SystemTable of ContentsLIST OF SYSTEMIGRAMS ix LIST OF FIGURES xiii LIST OF TABLES xv ACKNOWLEDGMENTS xvii JOURNEY I SYSTEMIC FAILURE 1 1 WHERE WE START FROM 3 2 SYSTEMIC INTRODUCTION 6 3 RAINING ON MY CASCADE 11 4 IT’S THE WHOLE, STUPID! 16 5 THE ANSWER IS . . . PIONEER ACORN PANCAKES? 23 JOURNEY II SYSTEMIC IDEAS: THE CONCEPTAGON 29 6 FRAMEWORKS 31 7 THE CONCEPTAGON 35 8 BOUNDARIES, INTERIORS, AND EXTERIORS 38 9 PARTS, RELATIONSHIPS, AND WHOLES 46 10 INPUTS, OUTPUTS, AND TRANSFORMATIONS 57 11 CONTROL, COMMAND, AND COMMUNICATION 62 12 STRUCTURE, PROCESS, AND FUNCTION 76 13 VARIETY, PARSIMONY, AND HARMONY 86 14 OPENNESS, HIERARCHY, AND EMERGENCE 93 JOURNEY III SYSTEMIC MAPS: SYSTEMIGRAMS 99 15 WHAT . . . ? 101 16 WHY . . . ? 120 17 WHEN . . . ? 140 18 HOW . . . ? 158 19 WHO . . . ? 183 20 WHERE . . . ? 204 21 TO ARRIVE WHERE WE STARTED 233 REFERENCES 236 INDEX 238

Read more less

Book SynopsisSwitching in Electrical Transmission and Distribution Systems presents the issues and technological solutions associated with switching in power systems, from medium to ultra-high voltage.Trade Review“Engineers who design and perform testing of MV and HV circuit breakers, load break switches, or fuses as well as MV and HV test lab managers will find this book to be a very useful and handy reference.” (IEEE Electrical Engineering magazine, 1 July 2015) Table of ContentsPreface xv 1 Switching in Power Systems 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Organization of this Book 2 1.3 Power-System Analysis 5 1.4 Purpose of Switching 8 1.4.1 Isolation and Earthing 8 1.4.2 Busbar-Transfer Switching 8 1.4.3 Load Switching 8 1.4.4 Fault-Current Interruption 9 1.5 The Switching Arc 10 1.6 Transient Recovery Voltage (TRV) 14 1.6.1 TRV Description 14 1.6.2 TRV Composed of Load- and Source-Side Contributions 16 1.7 Switching Devices 19 1.8 Classification of Circuit-Breakers 22 References 27 2 Faults in Power Systems 28 2.1 Introduction 28 2.2 Asymmetrical Current 30 2.2.1 General Terms 30 2.2.2 DC Time Constant 33 2.2.3 Asymmetrical Current in Three-Phase Systems 34 2.3 Short-Circuit Current Impact on System and Components 35 2.4 Fault Statistics 43 2.4.1 Occurrence and Nature of Short-Circuits 43 2.4.2 Magnitude of Short-Circuit Current 45 References 46 3 Fault-Current Breaking and Making 48 3.1 Introduction 48 3.2 Fault-Current Interruption 48 3.3 Terminal Faults 49 3.3.1 Introduction 49 3.3.2 Three-Phase Current Interruption 51 3.4 Transformer-Limited Faults 58 3.4.1 Transformer Modelling for TRV Calculation 59 3.4.2 External Capacitances 61 3.5 Reactor-Limited Faults 62 3.6 Faults on Overhead Lines 64 3.6.1 Short-Line Faults 64 3.6.2 Long-Line Faults 81 3.7 Out-of-Phase Switching 81 3.7.1 Introduction 81 3.7.2 Switching between Generator and System 83 3.7.3 Switching between Two Systems 85 3.8 Fault-Current Making 86 3.8.1 Impact of Making a Short-Circuit Current on the Circuit-Breaker 86 3.8.2 Switching-Voltage Transients at Making in Three-Phase Systems 88 References 93 4 Load Switching 96 4.1 Normal-Load Switching 96 4.2 Capacitive-Load Switching 97 4.2.1 Introduction 97 4.2.2 Single-Phase Capacitive-Load Switching 98 4.2.3 Three-Phase Capacitive-Load Switching 104 4.2.4 Late Breakdown Phenomena 104 4.2.5 Overhead-Line Switching 114 4.2.6 Capacitor-Bank Energization 118 4.3 Inductive-Load Switching 122 4.3.1 Current Chopping 124 4.3.2 Implication of Current Chopping 125 4.3.3 Inductive-Load Switching Duties 127 References 138 5 Calculation of Switching Transients 141 5.1 Analytical Calculation 141 5.1.1 Introduction 141 5.1.2 Switching LR Circuits 142 5.1.3 Switching RLC Circuits 147 5.2 Numerical Simulation of Transients 153 5.2.1 Historical Overview 153 5.2.2 The Electromagnetic Transients Program 154 5.2.3 Overview of Electrical Programs for Transient Simulation 159 5.3 Representation of Network Elements when Calculating Transients 160 References 162 6 Current Interruption in Gaseous Media 164 6.1 Introduction 164 6.2 Air as an Interrupting Medium 166 6.2.1 General 166 6.2.2 Fault-Current Interruption by Arc Elongation 167 6.2.3 Arc Chutes 171 6.2.4 Arcs in Open Air 174 6.2.5 Current Interruption by Compressed Air 175 6.3 Oil as an Interrupting Medium 176 6.3.1 Introduction 176 6.3.2 Current Interruption in Bulk-Oil Circuit-Breakers 177 6.3.3 Current Interruption in Minimum-Oil Circuit-Breakers 180 6.4 Sulfur Hexafluoride (SF6) as an Interrupting Medium 181 6.4.1 Introduction 181 6.4.2 Physical Properties 182 6.4.3 SF6 Decomposition Products 186 6.4.4 Environmental Effects of SF6 189 6.4.5 SF6 Substitutes 195 6.5 SF6 – N2 Mixtures 197 References 198 7 Gas Circuit-Breakers 202 7.1 Oil Circuit-Breakers 202 7.2 Air Circuit-Breakers 205 7.3 SF6 Circuit-Breakers 207 7.3.1 Introduction 207 7.3.2 Double-Pressure SF6 Circuit-Breakers 210 7.3.3 Puffer-Type SF6 Circuit-Breakers 210 7.3.4 Self-Blast SF6 Circuit-Breakers 215 7.3.5 Double-Motion Principle 218 7.3.6 Double-Speed Principle 220 7.3.7 SF6 Circuit-Breakers with Magnetic Arc Rotation 221 References 222 8 Current Interruption in Vacuum 223 8.1 Introduction 223 8.2 Vacuum as an Interruption Environment 223 8.3 Vacuum Arcs 227 8.3.1 Introduction 227 8.3.2 Cathode- and Anode Sheath 229 8.3.3 The Diffuse Vacuum Arc 230 8.3.4 The Constricted Vacuum Arc 234 8.3.5 Vacuum-Arc Control by Magnetic Field 235 References 241 9 Vacuum Circuit-Breakers 243 9.1 General Features of Vacuum Interrupters 243 9.2 Contact Material for Vacuum Switchgear 246 9.2.1 Pure Metals 247 9.2.2 Alloys 247 9.3 Reliability of Vacuum Switchgear 248 9.4 Electrical Lifetime 249 9.5 Mechanical Lifetime 249 9.6 Breaking Capacity 251 9.7 Dielectric Withstand Capability 251 9.8 Current Conduction 252 9.9 Vacuum Quality 252 9.10 Vacuum Switchgear for HV Systems 253 9.10.1 Introduction 253 9.10.2 Development of HV Vacuum Circuit-Breakers 254 9.10.3 Actual Application of HV Vacuum Circuit-Breakers 255 9.10.4 X-ray Emission 256 9.10.5 Comparison of HV Vacuum- and HV SF6 Circuit-Breakers 257 References 258 10 Special Switching Situations 261 10.1 Generator-Current Breaking 261 10.1.1 Introduction 261 10.1.2 Generator Circuit-Breakers 266 10.2 Delayed Current Zero in Transmission Systems 267 10.3 Disconnector Switching 267 10.3.1 Introduction 267 10.3.2 No-Load-Current Switching 268 10.3.3 Bus-Transfer Switching 278 10.4 Earthing 279 10.4.1 Earthing Switches 279 10.4.2 High-Speed Earthing Switches 280 10.5 Switching Related to Series Capacitor Banks 282 10.5.1 Series Capacitor-Bank Protection 282 10.5.2 By-Pass Switch 283 10.6 Switching Leading to Ferroresonance 285 10.7 Fault-Current Interruption Near Shunt Capacitor Banks 286 10.8 Switching in Ultra-High-Voltage (UHV) Systems 288 10.8.1 Insulation Levels 289 10.8.2 UHV System Characteristics Related to Switching 289 10.9 High-Voltage AC Cable System Characteristics 291 10.9.1 Background 291 10.9.2 Current Situation 291 10.10 Switching in DC Systems 295 10.10.1 Introduction 295 10.10.2 Low- and Medium Voltage DC Interruption 295 10.10.3 High-Voltage DC Interruption 297 10.11 Distributed Generation and Switching Transients 298 10.11.1 General Considerations 298 10.11.2 Out-of-Phase Conditions 300 10.12 Switching with Non-Mechanical Devices 301 10.12.1 Fault-Current Limitation 301 10.12.2 Fuses 301 10.12.3 IS Limiters 303 References 304 11 Switching Overvoltages and Their Mitigation 310 11.1 Overvoltages 310 11.2 Switching Overvoltages 312 11.3 Switching-Voltage Mitigation 313 11.3.1 Principles of Mitigation 313 11.3.2 Mitigation by Closing Resistors 314 11.3.3 Mitigation by Surge Arresters 316 11.3.4 Fast Insertion of Shunt Reactors 319 11.4 Mitigation by Controlled Switching 320 11.4.1 Principles of Controlled Switching 320 11.4.2 Controlled Opening 321 11.4.3 Controlled Closing 323 11.4.4 Staggered Pole Closing 324 11.4.5 Applications of Controlled Switching 324 11.4.6 Comparison of Various Measures 334 11.4.7 Influence of Metal-Oxide Surge Arresters on Circuit-Breaker TRVs 336 11.4.8 Functional Requirements for Circuit-Breakers 337 11.4.9 Reliability Aspects 340 11.5 Practical Values of Switching Overvoltages 341 11.5.1 Overhead Lines 341 11.5.2 Shunt Capacitor Banks and Shunt Reactors 342 References 344 12 Reliability Studies of Switchgear 347 12.1 CIGRE Studies on Reliability of Switchgear 347 12.1.1 Reliability 347 12.1.2 Worldwide Surveys 348 12.1.3 Population and Failure Statistics 349 12.2 Electrical and Mechanical Endurance 354 12.2.1 Degradation Due to Arcing 354 12.2.2 Electrical-Endurance Verification 356 12.2.3 Mechanical Endurance 358 12.3 CIGRE Studies on Life Management of Circuit-Breakers 359 12.3.1 Maintenance 359 12.3.2 Monitoring and Diagnostics 360 12.3.3 Life Management of Circuit-Breakers for Frequent Load-Switching 362 12.4 Substation and System Reliability Studies 362 References 363 13 Standards, Specification, and Commissioning 365 13.1 Standards for Fault-Current Breaking Tests 365 13.1.1 Background and History of the Standardized IEC TRV Description 366 13.1.2 IEC TRV Description 368 13.1.3 IEC Test-Duties 370 13.1.4 IEC TRV Parameters Selection and Application 373 13.2 IEC Standardized Tests for Capacitive-Current Switching 373 13.3 IEC Standardized Tests for Inductive-Load Switching 377 13.3.1 Shunt-Reactor Switching 378 13.3.2 Medium-Voltage Motor Switching 381 13.4 Specification and Commissioning 381 13.4.1 General Specifications 381 13.4.2 Circuit-Breaker Specification 383 13.4.3 Information to be given with Requests for Offers 384 13.4.4 Information to be provided with Submitted Offers 384 13.4.5 Circuit-Breaker Selection 384 13.4.6 Circuit-Breaker Commissioning 384 References 385 14 Testing 386 14.1 Introduction 386 14.2 High-Power Tests 387 14.2.1 Introduction 387 14.2.2 Direct Tests 391 14.2.3 Synthetic Tests 395 References 411 List of Abbreviations 413 Index 417

Read more less

Book SynopsisA multidisciplinary reference of engineering measurement tools, techniques, and applications?Volume 2 When you can measure what you are speaking about, and express it in numbers, you know something about it; but when you cannot measure it, when you cannot express it in numbers, your knowledge is of a meager and unsatisfactory kind; it may be the beginning of knowledge, but you have scarcely in your thoughts advanced to the stage of science. ? Lord Kelvin Measurement falls at the heart of any engineering discipline and job function. Whether engineers are attempting to state requirements quantitatively and demonstrate compliance; to track progress and predict results; or to analyze costs and benefits, they must use the right tools and techniques to produce meaningful, useful data. The Handbook of Measurement in Science and Engineering is the most comprehensive, up-to-date reference set on engineering measurements?beyond anything on the market Table of ContentsVOLUME 2 PREFACE xxiii CONTRIBUTORS xxvii PART IV MATERIALS PROPERTIES AND TESTING 945 31 Viscosity Measurement 947 Ann M. Anderson, Bradford A. Bruno, and Lilla Safford Smith 31.1 Viscosity Background, 947 31.2 Common Units of Viscosity, 949 31.3 Major Viscosity Measurement Methods, 959 31.4 ASTM Standards for Measuring Viscosity, 974 31.5 Questions to Ask When Selecting a Viscosity Measurement Technique, 976 References, 979 32 Tribology Measurements 981 Prasanta Sahoo 32.1 Introduction, 982 32.2 Measurement of Surface Roughness, 983 32.3 Measurement of Friction, 988 32.4 Measurement of Wear, 992 32.5 Measurement of Test Environment, 994 32.6 Measurement of Material Characteristics, 998 32.7 Measurement of Lubricant Characteristics, 1001 32.8 Wear Particle Analysis, 1004 32.9 Industrial Measurements, 1005 32.10 Summary, 1006 33 Corrosion Monitoring 1007 Pierre R. Roberge 33.1 What is Corrosion Monitoring?, 1007 33.2 The Role of Corrosion Monitoring, 1008 33.3 Corrosion Monitoring System Considerations, 1010 References, 1116 34 Surface Properties Measurement 1121 Mrinalini Mulukutla and Sandip P. Harimkar 34.1 Introduction, 1121 34.2 Surface Properties, 1122 34.3 Microstructural Analysis, 1125 34.4 Compositional Analysis, 1128 34.5 Phase Analysis, 1130 34.6 Mechanical Testing, 1131 34.7 Corrosion Properties, 1141 34.8 Standards for Surface Engineering Measurement, 1145 References, 1147 35 Thermal Conductivity of Engineering Materials 1151 Juergen Blumm 35.1 Introduction, 1151 35.2 Stationary Methods for Measurement of the Thermal Conductivity, 1157 35.3 Transient Methods for the Measurement of the Thermal Conductivity, 1163 35.4 Test Results on Various Engineering Materials, 1173 References, 1188 36 Optical Methods for the Measurement of Thermal Conductivity 1189 Prabhakar R. Bandaru and Max S. Aubain 36.1 Thermal Boundary Resistance May Limit Accuracy in Contact-Based Thermal Conductivity (k) Measurements, 1189 36.2 Optical Measurements of k May Avoid Contact-Related Issues, 1192 36.3 Thermoreflectance (TR), 1196 36.4 Characteristics of Thermoreflectance from Si Thin Films—Modeling and Calibration, 1199 36.5 Experimental Procedures, 1202 36.6 Results and Discussion, 1204 36.7 Summary and Outlook, 1208 Acknowledgments, 1209 References, 1209 37 Selection of Metals for Structural Design 1213 Matthew J. Donachie 37.1 Introduction, 1214 37.2 Common Alloy Systems, 1215 37.3 What are Alloys and What Affects their Use?, 1215 37.4 What are the Properties of Alloys and How are Alloys Strengthened?, 1218 37.5 Manufacture of Alloy Articles, 1221 37.6 Alloy Information, 1221 37.7 Metals at Lower Temperatures, 1231 37.8 Metals at High Temperatures, 1233 37.9 Melting and Casting Practices, 1236 37.10 Forging, Forming, Powder Metallurgy, and Joining of Alloys, 1242 37.11 Surface Protection of Materials, 1245 37.12 Postservice Refurbishment and Repair, 1248 37.13 Alloy Selection: A Look at Possibilities, 1249 37.14 Level of Property Data, 1252 37.15 Thoughts on Alloy Systems, 1252 37.16 Selected Alloy Information Sources, 1259 Further Readings, 1261 38 Mechanical Properties of Polymers 1263 Daniel Liu, Jackie Rehkopf, and Maureen Reitman 38.1 Microstructure and Morphology of Polymers—Amorphous Versus Crystalline, 1264 38.2 General Stress–Strain Behavior, 1265 38.3 Viscoelasticity, 1271 38.4 Mechanical Models of Viscoelasticity, 1272 38.5 Time–Temperature Dependence, 1274 38.6 Deformation Mechanisms, 1274 38.7 Crazing, 1277 38.8 Fracture, 1279 38.9 Modifying Mechanical Properties, 1284 38.10 Load-Bearing Applications: Creep, Fatigue Resistance, and High Strain Rate Behavior, 1285 References, 1290 39 Electrical Properties of Polymers 1291 Evaristo Riande and Ricardo Diaz-Calleja 39.1 Introductory Remarks, 1291 39.2 Polarity and Permittivity, 1292 39.3 Measurements of Dielectric Permittivity, 1293 39.4 Polarization and Dipole Moments in Isotropic Systems, 1297 39.5 Thermostimulated Depolarization Currents, 1316 39.6 Conductivity in Polyelectrolytes and Polymer-Electrolytes as Separators for Low Temperature Fuel Cells and Electrical Batteries, 1318 39.7 Semiconductors and Electronic Conducting Polymers, 1324 39.8 Ferroelectricity, Pyroelectricity, and Piezoelectricity in Polymers, 1328 39.9 Nonlinear Polarization in Polymers, 1331 39.10 Elastomers for Actuators and Sensors, 1333 39.11 Electrical Breakdown in Polymers, 1336 References, 1338 40 Nondestructive Inspection 1343 Robert L. Crane and Jeremy S. Knopp 40.1 Introduction, 1344 40.2 Liquid Penetrants, 1347 40.3 Radiography, 1351 40.4 Ultrasonic Methods, 1361 40.5 Magnetic Particle Method, 1370 40.6 Thermal Methods, 1373 40.7 Eddy Current Methods, 1375 References, 1410 41 Testing of Metallic Materials 1413 Peter C. McKeighan 41.1 Mechanical Test Laboratory, 1414 41.2 Tensile and Compressive Property Testing, 1418 41.3 Creep and Stress Relaxation Testing, 1420 41.4 Hardness and Impact Testing, 1422 41.5 Fracture Toughness Testing, 1425 41.6 Fatigue Testing, 1429 41.7 Other Mechanical Testing, 1433 41.8 Environmental Considerations, 1434 Acknowledgments, 1436 References, 1436 42 Ceramics Testing 1437 Shawn K. McGuire and Michael G. Jenkins 42.1 Introduction, 1437 42.2 Mechanical Testing, 1438 42.3 Thermal Testing, 1451 42.4 Nondestructive Evaluation Testing, 1458 42.5 Electrical Testing, 1460 42.6 Summary, 1461 References, 1461 43 Plastics Testing 1463 Vishu Shah 43.1 Introduction, 1464 43.2 Mechanical Properties, 1464 43.3 Thermal Properties, 1481 43.4 Electrical Properties, 1484 43.5 Weathering Properties, 1488 43.6 Optical Properties, 1492 Further Readings, 1496 44 Testing and Instrumental Analysis for Plastics Processing: Key Characterization Techniques 1499 Maria del Pilar Noriega 44.1 FTIR Spectroscopy, 1499 44.2 Chromatography (GC, GC-MSD, GC-FID, and HPLC), 1500 44.3 DSC and Thermogravimetry (TGA), 1510 44.4 Rheometry, 1518 References, 1527 45 Analytical Tools for Estimation of Particulate Composite Material Properties 1529 Tarek I. Zohdi and Magd E. Zohdi 45.1 Introduction, 1529 45.2 Concepts in Statistical Quality Control, 1530 45.3 Effective Property Estimates, 1531 45.4 Summary, 1535 References, 1537 PART V INSTRUMENTATION 1539 46 Instrument Statics 1541 Jerry Lee Hall, Sriram Sundararajan, and Mahmood Naim 46.1 Terminology, 1541 46.2 Static Calibration, 1544 46.3 Statistics in the Measurement Process, 1547 References, 1570 47 Input and Output Characteristics 1573 Adam C. Bell 47.1 Introduction, 1574 47.2 Familiar Examples of Input–Output Interactions, 1575 47.3 Energy, Power, Impedance, 1578 47.4 Operating Point of Static Systems, 1586 47.5 Transforming the Operating Point, 1598 47.6 Measurement Systems, 1602 47.7 Distributed Systems in Brief, 1607 47.8 Concluding Remarks, 1609 References, 1610 48 Bridge Transducers 1611 Patrick L. Walter 48.1 Terminology, 1612 48.2 Flexural Devices in Measurement Systems, 1612 48.3 The Resistance Strain Gage, 1615 48.4 The Wheatstone Bridge, 1625 48.5 Resistance Bridge Balance Methods, 1634 48.6 Resistance Bridge Transducer Measurement System Calibration, 1636 48.7 Resistance Bridge Transducer Measurement System Considerations, 1646 48.8 AC Impedance Bridge Transducers, 1655 References, 1660 Further Readings, 1661 49 Signal Processing 1663 John Turnbull 49.1 Frequency-Domain Analysis of Linear Systems, 1663 49.2 Basic Analog Filters, 1666 49.3 Basic Digital Filter, 1672 49.4 Stability and Phase Analysis, 1680 49.5 Extracting Signal from Noise, 1682 References, 1683 50 Data Acquisition and Display Systems 1685 Philip C. Milliman 50.1 Introduction, 1686 50.2 Data Acquisition, 1687 50.3 Process Data Acquisition, 1688 50.4 Data Conditioning, 1691 50.5 Data Storage, 1699 50.6 Data Display and Reporting, 1704 50.7 Data Analysis, 1707 50.8 Data Communications, 1708 50.9 Other Data Acquisition and Display Topics, 1712 50.10 Summary, 1715 References, 1715 PART VI MEASUREMENT STANDARDS 1517 51 Mathematical and Physical Units, Standards, and Tables 1719 Jack H. Westbrook 51.1 Symbols and Abbreviations, 1720 Bibliography for Letter Symbols, 1731 Bibliography for Graphic Symbols, 1737 51.2 Mathematical Tables, 1742 51.3 Statistical Tables, 1765 51.4 Units and Standards, 1775 Bibliography for Units and Measurements, 1802 51.5 Tables of Conversion Factors, 1802 51.6 Standard Sizes, 1833 51.7 Standard Screws, 1886 52 Measurement Uncertainty 1911 David Clippinger 52.1 Introduction, 1911 52.2 Literature, 1914 52.3 Evaluation of Uncertainty, 1915 52.4 Discussion, 1924 Disclaimer, 1924 References, 1925 53 Measurements 1927 E. L. Hixson and E. A. Ripperger 53.1 Standards and Accuracy, 1927 53.2 Impedance Concepts, 1930 53.3 Error Analysis, 1935 References, 1942 INDEX I-1

Read more less

Book SynopsisComputer modeling and simulation (M&S) allows engineers to study and analyze complex systems. Discrete-event system (DES)-M&S is used in modern management, industrial engineering, computer science, and the military. As computer speeds and memory capacity increase, so DES-M&S tools become more powerful and more widely used in solving real-life problems. Based on over 20 years of evolution within a classroom environment, as well as on decades-long experience in developing simulation-based solutions for high-tech industries, Modeling and Simulation of Discrete-Event Systems is the only book on DES-M&S in which all the major DES modeling formalisms activity-based, process-oriented, state-based, and event-based are covered in a unified manner: A well-defined procedure for building a formal model in the form of event graph, ACD, or state graph Diverse types of modeling templates and examples that can be used as building blocks for a complex, real-lifeTable of ContentsPREFACE xvii ABBREVIATIONS xix PART I BASICS OF SYSTEM MODELING AND SIMULATION 1 1. Overview of Computer Simulation 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 What Is a System? 4 1.3 What Is Computer Simulation? 6 1.4 What Is Discrete-Event Simulation? 9 1.5 What Is Continuous Simulation? 11 1.6 What Is Monte Carlo Simulation? 12 1.7 What Are Simulation Experimentation and Optimization? 15 1.8 Review Questions 16 2. Basics of Discrete-Event System Modeling and Simulation 17 2.1 Introduction 17 2.2 How Is a Discrete-Event Simulation Carried Out? 17 2.3 Framework of Discrete-Event System Modeling 23 2.4 Illustrative Examples of DES Modeling and Simulation 32 2.5 Application Frameworks for Discrete-Event System Modeling and Simulation 38 2.6 What to Cover in a Simulation Class 40 2.7 Review Questions 42 PART II FUNDAMENTALS OF DISCRETE-EVENT SYSTEM MODELING AND SIMULATION 43 3. Input Modeling for Simulation 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 Empirical Input Modeling 46 3.3 Overview of Theoretical Distribution Fitting 48 3.4 Theoretical Modeling of Arrival Processes 50 3.5 Theoretical Modeling of Service Times 53 3.6 Input Modeling for Special Applications 57 3.7 Review Questions 59 4. Introduction to Event-Based Modeling and Simulation 69 4.1 Introduction 69 4.2 Modeling and Simulation of a Single Server System 70 4.3 Execution Rules and Specifications of Event Graph Models 72 4.4 Event Graph Modeling Templates 75 4.5 Event Graph Modeling Examples 82 4.6 Execution of Event Graph Models with SIGMA 91 4.7 Developing Your Own Event Graph Simulator 99 4.8 Review Questions 106 5. Parameterized Event Graph Modeling and Simulation 107 5.1 Introduction 107 5.2 Parameterized Event Graph Examples 108 5.3 Execution Rules and Specifications of the Parameterized Event Graph 110 5.4 Parameterized Event Graph Modeling of Tandem Lines 112 5.5 Parameterized Event Graph Modeling of Job Shops 115 5.6 Execution of Parameterized Event Graph Models Using SIGMA 122 5.7 Developing Your Own Parameterized Event Graph Simulator 137 5.8 Review Questions 142 6. Introduction to Activity-Based Modeling and Simulation 143 6.1 Introduction 143 6.2 Definitions and Specifications of an Activity Cycle Diagram 145 6.3 Activity Cycle Diagram Modeling Templates 150 6.4 Activity-Based Modeling Examples 156 6.5 Parameterized Activity Cycle Diagram and Its Application 163 6.6 Execution of Activity Cycle Diagram Models with a Formal Simulator ACE® 171 6.7 Review Questions 183 7. Simulation of ACD Models Using Arena 184 7.1 Introduction 184 7.2 Arena Basics 185 7.3 Activity Cycle Diagram-to-Arena Conversion Templates 197 7.4 Activity Cycle Diagram-Based Arena Modeling Examples 209 7.5 Review Questions 223 8. Output Analysis and Optimization 224 8.1 Introduction 224 8.2 Framework of Simulation Output Analyses 225 8.3 Qualitative Output Analyses 228 8.4 Statistical Output Analyses 230 8.5 Linear Regression Modeling for Output Analyses 234 8.6 Response Surface Methodology for Simulation Optimization 241 8.7 Review Questions 247 PART III ADVANCES IN DISCRETE-EVENT SYSTEM MODELING AND SIMULATION 253 9. State-Based Modeling and Simulation 255 9.1 Introduction 255 9.2 Finite State Machine 256 9.3 Timed Automata 261 9.4 State Graphs 267 9.5 System Modeling with State Graph 271 9.6 Simulation of Composite State Graph Models 283 10. Advanced Topics in Activity-Based Modeling and Simulation 299 10.1 Introduction 299 10.2 Developing Your Own Activity Cycle Diagram Simulators 300 10.3 Modeling with Canceling Arc 310 10.4 Cycle Time Analysis of Work Cells via an Activity Cycle Diagram 313 10.5 Activity Cycle Diagram Modeling of a Flexible Manufacturing System 322 10.6 Formal Model Conversion 329 11. Advanced Event Graph Modeling for Integrated Fab Simulation 338 11.1 Introduction 338 11.2 Flat Panel Display Fabrication System 339 11.3 Production Simulation of a Flat Panel Display Fab 343 11.4 Integrated Simulation of a Flat Panel Display Fab 350 11.5 Automated Material Handling Systems-Embedded Integrated Simulation of Flat Panel Display Fab 362 12. Concepts and Applications of Parallel Simulation 371 12.1 Introduction 371 12.2 Parallel Simulation of Workflow Management System 372 12.3 Overview of High-Level Architecture/Run-Time Infrastructure 378 12.4 Implementation of a Parallel Simulation with High-Level Architecture/Run-Time Infrastructure 383 REFERENCES 395 INDEX 400

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith the announcement in 2011 that the current Internet Protocol (IP), IPv4, has nearly run out, interest in IPv6 -- the latest IP version -- has grown substantially.Table of ContentsACKNOWLEDGMENTS XI INTRODUCTION XIII 1 IPv6 DEPLOYMENT DRIVERS 1 1.1 The Internet: A Success Story 1 1.1.1 Supply-Side Issues 3 1.1.2 Internet at a Crossroads 6 1.1.3 Which Internet Are You On? 7 1.2 Emerging Applications 7 1.3 IPv6 Business Case 10 2 IPv6 OVERVIEW 13 2.1 IPv6 Key Features 14 2.2 The IPv6 Header 14 2.2.1 IPv6 Extension Headers 15 2.3 IPv6 Addressing 17 2.3.1 Address Notation 18 2.3.2 Address Structure 19 2.3.3 IPv6 Address Allocations 20 2.3.4 Internet Control Message Protocol for IPv6 (ICMPv6) 27 2.3.5 IPv6 Ping 28 2.3.6 Multicast Listener Discovery 28 2.3.7 Multicast Router Discovery 31 2.3.8 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 31 2.3.9 Secure Neighbor Discovery (SEND) 33 2.3.10 Inverse Neighbor Discovery 33 2.3.11 Router Renumbering 34 2.3.12 Node Information Query 34 2.4 IPv6 Address Autoconfiguration 35 2.4.1 Modified EUI-64 Interface Identifiers 36 2.4.2 Duplicate Address Detection (DAD) 37 2.5 Mobile IPv6 38 2.6 Reserved Subnet Anycast Addresses 40 2.7 Required Host IPv6 Addresses 41 2.8 IPv6 Routing 41 3 IPv4/IPv6 CO-EXISTENCE TECHNOLOGIES 43 3.1 Dual Stack 44 3.1.1 Implementing Dual Stack 44 3.1.2 Which Address Is Used? 45 3.1.3 DNS Considerations 47 3.1.4 DHCP Considerations 48 3.2 Tunneling Approaches 49 3.2.1 Tunneling Scenarios for IPv6 Packets Over IPv4 Networks 49 3.2.2 Tunnel Types 51 3.2.3 Tunneling Scenario for IPv4 Packets Over IPv6 Networks 62 3.2.4 Tunneling Summary 63 3.3 Translation Approaches 63 3.3.1 IP/ICMP Translation 65 3.3.2 Bump in the Host (BIH) 72 3.3.3 Network Address Translation for IPv6/IPv4 (NAT64) 74 3.3.4 Other Translation Techniques 75 3.4 Application Support of IPv6 78 3.5 Service Provider IPv4/IPv6 Co-Existence 78 3.5.1 Reference Architecture 79 3.5.2 Deployment Approaches Overview 80 3.5.3 Routing Infrastructure Deployment Approaches 80 3.5.4 Comparison of Deployment Approaches 87 3.6 Addressing and DNS Considerations 87 4 IPv6 READINESS ASSESSMENT 91 4.1 Putting a Plan in Place 92 4.2 IP Network Inventory 93 4.2.1 IPv6 Readiness 93 4.2.2 Discovery 93 4.2.3 IPv6 Assessment 94 4.3 IPv6 to do List 106 4.4 IPv6 Readiness Assessment Summary 106 5 IPv6 ADDRESS PLANNING 109 5.1 Internet Registries 109 5.1.1 RIR Address Allocation Policies 111 5.1.2 Address Allocation Efficiency 112 5.2 IPv6 Address Planning 112 5.3 IPv6 Address Allocation Methods 113 5.3.1 Best-Fit Method 114 5.3.2 Sparse Allocation Method 116 5.3.3 Random Allocation 117 5.3.4 DHCPv6 Prefix Delegation 118 5.3.5 Unique Local Address Space 118 5.4 Defining Your IPv6 Address Plan 118 5.5 Multihoming and IP Address Space 122 5.6 IP Address Planning Summary 125 6 IPv6 SECURITY PLANNING 127 6.1 The Good News: IP Is IP 127 6.2 The Bad News: IPv6 Is Not IPv4 128 6.3 Update Your Security Policy 129 6.4 Network Perimeter Monitoring and Intrusion Prevention 129 6.4.1 IPv6 Address Filtering 130 6.4.2 ICMPv6 Messages 131 6.5 Extension Headers 132 6.6 Internal Network Protection 133 6.6.1 Network Reconnaissance 133 6.6.2 Network Access 134 6.6.3 DHCPv6 135 6.6.4 DNS 135 6.6.5 Anycast Addressing 136 6.6.6 Internal Network Filtering 136 6.7 Network Device Security Considerations 137 6.8 Mobile IPv6 Security 138 6.8.1 Mobility Extension Header 139 6.8.2 Mobile IPv6 Vulnerabilities 143 6.9 IPv4/IPv6 Coexistence Measures 144 6.9.1 Securing Tunneling Implementations 145 6.9.2 Securing Translation Implementations 146 6.10 Summary 148 7 IPv6 NETWORK MANAGEMENT PLANNING 149 7.1 Management Model 149 7.2 Network Management Scope 150 7.2.1 Network Inventory 150 7.2.2 IP Address Inventory 151 7.2.3 The Management Network 151 7.3 The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) 152 7.3.1 Configuration Management 153 7.3.2 Fault Management 153 7.3.3 Accounting Management 154 7.3.4 Performance Management 154 7.4 Methods and Procedures 154 7.5 Summary 155 8 MANAGING THE DEPLOYMENT 157 8.1 Integrating Plans 157 8.2 Project Management 159 8.3 Testing Deployment 160 8.4 Production Deployment 161 9 MANAGING THE IPv4/IPv6 NETWORK 163 9.1 Common Network Management Tasks 163 9.2 Configuration Management 163 9.2.1 Network Allocation-Related Tasks 164 9.2.2 Adding a New Device 166 9.2.3 Deletion Tasks 167 9.2.4 Address Renumbering or Movement Tasks 168 9.2.5 Block/Subnet Splits 171 9.2.6 Block/Subnet Joins 172 9.2.7 DHCPv6 Server Configuration 173 9.2.8 DNS Server Configuration 174 9.2.9 Prefix Renumbering 175 9.3 Fault Management 176 9.3.1 Fault Detection 176 9.3.2 Troubleshooting and Fault Resolution 177 9.4 Accounting Management 177 9.4.1 Inventory Assurance 177 9.4.2 Address Reclamation 180 9.5 Performance Management 181 9.5.1 Services Monitoring 181 9.5.2 Application Performance Management 182 9.5.3 Auditing and Reporting 182 9.6 Security Management 183 9.7 Disaster Recovery/Business Continuity 183 10 IPv6 AND THE FUTURE INTERNET 185 10.1 Technology Enablers 185 10.2 The Internet’s Dark Side 187 10.3 The Internet’s Bright Future 187 10.3.1 Living Smarter 187 10.3.2 Keeping Track 188 10.3.3 Extensible Healthcare 188 10.3.4 Public Safety 188 10.3.5 Credit Cards of the Future 188 10.3.6 Consumer Applications 188 10.4 Conclusion 189 APPENDIX 191 BIBLIOGRAPHY 193 INDEX 199

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn ideal power system operation is the pinnacle of safety, reliability, and efficiency. In Practical Power System Operation, Ebrahim Vaahedi addresses system operators viewpoints in handling power system operation issues, a holistic approach that electrical textbooks rarely take.Table of ContentsForeword xi Preface xiii General Introduction xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Overview of Power System Operation 1 1.2 Operator 2 1.3 Process 3 1.4 Technology 4 1.5 Power System Operation Criteria 4 1.6 Outline of the Book 5 2 POWER SYSTEM MONITORING 6 2.1 Operator Function in Power System Monitoring 6 2.2 Process for Power System Monitoring 6 2.3 Technology for Power System Monitoring 8 2.3.1 The Role of System Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) 8 2.3.2 State Estimation 10 2.3.3 Least Square Method for State Estimation 11 2.4 Bad Data Identification 16 2.5 Observability 19 Questions and Problems 19 3 POWER SYSTEM SCENARIO ANALYSIS 21 3.1 Operator Function in Power System Scenario Analysis 21 3.2 Process for Power System Scenario Analysis 21 3.3 Technology for Power System Control 22 3.3.1 Infrastructure for Power System Control 22 3.3.2 Technology for Power System Scenario Analysis: Power Flow 26 3.3.3 System Modeling 27 3.3.4 Power Flow Techniques 29 3.3.5 Factorization 42 3.3.6 Sparsity 45 3.3.7 Different Power Flow Scenarios and Applications 46 Questions and Problems 47 4 POWER SYSTEM POSTURING: STATIC SECURITY 48 4.1 Operator’s Question on Power System Posturing: Static Security 48 4.2 Process for Power System Posturing: Static Security 48 4.3 Technology for Power System Posturing: Static Security 49 4.3.1 Contingency Analysis 49 4.3.2 Contingency Definition 50 4.3.3 Contingency Selection 51 4.3.4 Contingency Evaluation 56 4.3.5 Implementation of Remedial Action Schemes 60 Questions and Problems 60 5 POWER SYSTEM POSTURING: ANGULAR STABILITY 62 5.1 Operator’s Question on Power System Posturing: Angular Stability 62 5.2 Process for Power System Posturing: Angular Stability 62 5.3 Technology for Power System Posturing: Angular Stability 65 5.3.1 Angular Stability Assessment 65 5.3.2 Power System Stability 68 5.3.3 Angular Stability 68 5.3.4 Transient Stability 68 5.3.5 Small System 69 5.3.6 Integration Methods 71 5.3.7 Equal-Area Criteria Method 74 5.3.8 Models for Other Components 81 5.3.9 Multimachine System 81 5.3.10 Small-Signal Stability 82 5.3.11 Angular Stability Limit Derivation 83 5.4 Implementation of Angular Stability Limits 85 Questions and Problems 86 6 POWER SYSTEM POSTURING: VOLTAGE STABILITY 88 6.1 Operator’s Question on Power System Posturing: Voltage Stability 88 6.2 Process for Power System Posturing: Voltage Stability 88 6.3 Technology for Power System Posturing: Voltage Stability 91 6.3.1 Voltage Stability Assessment 91 6.4 Voltage Stability Limit Derivation and Implementation 99 6.4.1 Voltage Stability Limit Derivation 99 6.4.2 Implementation of Voltage Stability Limits 100 Questions and Problems 103 7 POWER SYSTEM GENERATION LOAD BALANCE 105 7.1 Operator’s Question on Generation Load Balance 105 7.2 Process for Generation Load Balance 105 7.2.1 Introduction 105 7.2.2 NERC Standards for Automatic Generation Control 108 7.2.3 Process for Automatic Generation Control 109 7.3 Technology for Generation Load Balance 111 7.3.1 Automatic Generation Control Application 111 7.3.2 Automatic Generation Control Infrastructure 115 7.3.3 Example on AGC Operation 116 Questions and Problems 117 8 Power System Operation Optimization 119 8.1 Operator’s Question on Power System Operation Optimization 119 8.2 Process for Power System Generation Operation 120 8.2.1 Introduction 120 8.2.2 Utility Model 120 8.3 Process for Generation Sufficiency 123 8.3.1 Generation Sufficiency Process for Operations Planning 123 8.3.2 Generation Sufficiency Process for Near Real Time 123 8.3.3 Generation Sufficiency Process for Real Time 124 8.4 Technology for Generation Sufficiency 124 8.4.1 Generation Sufficiency Applications 125 8.4.2 Generation Sufficiency Infrastructure 148 Questions and Problems 149 9 SYSTEM OPERATION CONTROL CENTERS 151 9.1 Introduction 151 9.2 Modern Control Center Attributes 151 9.3 Control Center Redundancy Configuration 154 9.4 Modern Control Center Configuration 155 9.5 Modern Control Center Design Details 156 Questions and Problems 159 10 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS 161 10.1 Introduction 161 10.2 Ems Functionality Overview 162 10.2.1 System Monitoring 163 10.2.2 Decision Support Systems 164 10.2.3 EMS Control Actions 164 10.3 Energy Management System Availability Criteria and Architecture 165 10.3.1 Hardware Overview 166 10.3.2 Software Overview 168 10.3.3 Application Sequencing in EMS 171 10.3.4 Software Integration 172 Questions and Problems 174 11 DISTRIBUTION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 176 11.1 Introduction 176 11.2 DMS Functionality Overview 177 11.2.1 System Monitoring 179 11.2.2 Decision Support Systems 181 11.2.3 DMS Control Actions 186 11.3 Distribution Management System Architecture 186 11.3.1 Hardware Overview 186 11.3.2 Software Overview 187 11.3.3 Application Integration with DMS 189 Questions and Problems 192 12 EVOLVING POWER SYSTEM OPERATION SOLUTIONS 193 12.1 Introduction 193 12.2 Evolving Operation Solutions 193 12.2.1 Online Transient Stability 193 12.2.2 Online Voltage Stability 196 12.2.3 Total Transfer Capability Calculator 197 12.2.4 Transmission Outage Scheduling System 201 12.2.5 Synchrophasor Systems 202 12.2.6 Distribution Automation 204 12.2.7 Dynamic Thermal Rating Systems 205 12.2.8 Distributed Energy Resources 205 12.2.9 Demand Response 206 12.2.10 Microgrid 207 12.2.11 Real-Time Posturing and Control 208 12.2.12 Critical System Application and Facilities Heartbeat 208 12.2.13 Probabilistic Limit Calculations 208 12.2.14 Managing Critical Operations Knowledge: Operations Code Book 210 Appendix A Preliminary Concepts 211 A.1 Introduction 211 A.2 Phasor Representation 211 A.3 Per-Unit Representation 213 A.4 Matrix Algebra 215 A.5 Steady-State Component Modeling 216 A.5.1 Transmission Lines 216 A.5.2 Transformers and Phase Shifters 217 A.5.3 Generators 218 A.5.4 Shunts and Synchronous Condensers 218 A.5.5 Loads 218 A.5.6 Network Equations 218 References 219 Index 224

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book offers practical guidance on how to implement and deploy Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6) in the Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) mobile broadband environment. It explains how IPv6 is defined in the industry standards for cellular mobile broadband, why this route was taken, and what is the current reality of the deployment.Table of ContentsForeword xvii Preface xix Acknowledgments xxi Acronyms xxiii Glossary xxxiii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Introduction to Internet and the Internet Protocol 2 1.2 Internet Principles 2 1.3 The Internet Protocol 4 1.3.1 Networks of Networks 6 1.3.2 Routing and Forwarding 7 1.4 Internet Protocol Addresses 9 1.4.1 IPv4 Addresses 9 1.4.2 IPv6 Addresses 11 1.5 Transport Protocols 12 1.5.1 User Datagram Protocol 13 1.5.2 Transmission Control Protocol 13 1.5.3 Port Numbers and Services 14 1.6 Domain Name Service 14 1.6.1 DNS Structure 14 1.6.2 DNS Operation 15 1.6.3 Top Level Domain 16 1.6.4 Internationalized Domain Names 17 1.7 IPv4 Address Exhaustion 17 1.7.1 IP Address Allocation 18 1.7.2 History of IPv4 Address Exhaustion 19 1.8 IPv6 History Thus Far 21 1.8.1 IPv6 Technology Maturity 21 1.8.2 IPv6 Network Deployments 22 1.9 Ongoing Cellular Deployments 23 1.10 Chapter Summary 24 1.11 Suggested Reading 24 References 24 2 Basics of the 3GPP Technologies 27 2.1 Standardization and Specifications 27 2.1.1 3GPP Standardization Process 28 2.1.2 IETF Standardization Process 31 2.1.3 Other Important Organizations in the 3GPP-Ecosystem 33 2.2 Introduction to 3GPP Network Architecture and Protocols 34 2.2.1 GSM System 34 2.2.2 General Packet Radio Service 36 2.2.3 Evolved Packet System 41 2.2.4 Control and User Planes, and Transport and User Layer Separation 44 2.3 3GPP Protocols 45 2.3.1 Control-Plane Protocols 46 2.3.2 User-Plane Protocols 53 2.3.3 GPRS Tunneling Protocol Versions 55 2.3.4 PMIP Based EPS Architecture 56 2.4 Mobility and Roaming 58 2.4.1 Mobility Management 59 2.4.2 Roaming 60 2.4.3 Mobility Management Beyond 3GPP 60 2.5 Central Concepts for IP Connectivity 61 2.5.1 PDP Contexts and EPS Bearers 61 2.5.2 Access Point Name 63 2.5.3 Traffic Flow Template 64 2.5.4 3GPP Link Model Principles 65 2.5.5 Multiple Packet Data Network Connections 67 2.6 User Equipment 68 2.6.1 Traditional 3GPP UE Model 69 2.6.2 Split-UE 69 2.7 Subscription Management Databases and Other Backend Systems 70 2.7.1 Home Location Register and Authentication Center 70 2.7.2 Home Subscriber Server 71 2.7.3 Equipment Identity Register 71 2.7.4 Other Backend Systems 71 2.8 End-to-end View from the User Equipment to the Internet 72 2.8.1 GPRS 72 2.8.2 EPS 73 2.9 Chapter Summary 75 2.10 Suggested Reading 75 References 76 3 Introduction to IPv6 79 3.1 IPv6 Addressing Architecture 80 3.1.1 IPv6 Address Format 80 3.1.2 IPv6 Address Types 81 3.1.3 IPv6 Address Scopes 81 3.1.4 IPv6 Addressing Zones 82 3.1.5 IPv6 Addresses on Network Interfaces 82 3.1.6 Interface Identifier and the Modified EUI-64 83 3.1.7 IPv6 Address Space Allocations 84 3.1.8 Special IPv6 Address Formats 84 3.1.9 Textual Presentations of IPv6 Addresses 86 3.2 IPv6 Packet Header Structure and Extensibility 87 3.2.1 Traffic Class and Flow Label 88 3.2.2 IPv6 Extension Headers 90 3.2.3 MTU and Fragmentation 92 3.2.4 Multicast 94 3.3 Internet Control Message Protocol Version 6 97 3.3.1 Error Messages 98 3.3.2 Informational Messages 100 3.4 Neighbor Discovery Protocol 101 3.4.1 Router Discovery 101 3.4.2 Parameter Discovery 102 3.4.3 On-link Determination 104 3.4.4 Link-layer Address Resolution 104 3.4.5 Neighbor Unreachability Detection 105 3.4.6 Next-hop Determination 106 3.4.7 Duplicate Address Detection 106 3.4.8 Redirect 107 3.4.9 Secure Neighbor Discovery 107 3.4.10 Neighbor Discovery Proxies 108 3.5 Address Configuration and Selection Approaches 109 3.5.1 Stateless Address Autoconfiguration 110 3.5.2 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Version 6 112 3.5.3 IKEv2 117 3.5.4 Address Selection 118 3.5.5 Privacy and Cryptographically Generated Addresses 120 3.5.6 Router Selection 121 3.6 IPv6 Link Types and Models 122 3.6.1 IPv6 over Point-to-point Links 123 3.6.2 IPv6 over Shared Media 124 3.6.3 Link Numbering 125 3.6.4 Bridging of Link Types 126 3.7 Mobile IP 126 3.7.1 Detecting Network Attachment 126 3.7.2 Host-based Mobile IP 127 3.7.3 Network-based Mobile IP 128 3.8 IP Security 130 3.8.1 Security Protocols 131 3.8.2 Security Associations 131 3.8.3 Key Management 132 3.8.4 Cryptographic Algorithms 132 3.8.5 MOBIKE 132 3.9 Application Programming Interfaces 133 3.9.1 Socket APIs 133 3.9.2 Address Family Agnostic APIs 133 3.9.3 IP Address Literals and Unique Resource Identifiers 134 3.9.4 Happy Eyeballs 134 3.10 Implications of IPv6 for Other Protocols 136 3.10.1 Transport Layer Protocols 136 3.10.2 Domain Name System 137 3.10.3 Applications 141 3.10.4 Internet Routing 141 3.10.5 Management Information Base 143 3.11 Validation and Certification 144 3.11.1 Test Suites 144 3.11.2 IPv6 Ready Logo 144 3.12 Example IPv6 Packet Flows 145 3.12.1 IPv6 on Ethernet 146 3.12.2 IPv6 with DNS and TCP 153 3.13 Chapter Summary 155 References 156 4 IPv6 in 3GPP Networks 163 4.1 PDN Connectivity Service 163 4.1.1 Bearer Concept 164 4.1.2 PDP and PDN Types 166 4.1.3 Link Models in 3GPP 168 4.2 End User IPv6 Service Impact on the 3GPP System 172 4.2.1 User, Control and Transport Planes 172 4.2.2 Affected Networking Elements 173 4.2.3 Charging and Billing 180 4.2.4 External PDN Access and the (S)Gi Interface 182 4.2.5 Roaming Challenges 187 4.3 End User IPv6 Service Impact on GTP and PMIPv6 Protocols 189 4.3.1 GTP Control Plane Version 1 189 4.3.2 GTP Control Plane Version 2 191 4.3.3 GTP User Plane 194 4.3.4 PMIPv6 194 4.4 IP Address Assignment, Configuration, and Management 195 4.4.1 Addressing Assumptions 195 4.4.2 Stateless IPv6 Address Autoconfiguration 197 4.4.3 Stateful IPv6 Address Configuration 200 4.4.4 Deferred Address Allocation 200 4.4.5 Static IPv6 Addressing 201 4.4.6 IPv6 Prefix Delegation 204 4.4.7 NAS Protocol Signaling and PCO Options 207 4.4.8 Initial E-UTRAN Attach Example with IPv4 and IPv6 Address Configuration 211 4.5 Bearer Establishment and Fallback Scenarios 214 4.5.1 Initial Connection Establishment 214 4.5.2 Backward Compatibility with Earlier Releases 215 4.5.3 Dual Address Bearer Flag 215 4.5.4 Requested PDN Type Handling in a PGW 216 4.5.5 Fallback Scenarios and Rules 217 4.5.6 Inter-RAT Handovers and Inter-SGSN Routing Area Updates 218 4.6 Signaling Interfaces 219 4.6.1 IPv6 as Transport 219 4.6.2 IPv6 in Information Element Level 219 4.7 User Equipment Specific Considerations 220 4.7.1 IPv6 and Impacted Layers 220 4.7.2 Required RFCs for Host UEs 222 4.7.3 DNS Issues 223 4.7.4 Provisioning 224 4.7.5 IPv6 Tethering 225 4.7.6 IPv6 Application Support 227 4.8 Multicast 227 4.9 Known IPv6 Issues and Anomalies 228 4.9.1 IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Considerations 229 4.9.2 PDN Connection Model and Multiple IPv6 Prefixes 233 4.10 IPv6 Specific Security Considerations 233 4.10.1 IPv6 Addressing Threats 234 4.10.2 IPv6 First-hop Security 236 4.10.3 IPv6 Extension Header Exploits 237 4.11 Chapter Summary 239 References 240 5 IPv6 Transition Mechanisms for 3GPP Networks 248 5.1 Motivation for Transition Mechanisms 248 5.1.1 Phasing the Transition 250 5.2 Technology Overview 251 5.2.1 Translation 251 5.2.2 Encapsulation 253 5.2.3 Mesh or Hub-and-spoke 254 5.2.4 Scalability Concerns 255 5.3 Transition Toolbox 255 5.3.1 Transition Solutions Not Included 256 5.3.2 Dual-stack 257 5.3.3 NAT64 and DNS64 258 5.3.4 464XLAT 269 5.3.5 Bump-In-the-Host 271 5.3.6 Mapping Address and Port Number 272 5.3.7 Other Tunneling or Translation Based Transition Mechanisms 275 5.4 Transition Scenarios for 3GPP 277 5.4.1 Transition Scenario Evolution 278 5.4.2 Dual-stack 280 5.4.3 IPv6-only 281 5.4.4 Double Translation 281 5.5 Transition Impacts on 3GPP Architecture 282 5.5.1 Transition Impact on the Supporting Infrastructure 282 5.5.2 IP Network Support Systems 283 5.5.3 Tools to Divide Subscribers Per IP Capability 285 5.5.4 Translation Implications 286 5.5.5 Transition Support in the Transport Plane 287 5.5.6 Roaming 287 5.5.7 Impact of Delayed Transition to IPv6 288 5.6 Transitioning to IPv6 289 5.6.1 Application Developer’s Transition Plan 290 5.6.2 Phone Vendor’s Transition Plan 290 5.6.3 Network Operator’s Transition Checklist 290 5.7 Chapter Summary 292 References 293 6 Future of IPv6 in 3GPP Networks 296 6.1 IPv6-based Traffic Offloading Solutions 296 6.1.1 Motivations in Cellular Networks 297 6.1.2 Benefits of IPv6-based Offloading Approaches 299 6.1.3 IP-friendly Offloading Solutions 299 6.1.4 Concluding Remarks 303 6.2 Evolving 3GPP Bearers to Multiple Prefixes and Next-hop Routers 304 6.2.1 Background and Motivation 304 6.2.2 Multi-prefix Bearer Solution Proposal 305 6.2.3 Overall Impact Analysis 311 6.2.4 Open Issues and Future Work 313 6.3 LTE as the Uplink Access for Home Networks 313 6.3.1 Homenet at IETF 313 6.3.2 Homenet and 3GPP Architecture 314 6.3.3 Additional 3GPP Deployment Options 315 6.4 Port Control Protocol 316 6.4.1 Deployment Scenarios 317 6.4.2 Protocol Features 318 6.4.3 PCP Server Discovery 319 6.4.4 Protocol Messages 319 6.4.5 Cascaded NATs 320 6.4.6 Relation to IPv6 Transition 320 6.5 Internet of Things 321 6.5.1 Typical Use Cases 321 6.5.2 Standardization Organizations Working with IoT 322 6.5.3 IoT Domain from the 3GPP Point of View 327 6.5.4 Implications to UEs 328 6.5.5 Implications to 3GPP Networks 329 6.6 Chapter Summary 331 References 332 Index 337

Read more less

Book SynopsisBridges the gap between electromagnetics and circuits by addressing electrometric modeling (EM) using the Partial Element Equivalent Circuit (PEEC) method This book provides intuitive solutions to electromagnetic problems by using the Partial Element Equivalent Circuit (PEEC) method.Table of ContentsDEDICATION xv PREFACE xvii ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS xxi ACRONYMS xxv 1 Introduction 1 References, 6 2 Circuit Analysis for PEEC Methods 9 2.1 Circuit Analysis Techniques, 9 2.2 Overall Electromagnetic and Circuit Solver Structure, 9 2.3 Circuit Laws, 11 2.4 Frequency and Time Domain Analyses, 13 2.5 Frequency Domain Analysis Formulation, 14 2.6 Time Domain Analysis Formulations, 17 2.7 General Modified Nodal Analysis (MNA), 22 2.8 Including Frequency Dependent Models in Time Domain Solution, 28 2.9 Including Frequency Domain Models in Circuit Solution, 31 2.10 Recursive Convolution Solution, 39 2.11 Circuit Models with Delays or Retardation, 41 Problems, 43 References, 44 3 Maxwell’s Equations 47 3.1 Maxwell’s Equations for PEEC Solutions, 47 3.2 Auxiliary Potentials, 52 3.3 Wave Equations and Their Solutions, 54 3.4 Green’s Function, 58 3.5 Equivalence Principles, 60 3.6 Numerical Solution of Integral Equations, 63 Problems, 65 References, 66 4 Capacitance Computations 67 4.1 Multiconductor Capacitance Concepts, 68 4.2 Capacitance Models, 69 4.3 Solution Techniques for Capacitance Problems, 74 4.4 Meshing Related Accuracy Problems for PEEC Model, 79 4.5 Representation of Capacitive Currents for PEEC Models, 82 Problems, 85 References, 86 5 Inductance Computations 89 5.1 Loop Inductance Computations, 90 5.2 Inductance Computation Using a Solution or a Circuit Solver, 95 5.3 Flux Loops for Partial Inductance, 95 5.4 Inductances of Incomplete Structures, 96 5.5 Computation of Partial Inductances, 99 5.6 General Inductance Computations Using Partial Inductances and Open Loop Inductance, 107 5.7 Difference Cell Pair Inductance Models, 109 5.8 Partial Inductances with Frequency Domain Retardation, 119 Retardation, 123 Problems, 125 References, 131 6 Building PEEC Models 133 6.1 Resistive Circuit Elements for Manhattan-Type Geometries, 134 6.2 Inductance–Resistance (Lp,R)PEEC Models, 136 6.3 General (Lp,p,R)PEEC Model Development, 138 6.4 Complete PEEC Model with Input and Output Connections, 148 6.5 Time Domain Representation, 154 Problems, 154 References, 155 7 Nonorthogonal PEEC Models 157 7.1 Representation of Nonorthogonal Shapes, 158 7.2 Specification of Nonorthogonal Partial Elements, 163 7.3 Evaluation of Partial Elements for Nonorthogonal PEEC Circuits, 169 Problems, 181 References, 182 8 Geometrical Description and Meshing 185 8.1 General Aspects of PEEC Model Meshing Requirements, 186 8.2 Outline of Some Meshing Techniques Available Today, 187 8.3 SPICE Type Geometry Description, 194 8.4 Detailed Properties of Meshing Algorithms, 196 8.5 Automatic Generation of Geometrical Objects, 202 8.6 Meshing of Some Three Dimensional Pre-determined Shapes, 205 8.7 Approximations with Simplified Meshes, 207 8.8 Mesh Generation Codes, 208 Problems, 209 References, 210 9 Skin Effect Modeling 213 9.1 Transmission Line Based Models, 214 9.2 One Dimensional Current Flow Techniques, 215 9.3 3D Volume Filament (VFI) Skin-Effect Model, 227 9.4 Comparisons of Different Skin-Effect Models, 238 Problems, 244 References, 246 10 PEEC Models for Dielectrics 249 10.1 Electrical Models for Dielectric Materials, 249 10.2 Circuit Oriented Models for Dispersive Dielectrics, 254 10.3 Multi-Pole Debye Model, 257 10.4 Including Dielectric Models in PEEC Solutions, 260 10.5 Example for Impact of Dielectric Properties in the Time Domain, 276 Problems, 281 References, 281 11 PEEC Models for Magnetic Material 285 11.1 Inclusion of Problems with Magnetic Materials, 285 11.2 Model for Magnetic Bodies by Using a Magnetic Scalar Potential and Magnetic Charge Formulation, 292 11.3 PEEC Formulation Including Magnetic Bodies, 295 11.4 Surface Models for Magnetic and Dielectric Material Solutions in PEEC, 300 Problems, 307 References, 308 12 Incident and Radiated Field Models 309 12.1 External Incident Field Applied to PEEC Model, 310 12.2 Far-Field Radiation Models by Using Sensors, 312 12.3 Direct Far-Field Radiation Computation, 318 Problems, 322 References, 322 13 Stability and Passivity of PEEC Models 325 13.1 Fundamental Stability and Passivity Concepts, 327 13.2 Analysis of Properties of PEEC Circuits, 332 13.3 Observability and Controllability of PEEC Circuits, 334 13.4 Passivity Assessment of Solution, 337 13.5 Solver Based Stability and Passivity Enhancement Techniques, 342 13.6 Time Domain Solver Issues for Stability and Passivity, 359 Acknowledgment, 364 Problems, 364 References, 365 A Table of Units 369 A.1 Collection of Variables and Constants for Different Applications, 369 B Modified Nodal Analysis Stamps 373 B.1 Modified Nodal Analysis Matrix Stamps, 373 B.2 Controlled Source Stamps, 380 References, 382 C Computation of Partial Inductances 383 C.1 Partial Inductance Formulas for Orthogonal Geometries, 385 C.2 Partial inductance formulas for nonorthogonal geometries, 398 References, 407 D Computation of Partial Coefficients of Potential 409 D.1 Partial Potential Coefficients for Orthogonal Geometries, 410 D.2 Partial Potential Coefficient Formulas for Nonorthogonal Geometries, 418 References, 421 E Auxiliary Techniques for Partial Element Computations 423 E.1 Multi-function Partial Element Integration, 423 Subdivisions for Nonself-Partial Elements, 428 References, 429 INDEX 431

Read more less

Book SynopsisPraise for the first edition: This excellent text will be useful to every system engineer (SE) regardless of the domain.It covers ALL relevant SE material and does so in a very clear, methodical fashion.The breadth and depth of the author''s presentation of SE principles and practices is outstanding.Philip Allen This textbook presents a comprehensive, step-by-step guide to System Engineering analysis, design, and development via an integrated set of concepts, principles, practices, and methodologies. The methods presented in this text apply to any type of human system -- small, medium, and large organizational systems and system development projects delivering engineered systems or services across multiple business sectors such as medical, transportation, financial, educational, governmental, aerospace and defense, utilities, political, and charity, among others. Provides a common focal point for bridging the gap between and unifying SyTable of ContentsForeword xv Preface to The Second Edition xvii About The Companion Website xxi Introduction—How to Use This Text xxiii 1 Systems Engineering and Systems Engineering 1 1.1 Definitions of Key Terms 2 1.2 Approach to this Chapter 2 1.3 What is a System? 3 1.4 Learning to Recognize Types of Systems 7 1.5 What is SE? 8 1.6 System Versus Systems Engineering 12 1.7 SE: Historical Notes 13 1.8 Systems Thinking and SE 13 1.9 Chapter Summary 15 1.10 Chapter Exercises 15 1.11 References 16 2 The Evolving State of SE Practice-Challenges and Opportunities 17 2.1 Definitions of Key Terms 19 2.2 Approach to this Chapter 20 2.3 The State of SE and System Development Performance 20 2.4 Understanding the Problem: Root Cause Analysis 24 2.5 Industry Government Academic Professional and Standards Organizations Solutions 27 2.6 Defining the Problem 32 2.7 Engineering Education Challenges and Opportunities 42 2.8 Chapter Summary 43 2.9 Chapter Exercises 46 2.10 References 46 Part I System Engineering and Analysis Concepts 49 3 System Attributes Properties and Characteristics 51 3.1 Definition of Key Terms 51 3.2 Analytical Representation of a System 53 3.3 System Stakeholders: User and End User Roles 55 3.4 System Attributes 56 3.5 System Properties 56 3.6 System Characteristics 60 3.7 The System’s State of Equilibrium and the Balance of Power 61 3.8 System/Product Life Cycle Concepts 64 3.9 System Acceptability: Challenges for Achieving Success 71 3.10 Chapter Summary 74 3.11 Chapter Exercises 74 3.12 References 75 4 User Enterprise Roles Missions and System Applications 76 4.1 Definitions of Key Terms 76 4.2 Approach to this Chapter 77 4.3 User Roles and Missions 78 4.4 Understanding and Defining User Missions 83 4.5 Understanding the User’s Problem Opportunity and Solution Spaces 88 4.6 Chapter Summary 97 4.7 Chapter Exercises 97 4.8 References 98 5 User Needs Mission Analysis Use Cases and Scenarios 99 5.1 Definitions of Key Terms 100 5.2 Approach to this Chapter 101 5.3 Commercial/Consumer Product Versus Contract System Development 101 5.4 User Operational Needs Identification 103 5.5 Mission Analysis 107 5.6 Mission Operational Effectiveness 114 5.7 Defining Mission and System UCs and Scenarios 117 5.8 Chapter Summary 127 5.9 Chapter Exercises 127 5.10 References 128 6 System Concepts Formulation and Development 129 6.1 Definitions of Key Terms 129 6.2 Conceptualization of System Operations 131 6.3 The System Operations Model 131 6.4 Formulating and Developing the System Concepts 138 6.5 Chapter Summary 144 6.6 Chapter Exercises 145 6.7 References 145 7 System Command and Control (C2) - Phases Modes and States of Operation 147 7.1 Definitions of Key Terms 148 7.2 Approach to this Chapter 149 7.3 System Phases of Operation 150 7.4 Introduction to System Modes and States 151 7.5 Enterprise Perspective—Engineered System States 154 7.6 Engineering Perspective—Modes and States 157 7.7 Applying Phases Modes and States of Operation 168 7.8 Modes and States Constraints 169 7.9 Chapter Summary 172 7.10 Chapter Exercises 172 7.11 References 173 8 System Levels of Abstraction Semantics and Elements 174 8.1 Definitions of Key Terms 174 8.2 Establishing and Bounding the System’s Context 175 8.3 System Levels of Abstraction and Semantics 176 8.4 System Decomposition Versus Integration Entity Relationships 181 8.5 Logical–Physical Entity Relationship (ER) Concepts 183 8.6 Architectural System Element Concepts 186 8.7 Chapter Summary 196 8.8 Chapter Exercises 196 8.9 References 197 9 Architectural Frameworks of the SOI and Its Operating Environment 198 9.1 Definitions of Key Terms 198 9.2 Approach to this Chapter 199 9.3 Introduction to the SOI Architecture 199 9.4 Understanding the OE Architecture 201 9.5 Other Architectural Frameworks 209 9.6 Understanding The System Threat Environment 209 9.7 SOI Interfaces 211 9.8 Chapter Summary 218 9.9 Chapter Exercises 218 9.10 References 218 10 Modeling Mission System and Enabling System Operations 219 10.1 Definitions of Key Terms 219 10.2 Approach to this Chapter 219 10.3 The System Behavioral Response Model 220 10.4 System Command & Control (C2) Interaction Constructs 221 10.5 Modeling System Control Flow and Data Flow Operations 225 10.6 Modeling Mission System and Enabling System Operations 230 10.7 Modeling an Operational Capability 235 10.8 Nested Operational Cycles 241 10.9 Model-Based Systems Engineering (MBSE) 241 10.10 Chapter Summary 243 10.11 Chapter Exercises 243 10.12 References 243 11 Analytical Problem-Solving and Solution Development Synthesis 245 11.1 Definitions of Key Terms 245 11.2 Part I: System Engineering and Analysis Concepts Synthesis 245 11.3 Shifting to a New Systems Engineering Paradigm 246 11.4 The Four Domain Solutions Methodology 248 11.5 Chapter Summary 251 11.6 References 254 Part II System Engineering and Development Practices 255 12 Introduction to System Development Strategies 257 12.1 Definitions of Key Terms 258 12.2 Approach to this Chapter 259 12.3 System Development Workflow Strategy 260 12.4 Multi-Level Systems Design and Development Strategy 262 12.5 Chapter Summary 268 12.6 Chapter Exercises 268 12.7 References 269 13 System Verification and Validation (V&V) Strategy 270 13.1 Definitions of Key Terms 270 13.2 Approach to this Chapter 272 13.3 System V&V Concepts Overview 275 13.4 System Verification Practices 278 13.5 System Validation Practices 283 13.6 Applying V&V to the System Development Workflow Processes 285 13.7 Independent Verification & Validation (IV&V) 290 13.8 Chapter Summary 291 13.9 Chapter Exercises 292 13.10 References 292 14 The Wasson Systems Engineering Process 293 14.1 Definitions of Key Terms 293 14.2 Approach to this Chapter 294 14.3 Evolution of SE Processes 294 14.4 The Wasson SE Process Model 296 14.5 Wasson SE Process Model Characteristics 306 14.6 Application of the Wasson SE Process Model 310 14.7 The Strength of the Wasson SE Process Model 311 14.8 Chapter Summary 311 14.9 Chapter Exercises 312 14.10 References 312 15 System Development Process Models 313 15.1 Definitions of Key Terms 314 15.2 Introduction to the System Development Models 315 15.3 Waterfall Development Strategy and Model 316 15.4 “V” System Development Strategy and Model 318 15.5 Spiral Development Strategy and Model 322 15.6 Iterative and Incremental Development Model 324 15.7 Evolutionary Development Strategy and Model 325 15.8 Agile Development Strategy and Model 326 15.9 Selection of System Versus Component Development Models 341 15.10 Chapter Summary 342 15.11 Chapter Exercises 342 15.12 References 342 16 System Configuration Identification and Component Selection Strategy 344 16.1 Definitions of Key Terms 345 16.2 Items: Building Blocks of Systems 347 16.3 Understanding Configuration Identification Semantics 347 16.4 Configuration Item (CI) Implementation 352 16.5 Developmental Configuration Baselines 355 16.6 Component Selection and Development 358 16.7 Vendor Product Semantics 359 16.8 Component Selection Methodology 360 16.9 Driving Issues that Influence COTS/NDI Selection 361 16.10 Chapter Summary 363 16.11 Chapter Exercises 363 16.12 References 364 17 System Documentation Strategy 365 17.1 Definitions of Key Terms 366 17.2 Quality System and Engineering Data Records 366 17.3 System Design and Development Data 367 17.4 Data Accession List (DAL) and Data Criteria List (DCL) 368 17.5 SE and Development Documentation Sequencing 369 17.6 Documentation Levels of Formality 370 17.7 Export Control of Sensitive Data and Technology 371 17.8 System Documentation Issues 373 17.9 Chapter Summary 374 17.10 Chapter Exercises 374 17.11 References 375 18 Technical Reviews Strategy 376 18.1 Definitions of Key Terms 376 18.2 Approach to this Chapter 378 18.3 Technical Reviews Overview 378 18.4 Conduct of Technical Reviews 380 18.5 Contract Review Requirements 381 18.6 In-Process Reviews (IPRs) 383 18.7 Contract Technical Reviews 384 18.8 Chapter Summary 395 18.9 Chapter Exercises 395 18.10 References 396 19 System Specification Concepts 397 19.1 Definitions of Key Terms 397 19.2 What is a Specification? 398 19.3 Attributes of a Well-Defined Specification 400 19.4 Types of Specifications 403 19.5 Key Elements of a Specification 405 19.6 Specification Requirements 408 19.7 Chapter Summary 413 19.8 Chapter Exercises 413 19.9 References 414 20 Specification Development Approaches 415 20.1 Definitions of Key Terms 415 20.2 Approach to this Chapter 416 20.3 Introduction to Specification Development 416 20.4 Specification Development Approaches 420 20.5 Special Topics 426 20.6 Specification Reviews 426 20.7 Chapter Summary 428 20.8 Chapter Exercises 428 20.9 Reference 428 21 Requirements Derivation Allocation Flow Down and Traceability 429 21.1 Definitions of Key Terms 429 21.2 Approach to this Chapter 430 21.3 Introduction to Requirements Derivation Allocation Flowdown & Traceability 430 21.4 Requirements Derivation Methods 436 21.5 Requirements Derivation and Allocation Across Entity Boundaries 436 21.6 Requirements Allocation 438 21.7 Requirements Traceability 439 21.8 Technical Performance Measures (TPMs) 442 21.9 Chapter Summary 445 21.10 Chapter Exercises 445 21.11 References 445 22 Requirements Statement Development 446 22.1 Definition of Key Terms 446 22.2 Approach to this Chapter 446 22.3 Introduction to Requirements Statement Development 447 22.4 Preparing the Requirement Statement 449 22.5 Selection of Requirement Verification Methods 453 22.6 Requirements Traceability and Verification Tools 456 22.7 Requirements Statement Development Guidelines 459 22.8 When Does a Requirement Become “Official”? 462 22.9 Chapter Summary 462 22.10 Chapter Exercises 464 22.11 References 464 23 Specification Analysis 465 23.1 Definition of Key Terms 465 23.2 Analyzing Existing Specifications 466 23.3 Specification Assessment Checklist 467 23.4 Specification Analysis Methods 471 23.5 Specification Deficiencies Checklist 472 23.6 Resolution of Specification COI/CTI Issues 476 23.7 Requirements Compliance 477 23.8 Chapter Summary 478 23.9 Chapter Exercises 478 23.10 References 479 24 User-Centered System Design (UCSD) 480 24.1 Definitions of Key Terms 481 24.2 Approach to this Chapter 483 24.3 Introduction to UCSD 484 24.4 Understanding Human Factors (HF) and Ergonomics 493 24.5 Situational Assessment: Areas of Concern 509 24.6 Complex System Development 512 24.7 SE HF and Ergonomics Actions 512 24.8 Chapter Summary 514 24.9 Chapter Exercises 515 24.10 References 515 25 Engineering Standards of Units Coordinate Systems and Conventions 518 25.1 Definitions of Key Terms 518 25.2 Approach to this Chapter 519 25.3 Engineering Standards 520 25.4 Standards for Units Weights and Measures 520 25.5 Coordinate Reference Systems 522 25.6 Defining a System’s Free Body Dynamics 534 25.7 Applying Engineering Standards and Conventions 538 25.8 Engineering Standards and Conventions Lessons Learned 538 25.9 Chapter Summary 540 25.10 Chapter Exercises 540 25.11 References 541 26 System and Entity Architecture Development 542 26.1 Definitions of Key Terms 542 26.2 Approach to this Chapter 543 26.3 Introduction to System Architecture Development 544 26.4 Development of System Architectures 554 26.5 Advanced System Architecture Topics 559 26.6 Chapter Summary 572 26.7 Chapter Exercises 573 26.8 References 574 27 System Interface Definition Analysis Design and Control 575 27.1 Definitions of Key Terms 576 27.2 Approach to this Chapter 576 27.3 Interface Ownership Work Products and Control Concepts 577 27.4 Interface Definition Methodology 583 27.5 Interface Design—Advanced Topics 588 27.6 Interface Definition and Control Challenges and Solutions 592 27.7 Chapter Summary 597 27.8 Chapter Exercises 598 27.9 References 598 28 System Integration Test and Evaluation (SITE) 599 28.1 Definitions of Key Terms 599 28.2 SITE Fundamentals 601 28.3 Key Elements of Site 604 28.4 Planning for Site 610 28.5 Establishing the Test Organization 612 28.6 Developing Test Cases (TCs) and Acceptance Test Procedures (ATPs) 613 28.7 Performing SITE Tasks 614 28.8 Common Integration and Test Challenges and Issues 617 28.9 Chapter Summary 621 28.10 Chapter Exercises 621 28.11 References 622 29 System Deployment OM&S Retirement and Disposal 623 29.1 Definitions of Key Terms 624 29.2 Approach to this Chapter 625 29.3 System Deployment Operations 626 29.4 System Operation Maintenance & Sustainment (OM&S) 638 29.5 System Retirement (Phase-Out) Operations 645 29.6 System Disposal Operations 646 29.7 Chapter Summary 646 29.8 Chapter Exercises 646 29.9 References 647 Part III Analytical Decision Support Practices 649 30 Introduction to Analytical Decision Support 651 30.1 Definitions of Key Terms 651 30.2 What is Analytical Decision Support? 652 30.3 Attributes of Technical Decisions 652 30.4 Types of Engineering Analyses 654 30.5 System Performance Analysis and Evaluation 654 30.6 Statistical Influences on System Design 659 30.7 Chapter Summary 664 30.8 General Exercises 665 30.9 References 665 31 System Performance Analysis Budgets and Safety Margins 666 31.1 Definitions of Key Terms 667 31.2 Performance “Design-To” Budgets and Safety Margins 667 31.3 Analyzing System Performance 672 31.4 Real-Time Control and Frame-Based Systems 679 31.5 System Performance Optimization 679 31.6 System Analysis Reporting 680 31.7 Chapter Summary 680 31.8 Chapter Exercises 680 31.9 References 681 32 Trade Study Analysis of Alternatives (AoA) 682 32.1 Definitions of Key Terms 682 32.2 Introduction to Multivariate Analysis of Alternatives (AoA) 683 32.3 Chartering a Trade Study 688 32.4 Establishing the Trade Study Methodology 689 32.5 Trade Study Quantitative Approaches 690 32.6 Trade Study Utility or Scoring Functions 695 32.7 Sensitivity Analysis 696 32.8 Trade Study Reports (TSRs) 696 32.9 Trade Study Decision 697 32.10 Trade Study Risk Areas 699 32.11 Trade Study Lessons Learned 701 32.12 Chapter Summary 701 32.13 Chapter Exercises 701 32.14 References 701 33 System Modeling and Simulation (M&S) 703 33.1 Definitions of Key Terms 704 33.2 Technical Decision-Making Aids 705 33.3 Simulation-Based Models 705 33.4 Application Examples of M&S 709 33.5 M&S Challenges and Issues 717 33.6 Chapter Summary 719 33.7 Chapter Exercises 719 33.8 References 720 34 System Reliability Maintainability and Availability (RMA) 721 34.1 Definitions of Key Terms 722 34.2 Approach to this Chapter 723 34.3 System Reliability 725 34.4 Understanding System Maintainability 768 34.5 System Availability 779 34.6 Optimizing RMA Trade-Offs 781 34.7 Reliability-Centered Maintenance (RCM) 783 34.8 System RMA Challenges 788 34.9 Chapter Summary 789 34.10 Chapter Exercises 789 34.11 References 790 Epilog 792 Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations 795 Appendix B INCOSE Handbook Traceability 801 Appendix C System Modeling Language (SysML™) Constructs 811 Index 821

Read more less

Book SynopsisAn introduction to technical details related to the Physical Layer of the LTE standard with MATLAB(R) The LTE (Long Term Evolution) and LTE-Advanced are among the latest mobile communications standards, designed to realize the dream of a truly global, fast, all-IP-based, secure broadband mobile access technology.Table of ContentsPreface xiii List of Abbreviations xvii 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Quick Overview of Wireless Standards 1 1.2 Historical Profile of Data Rates 4 1.3 IMT-Advanced Requirements 4 1.4 3GPP and LTE Standardization 5 1.5 LTE Requirements 5 1.6 Theoretical Strategies 6 1.7 LTE-Enabling Technologies 7 1.8 LTE Physical Layer (PHY) Modeling 9 1.9 LTE (Releases 8 and 9) 11 1.10 LTE-Advanced (Release 10) 11 1.11 MATLAB® and Wireless System Design 11 1.12 Organization of This Book 11 References 12 2 Overview of the LTE Physical Layer 13 2.1 Air Interface 13 2.2 Frequency Bands 14 2.3 Unicast and Multicast Services 14 2.4 Allocation of Bandwidth 16 2.5 Time Framing 17 2.6 Time–Frequency Representation 17 2.7 OFDM Multicarrier Transmission 20 2.8 Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiplexing 23 2.9 Resource Grid Content 24 2.10 Physical Channels 25 2.11 Physical Signals 31 2.12 Downlink Frame Structures 34 2.13 Uplink Frame Structures 35 2.14 MIMO 35 2.15 MIMO Modes 40 2.16 PHY Processing 41 2.17 Downlink Processing 41 2.18 Uplink Processing 43 2.19 Chapter Summary 45 References 46 3 MATLAB® for Communications System Design 47 3.1 System Development Workflow 47 3.2 Challenges and Capabilities 48 3.3 Focus 49 3.4 Approach 49 3.5 PHY Models in MATLAB 49 3.6 MATLAB 49 3.7 MATLAB Toolboxes 50 3.8 Simulink 51 3.9 Modeling and Simulation 52 3.10 Prototyping and Implementation 53 3.11 Introduction to System Objects 54 3.12 MATLAB Channel Coding Examples 60 3.13 Chapter Summary 68 References 69 4 Modulation and Coding 71 4.1 Modulation Schemes of LTE 72 4.2 Bit-Level Scrambling 79 4.3 Channel Coding 85 4.4 Turbo Coding 85 4.5 Early-Termination Mechanism 93 4.6 Rate Matching 99 4.7 Codeblock Segmentation 105 4.8 LTE Transport-Channel Processing 107 4.9 Chapter Summary 112 References 113 5 OFDM 115 5.1 Channel Modeling 115 Examples 117 5.2 Scope 121 5.3 Workflow 121 5.4 OFDM and Multipath Fading 122 5.5 OFDM and Channel-Response Estimation 123 5.6 Frequency-Domain Equalization 124 5.7 LTE Resource Grid 124 5.8 Configuring the Resource Grid 125 5.9 Generating Reference Signals 130 5.10 Resource Element Mapping 132 5.11 OFDM Signal Generation 136 5.12 Channel Modeling 137 5.13 OFDM Receiver 140 5.14 Resource Element Demapping 141 5.15 Channel Estimation 143 5.16 Equalizer Gain Computation 145 5.17 Visualizing the Channel 146 5.18 Downlink Transmission Mode 1 147 5.19 Chapter Summary 164 References 165 6 MIMO 167 6.1 Definition of MIMO 167 6.2 Motivation for MIMO 168 6.3 Types of MIMO 168 6.4 Scope of MIMO Coverage 170 6.5 MIMO Channels 170 Implementation 171 6.6 Common MIMO Features 178 6.7 Specific MIMO Features 197 6.8 Chapter Summary 260 References 262 7 Link Adaptation 263 7.1 System Model 264 7.2 Link Adaptation in LTE 265 7.3 MATLAB® Examples 266 7.4 Link Adaptations between Subframes 275 7.5 Adaptive Modulation 277 7.6 Adaptive Modulation and Coding Rate 283 7.7 Adaptive Precoding 287 7.8 Adaptive MIMO 291 7.9 Downlink Control Information 294 7.10 Chapter Summary 302 References 303 8 System-Level Specification 305 8.1 System Model 306 8.2 System Model in MATLAB 315 8.3 Quantitative Assessments 316 8.4 Throughput Analysis 325 8.5 System Model in Simulink 326 8.6 Qualitative Assessment 349 8.7 Chapter Summary 351 References 352 9 Simulation 353 9.1 Speeding Up Simulations in MATLAB 353 9.2 Workflow 354 9.3 Case Study: LTE PDCCH Processing 355 9.4 Baseline Algorithm 356 9.5 MATLAB Code Profiling 358 9.6 MATLAB Code Optimizations 360 9.7 Using Acceleration Features 383 9.8 Using a Simulink Model 387 9.9 GPU Processing 399 9.10 Case Study: Turbo Coders on GPU 406 9.11 Chapter Summary 419 10 Prototyping as C/C++ Code 421 10.1 Use Cases 422 10.2 Motivations 422 10.3 Requirements 422 10.4 MATLAB Code Considerations 423 10.5 How to Generate Code 423 10.6 Structure of the Generated C Code 429 10.7 Supported MATLAB Subset 432 10.8 Complex Numbers and Native C Types 436 10.9 Support for System Toolboxes 438 10.10 Support for Fixed-Point Data 444 10.11 Support for Variable-Sized Data 447 10.12 Integration with Existing C/C++ Code 458 10.13 Chapter Summary 471 References 471 11 Summary 473 11.1 Modeling 473 11.2 Simulation 476 11.3 Directions for Future Work 477 11.4 Concluding Remarks 480 Index 483

Read more less

Book SynopsisEmerging Nanoelectronic Devices focuses on the future direction of semiconductor and emerging nanoscale device technology.Table of ContentsPreface xix List of Contributors xxi Acronyms xxiii PART ONE INTRODUCTION 1 1 The Nanoelectronics Roadmap 3 James Hutchby 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Technology Scaling: Impact and Issues 4 1.3 Technology Scaling: Scaling Limits of Charge-based Devices 4 1.4 The International Technology Roadmap for Semiconductors 6 1.5 ITRS Emerging Research Devices International Technology Working Group 7 1.6 Guiding Performance Criteria 8 1.7 Selection of Nanodevices as Technology Entries 13 1.8 Perspectives 13 References 14 2 What Constitutes a Nanoswitch? A Perspective 15 Supriyo Datta, Vinh Quang Diep, and Behtash Behin-Aein 2.1 The Search for a Better Switch 15 2.2 Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor Switch: Why it Shows Gain 17 2.3 Switch Based on Magnetic Tunnel Junctions: Would it Show Gain? 20 2.4 Giant Spin Hall Effect: A Route to Gain 23 2.5 Other Possibilities for Switches with Gain 27 2.6 What do Alternative Switches Have to Offer? 29 2.7 Perspective 32 2.8 Summary 32 Acknowledgments 32 References 33 PART TWO NANOELECTRONIC MEMORIES 35 3 Memory Technologies: Status and Perspectives 37 Victor V. Zhirnov and Matthew J. Marinella 3.1 Introduction: Baseline Memory Technologies 37 3.2 Essential Physics of Charge-based Memory 38 3.3 Dynamic Random Access Memory 39 3.4 Flash Memory 43 3.5 Static Random Access Memory 49 3.6 Summary and Perspective 52 Appendix: Memory Array Interconnects 52 Acknowledgments 54 References 54 4 Spin Transfer Torque Random Access Memory 56 Jian-Ping Wang, Mahdi Jamali, Angeline Klemm, and Hao Meng 4.1 Chapter Overview 56 4.2 Spin Transfer Torque 57 4.3 STT-RAM Operation 60 4.4 STT-RAM with Perpendicular Anisotropy 63 4.5 Stack and Material Engineering for Jc Reduction 66 4.6 Ultra-Fast Switching of MTJs 71 4.7 Spin–Orbit Torques for Memory Application 72 4.8 Current Demonstrations for STT-RAM 73 4.9 Summary and Perspectives 73 References 74 5 Phase Change Memory 78 Rakesh Jeyasingh, Ethan C. Ahn, S. Burc Eryilmaz, Scott Fong, and H.-S. Philip Wong 5.1 Introduction 78 5.2 Device Operation 79 5.3 Material Properties 80 5.4 Device and Material Scaling to the Nanometer Size 88 5.5 Multi-Bit Operation and 3D Integration 93 5.6 Applications 97 5.7 Future Outlook 100 5.8 Summary 103 Acknowledgments 103 References 103 6 Ferroelectric FET Memory 110 Ken Takeuchi and An Chen 6.1 Introduction 110 6.2 Ferroelectric FET for Flash Memory Application 111 6.3 Ferroelectric FET for SRAM Application 115 6.4 System Consideration: SSD System with Fe-NAND Flash Memory 118 6.5 Perspectives and Summary 119 References 120 7 Nano-Electro-Mechanical (NEM) Memory Devices 123 Adrian M. Ionescu 7.1 Introduction and Rationale for a Memory Based on NEM Switch 123 7.2 NEM Relay and Capacitor Memories 126 7.3 NEM-FET Memory 130 7.4 Carbon-based NEM Memories 132 7.5 Opportunities and Challenges for NEM Memories 133 References 135 8 Redox-based Resistive Memory 137 Stephan Menzel, Eike Linn, and Rainer Waser 8.1 Introduction 137 8.2 Physical Fundamentals of Redox Memories 139 8.3 Electrochemical Metallization Memory Cells 144 8.4 Valence Change Memory Cells 149 8.5 Performance 154 8.6 Summary 158 References 158 9 Electronic Effect Resistive Switching Memories 162 An Chen 9.1 Introduction 162 9.2 Charge Injection and Trapping 164 9.3 Mott Transition 167 9.4 Ferroelectric Resistive Switching 170 9.5 Perspectives 173 9.6 Summary 176 References 176 10 Macromolecular Memory 181 Benjamin F. Bory and Stefan C.J. Meskers 10.1 Chapter Overview 181 10.2 Macromolecules 181 10.3 Elementary Physical Chemistry of Macromolecular Memory 184 10.4 Classes of Macromolecular Memory Materials and Their Performance 187 10.5 Perspectives 190 10.6 Summary 190 Acknowledgments 190 References 191 11 Molecular Transistors 194 Mark A. Reed, Hyunwook Song, and Takhee Lee 11.1 Introduction 194 11.2 Experimental Approaches 194 11.3 Molecular Transistors 213 11.4 Molecular Design 218 11.5 Perspectives 222 Acknowledgments 223 References 223 12 Memory Select Devices 227 An Chen 12.1 Introduction 227 12.2 Crossbar Array and Memory Select Devices 227 12.3 Memory Select Device Options 230 12.4 Challenges of Memory Select Devices 241 12.5 Summary 242 References 242 13 Emerging Memory Devices: Assessment and Benchmarking 246 Matthew J. Marinella and Victor V. Zhirnov 13.1 Introduction 246 13.2 Common Emerging Memory Terminology and Metrics 248 13.3 Redox RAM 249 13.4 Emerging Ferroelectric Memories 254 13.5 Mott Memory 258 13.6 Macromolecular Memory 259 13.7 Carbon-based Resistive Switching Memory 260 13.8 Molecular Memory 262 13.9 Assessment and Benchmarking 263 13.10 Summary and Conclusions 271 Acknowledgments 271 References 271 PART THREE NANOELECTRONIC LOGIC AND INFORMATION PROCESSING 277 14 Re-Invention of FET 279 Toshiro Hiramoto 14.1 Introduction 279 14.2 Historical and Future Trend of MOSFETs 279 14.3 Near-term Solutions 282 14.4 Long-term Solutions 285 14.5 Summary 295 References 296 15 Graphene Electronics 298 Frank Schwierz 15.1 Introduction 298 15.2 Properties of Graphene 300 15.3 Graphene MOSFETs for Mainstream Logic and RF Applications 303 15.4 Graphene MOSFETs for Nonmainstream Applications 308 15.5 Graphene NonMOSFET Transistors 309 15.6 Perspectives 310 Acknowledgment 311 References 311 16 Carbon Nanotube Electronics 315 Aaron D. Franklin 16.1 Carbon Nanotubes – The Ideal Transistor Channel 315 16.2 Operation of the CNTFET 319 16.3 Important Aspects of CNTFETs 320 16.4 Scaling CNTFETs to the Sub-10 Nanometer Regime 324 16.5 Material Considerations 327 16.6 Perspective 329 16.7 Conclusion 331 References 331 17 Spintronics 336 Alexander Khitun 17.1 Introduction 336 17.2 Spin Transistors 337 17.3 Magnetic Logic Circuits 348 17.4 Summary 364 References 365 18 NEMS Switch Technology 370 Louis Hutin and Tsu-Jae King Liu 18.1 Electromechanical Switches for Digital Logic 370 18.2 Actuation Mechanisms 373 18.3 Electrostatic Switch Designs 379 18.4 Reliability and Scalability 383 References 386 19 Atomic Switch 390 Tsuyoshi Hasegawa and Masakazu Aono 19.1 Chapter Overview 390 19.2 Historical Background of the Atomic Switch 390 19.3 Fundamentals of Atomic Switches 391 19.4 Various Atomic Switches 395 19.5 Perspectives 401 References 402 20 ITRS Assessment and Benchmarking of Emerging Logic Devices 405 Shamik Das 20.1 Introduction 405 20.2 Overview of the ITRS Roadmap for Emerging Research Logic Devices 406 20.3 Recent Results for Selected Emerging Devices 407 20.4 Perspective 412 20.5 Summary 413 Acknowledgments 413 References 413 PART FOUR CONCEPTS FOR EMERGING ARCHITECTURES 417 21 Nanomagnet Logic: A Magnetic Implementation of Quantum-dot Cellular Automata 419 Michael T. Niemier, György Csaba, and Wolfgang Porod 21.1 Introduction 419 21.2 Technology Background 420 21.3 NML Circuit Design Based on Conventional, Boolean Logic Gates 423 21.4 Alternative Circuit Design Techniques and Architectures 432 21.5 Retrospective, Future Challenges, and Future Research Directions 437 References 439 22 Explorations in Morphic Architectures 443 Tetsuya Asai and Ferdinand Peper 22.1 Introduction 443 22.2 Neuromorphic Architectures 443 22.3 Cellular Automata Architectures 447 22.4 Taxonomy of Computational Ability of Architectures 450 22.5 Summary 452 References 452 23 Design Considerations for a Computational Architecture of Human Cognition 456 Narayan Srinivasa 23.1 Introduction 456 23.2 Features of Biological Computation 457 23.3 Evolution of Behavior as a Basis for Cognitive Architecture Design 460 23.4 Considerations for a Cognitive Architecture 460 23.5 Emergent Cognition 463 23.6 Perspectives 463 References 464 24 Alternative Architectures for NonBoolean Information Processing Systems 467 Yan Fang, Steven P. Levitan, Donald M. Chiarulli, and Denver H. Dash 24.1 Introduction 467 24.2 Hierarchical Associative Memory Models 475 24.3 N-Tree Model 484 24.4 Summary and Conclusion 494 Acknowledgments 496 References 496 25 Storage Class Memory 498 Geoffrey W. Burr and Paul Franzon 25.1 Introduction 498 25.2 Traditional Storage: HDD and Flash Solid-state Drives 499 25.3 What is Storage Class Memory? 499 25.4 Target Specifications for SCM 501 25.5 Device Candidates for SCM 502 25.6 Architectural Issues in SCM 504 25.7 Conclusions 508 References 509 PART FIVE SUMMARY, CONCLUSIONS, AND OUTLOOK FOR NANOELECTRONIC DEVICES 511 26 Outlook for Nanoelectronic Devices 513 An Chen, James Hutchby, Victor V. Zhirnov, and George Bourianoff 26.1 Introduction 513 26.2 Quantitative Logic Benchmarking for Beyond CMOS Technologies 514 26.3 Survey-based Critical Assessment of Emerging Devices 518 26.4 Retrospective Assessment of ERD Tracked Technologies 526 References 528 Index 529

Read more less

Book SynopsisReaders are guided step by step through numerous specific problems and challenges, covering all aspects of electrostatics with an emphasis on numerical procedures. The author focuses on practical examples, derives mathematical equations, and addresses common issues with algorithms.Trade Review“The author well organized fundamental theories on electrostatics and also presented numerical examples, in which typical numerical methods, e.g., finite difference method, finite element method, and method of moment, are introduced and demonstrated by Matlab.” (Zentralblatt MATH, 1 October 2014)Table of ContentsPreface xi Introduction xiii Acknowledgments xv 1 A Review of Basic Electrostatics 1 1.1 Charge, Force, and the Electric Field 1 1.2 Electric Flux Density and Gauss’s Law 5 1.3 Conductors 7 1.4 Potential, Gradient, and Capacitance 10 1.5 Energy in the Electric Field 16 1.6 Poisson’s and Laplace’s Equations 18 1.7 Dielectric Interfaces 20 1.8 Electric Dipoles 24 1.9 The Case for Approximate Numerical Analysis 27 Problems 29 2 The Uses of Electrostatics 33 2.1 Basic Circuit Theory 33 2.2 Radio Frequency Transmission Lines 41 2.3 Vacuum Tubes and Cathode Ray Tubes 44 2.4 Field Emission and the Scanning Electron Microscope 47 2.5 Electrostatic Force Devices 48 2.6 Gas Discharges and Lighting Devices 49 3 Introduction to the Method of Moments Technique for Electrostatics 51 3.1 Fundamental Equations 51 3.2 A Working Equation Set 55 3.3 The Single-Point Approximation for Off-Diagonal Terms 56 3.4 Exact Solutions for the Diagonal Term and In-Plane Terms 57 3.5 Approximating Li,j 61 Problems 64 4 Examples using the Method of Moments 67 4.1 A First Modeling Program 67 4.2 Input Data File Preparation for the First Modeling Program 68 4.3 Processing the Input Data 71 4.4 Generating the Li,j Array 73 4.5 Solving the System and Examining Some Results 73 4.6 Limits of Resolution 76 4.7 Voltages and Fields 78 4.8 Varying the Geometry 82 Problems 87 5 Symmetries, Images and Dielectrics 89 5.1 Symmetries 89 5.2 Images 90 5.3 Multiple Images and the Symmetric Stripline 95 5.4 Dielectric Interfaces 102 5.5 Two-Dimensional Cross Sections of Uniform Three-Dimensional Structures 108 5.6 Charge Profiles and Current Bunching 113 5.7 Cylinder between Two Planes 116 Problems 121 6 Triangles 123 6.1 Introduction to Triangular Cells 123 6.2 Right Triangles 124 6.3 Calculating Li,i (Self ) Coefficients 125 6.4 Calculating Li,j for i ≠ j 127 6.5 Basic Meshing and Data Formats for Triangular Cell MoM Programs 127 6.6 Using MATLAB to Generate Triangular Meshings 135 6.7 Calculating Voltages 139 6.8 Calculating the Electric Field 141 6.9 Three-Dimensional Structures 143 6.10 Charge Profiles 152 Problems 156 7 Summary and Overview 159 7.1 Where We Were, Where We’re Going 159 8 The Finite Difference Method 163 8.1 Introduction and a Simple Example 163 8.2 Setting Up and Solving a Basic Problem 165 8.3 The Gauss–Seidel (Relaxation) Solution Technique 172 8.4 Charge, Gauss’s Law, and Resolution 175 8.5 Voltages and Fields 177 8.6 Stored Energy and Capacitance 178 Problems 181 9 Refining the Finite Difference Method 183 9.1 Refined Grids 183 9.2 Arbitrary Conductor Shapes 189 9.3 Mixed Dielectric Regions and a New Derivation of the Finite Difference Equation 194 9.4 Example: Structure with a Dielectric Interface 195 9.5 Axisymmetric Cylindrical Coordinates 196 9.6 Symmetry Boundary Condition 205 9.7 Duality, and Upper and Lower Bounds to Solutions for Transmission Lines 207 9.8 Extrapolation 214 9.9 Three-Dimensional Grids 217 Problems 223 10 Multielectrode Systems 227 10.1 Multielectrode Structures 227 10.2 Utilizing Superposition 229 10.3 Utilizing Symmetry 230 10.4 Circuital Relations and a Caveat 230 10.5 Floating Electrodes 232 Problems 234 11 Probabilistic Potential Theory 237 11.1 Random Walks and the Diffusion Equation 237 11.2 Voltage at a Point from Random Walks 239 11.3 Diffusion 246 11.4 Variable-Step-Size Random Walks 249 11.5 Three-Dimensional Structures 260 Problems 261 12 The Finite Element Method (FEM) 265 12.1 Introduction 265 12.2 Solving Laplace’s Equation by Minimizing Stored Energy 266 12.3 A Simple One-Dimensional Example 267 12.4 A Very Simple Finite Element Approximation 271 12.5 Arbitrary Number of Lines Approximation 274 12.6 Mixed Dielectrics 278 12.7 A Quadratic Approximation 279 12.8 A Simple Two-Dimensional FEM Program 282 Problems 287 13 Triangles and Two-Dimensional Unstructured Grids 289 13.1 Introduction 289 13.2 Aside: The Area of a Triangle 290 13.3 The Coefficient Matrix 291 13.4 A Simple Example 293 13.5 A Two-Dimensional Triangular Mesh Program 296 Problems 300 14 A Zoning System and Some Examples 303 14.1 General Introduction 303 14.2 Introduction to gmsh 304 14.3 Translating the gmsh.msh File 308 14.4 Running the FEM Analysis 319 14.5 More gmsh Features and Examining the Electric Field 320 14.6 Multiple Electrodes 324 Problems 327 15 Some FEM Topics 329 15.1 Symmetries 329 15.2 A Symmetry Example, Including a Two-Sided Capacitance Estimate 330 15.3 Axisymmetric Structures 337 15.4 The Graded-Potential Boundary Condition 348 15.5 Unbounded Regions 352 15.6 Dielectric Materials 364 Problems 371 16 FEM in Three Dimensions 375 16.1 Creating Three-Dimensional Meshes 375 16.2 The FEM Coefficient Matrix in Three Dimensions 384 16.3 Parsing the gmsh Files and Setting Boundary Conditions 386 16.4 Open Boundaries and Cylinders in Space 392 Problems 396 17 Electrostatic Forces 399 17.1 Introduction 399 17.2 Electron Beam Acceleration and Control 400 17.3 The Electrostatic Relay (Switch) 408 17.4 Electrets and Piezoelectricity: An Overview 414 17.5 Points on a Sphere 415 Problems 419 Appendix Interfacing with Other Languages 423 Index 431

Read more less

Book SynopsisProviding full coverage of the basic principles on the subject, Wide Area Power System Monitoring and Control highlights key technologies for monitoring, protection, and control.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xvii 1 An Introduction On Power System Monitoring 1 1.1 Synchronized Phasor Measurement 2 1.2 Power System Monitoring and Control with Wide-Area Measurements 2 1.3 ICT Architecture Used in Wide-Area Power System Monitoring and Control 4 1.4 Summary 5 References 5 2 Oscillation Dynamics Analysis Based On Phasor Measurements 7 2.1 Oscillation Characteristics in Power Systems 8 2.1.1 Eigenvalue Analysis and Participation Factor 8 2.1.2 Oscillation Characteristics in an Interconnected Power System 9 2.2 An Overview of Oscillation Monitoring Using Phasor Measurements 12 2.2.1 Monitoring of the Japan Power Network 12 2.2.2 Monitoring of the Southeast Asia Power Network 14 2.3 WAMS-Based Interarea Mode Identification 15 2.4 Low-Frequency Oscillation Dynamics 16 2.4.1 Electromechanical Modes Characteristics 16 2.4.2 Oscillation Characteristics Analyses in Southeast Asia Power Network 18 2.5 Summary 24 References 24 3 Small-Signal Stability Assessment 26 3.1 Power System Small-Signal Stability 27 3.2 Oscillation Model Identification Using Phasor Measurements 29 3.2.1 Oscillation Model of the Electromechanical Mode 29 3.2.2 Dominant Mode Identification with Signal Filtering 30 3.3 Small-Signal Stability Assessment of Wide-Area Power System 32 3.3.1 Simulation Study 32 3.3.2 Stability Assessment Based on Phasor Measurements 33 3.3.3 Stability Assessment Based on Frequency Monitoring 38 3.4 Summary 41 References 41 4 Graphical Tools For Stability and Security Assessment 43 4.1 Importance of Graphical Tools in WAMS 43 4.2 Angle–Voltage Deviation Graph 45 4.3 Simulation Results 48 4.3.1 Disturbance in Generation Side 49 4.3.2 Disturbance in Demand Side 50 4.4 Voltage–Frequency Deviation Graph 52 4.4.1 ΔV_ΔF Graph for Contingency Assessment 53 4.4.2 ΔV _ ΔF Graph for Load Shedding Synthesis 56 4.5 Frequency–Angle Deviation Graph 58 4.6 Electromechanical Wave Propagation Graph 60 4.6.1 Wave Propagation 62 4.6.2 Angle Wave and System Configuration 64 4.7 Summary 68 References 68 5 Power System Control: Fundamentals and New Perspectives 70 5.1 Power System Stability and Control 71 5.2 Angle and Voltage Control 73 5.3 Frequency Control 75 5.3.1 Frequency Control Dynamic 77 5.3.2 Operating States and Power Reserves 81 5.4 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition 83 5.5 Challenges, Opportunities, and New Perspectives 88 5.5.1 Application of Advanced Control Methods and Technologies 88 5.5.2 Standards Updating 90 5.5.3 Impacts of Renewable Energy Options 90 5.5.4 RESs Contribution to Regulation Services 92 5.6 Summary 94 References 95 6 Wide-Area Measurement-Based Power System Control Design 96 6.1 Measurement-Based Controller Design 97 6.2 Controller Tuning Using a Vibration Model 98 6.2.1 A Vibration Model Including the Effect of Damping Controllers 98 6.2.2 Tuning Mechanism 101 6.2.3 Simulation Results 102 6.3 Wide-Area Measurement-Based Controller Design 107 6.3.1 Wide-Area Power System Identification 107 6.3.2 Design Procedure 110 6.3.3 Simulation Results 110 6.4 Summary 118 References 118 7 Coordinated Dynamic Stability and Voltage Regulation 119 7.1 Need for AVR–PSS Coordination 120 7.2 A Survey on Recent Achievements 123 7.3 A Robust Simultaneous AVR–PSS Synthesis Approach 126 7.3.1 Control Framework 126 7.3.2 Developed Algorithm 128 7.3.3 Real-Time Implementation 131 7.3.4 Experiment Results 132 7.4 A Wide-Area Measurement-Based Coordination Approach 135 7.4.1 High Penetration of Wind Power 136 7.4.2 Developed Algorithm 138 7.4.3 An Application Example 141 7.4.4 Simulation Results 141 7.5 Intelligent AVR and PSS Coordination Design 149 7.5.1 Fuzzy Logic-Based Coordination System 149 7.5.2 Simulation Results 151 7.6 Summary 155 References 155 8 Wide-Area Measurement-Based Emergency Control 158 8.1 Conventional Load Shedding and New Challenges 159 8.1.1 Load Shedding: Concept and Review 159 8.1.2 Some Key Issues 161 8.2 Need for Monitoring Both Voltage and Frequency 162 8.3 Simultaneous Voltage and Frequency-Based LS 165 8.3.1 Proposed LS Scheme 165 8.3.2 Implementation 167 8.3.3 Case Studies and Simulation Results 168 8.3.4 An Approach for Optimal UFVLS 176 8.3.5 Discussion 177 8.4 Wave Propagation-Based Emergency Control 178 8.4.1 Proposed Control Scheme 178 8.4.2 Simulation Results 180 8.5 Summary 183 References 183 9 Microgrid Control: Concepts and Classification 186 9.1 Microgrids 187 9.2 Microgrid Control 192 9.3 Local Controls 195 9.4 Secondary Controls 198 9.5 Global Controls 202 9.6 Central/Emergency Controls 204 9.7 Summary 206 References 207 10 Microgrid Control: Synthesis Examples 209 10.1 Local Control Synthesis 209 10.1.1 Robust Voltage Control Design 209 10.1.2 Intelligent Droop-Based Voltage and Frequency Control 215 10.2 Secondary Control Synthesis 221 10.2.1 Intelligent Frequency Control 221 10.2.2 ANN-Based Self-Tuning Frequency Control 228 10.3 Global Control Synthesis 235 10.3.1 Adaptive Energy Consumption Scheduling 235 10.3.2 Power Dispatching in Interconnected MGs 240 10.4 Emergency Control Synthesis 242 10.4.1 Developed LS Algorithm 243 10.4.2 Case Study and Simulation 243 10.5 Summary 246 References 246 Appendix A New York/New England 16-Machine 68-Bus System Case Study 249 Appendix B Nine-Bus Power System Case Study 254 Appendix C Four-Order Dynamical Power System Model and Parameters of the Four-Machine Infinite-Bus System 256 Index 261

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book presents the application of system analysis techniques with case studies to help readers learn how the techniques can be applied, how the problems are solved, and which sustainable management strategies can be reached.Table of ContentsPREFACE xix I FUNDAMENTAL BACKGROUND 1 1 INTRODUCTION 3 1.1 The Concept of Sustainable Development 3 1.2 Sustainability in the Context of SWM 10 1.3 The Framework for Sustainability Assessment 12 1.4 The Structure of this Book 13 References 16 2 TECHNOLOGY MATRIX FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 19 2.1 Waste Classification and Types of Waste 19 2.2 Waste Management Through Waste Hierarchy: Reduce, Reuse, Recycle, Recover, and Disposal 28 2.3 Waste Operational Units: Real-World Cases 34 2.4 Waste Operational Units: Equipment and Facilities 42 2.5 Technology Matrix for Multiple Solid Waste Streams 72 2.6 Final Remarks 90 References 90 3 SOCIAL AND ECONOMIC CONCERNS 99 3.1 Financial Concerns 100 3.2 Economic Incentives and Socioeconomic Concerns 114 3.3 Social Concerns 123 3.4 Final Remarks 133 References 134 4 LEGAL AND INSTITUTIONAL CONCERNS 141 4.1 SWM Legislation 141 4.2 Sustainable Waste Management Principles and Policies 151 4.3 Policy Instruments 155 4.4 ISWM Plans 162 4.5 Final Remarks 163 References 163 5 RISK ASSESSMENT AND MANAGEMENT OF RISK 171 5.1 Formulate the Problem: Inherent Hazards in Solid Waste Management 171 5.2 Risk Assessment in Solid Waste Management 176 5.3 Management of Risk 183 5.4 Risk Communication 184 5.5 How to Promote a Sustainable Solid Waste Management with Risk Analysis? 186 5.6 Final Remarks 188 References 188 II PRINCIPLES OF SYSTEMS ENGINEERING 193 6 GLOBAL CHANGE, SUSTAINABILITY, AND ADAPTIVE MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 195 6.1 Global Change Impacts 195 6.2 Sustainability Considerations and Criteria 208 6.3 Adaptive Management Strategies for Solid Waste Management Systems 208 6.4 Final Remarks 210 References 210 7 SYSTEMS ENGINEERING PRINCIPLES FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 215 7.1 Systems Engineering Principles 215 7.2 System of Systems Engineering Approaches 222 7.3 Centralized Versus Decentralized Approaches 227 7.4 Sensitivity Analysis and Uncertainty Quantification 230 7.5 Final Remarks 232 References 233 8 SYSTEMS ENGINEERING TOOLS AND METHODS FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 235 8.1 Systems Analysis, Waste Management, and Technology Hub 236 8.2 Cost–Benefit–Risk Trade-Offs and Single-Objective Optimization 240 8.3 Multicriteria Decision-Making 248 8.4 Game Theory and Conflict Resolution 283 8.5 System Dynamics Modeling 287 8.6 Final Remarks 290 References 292 Appendix Web Site Resources of Software Packages of LINDO and LINGO 299 III INDUSTRIAL ECOLOGY AND INTEGRATED SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT STRATEGIES 301 9 INDUSTRIAL ECOLOGY AND MUNICIPAL UTILITY PARKS 303 9.1 Industrial Symbiosis and Industrial Ecology 303 9.2 Creation of Eco-Industrial Parks and Eco-Industrial Clusters 309 9.3 Municipal Utility Parks in Urban Regions 314 9.4 Final Remarks 319 References 321 10 LIFE CYCLE ASSESSMENT AND SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 323 10.1 Life Cycle Assessment for Solid Waste Management 323 10.2 Phases of Life Cycle Assessment 325 10.3 LCA Waste Management Software 355 10.4 Putting LCA into Practice 361 10.5 Life Cycle Management 374 10.6 Final Remarks 376 References 376 11 STREAMLINED LIFE CYCLE ASSESSMENT FOR SOLID WASTE TREATMENT OPTIONS 387 11.1 Application of Life Cycle Assessment for Solid Waste Management 388 11.2 LCA for Screening Technologies of Solid Waste Treatment 390 11.3 LCA Assessment Methodology 391 11.4 Description of the CSLCA 397 11.5 Interpretation of CSLCA Results 400 11.6 Final Remarks 412 References 412 12 CARBON-FOOTPRINT-BASED SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 417 12.1 The Global-Warming Potential Impact 417 12.2 The Quantification Process 418 12.3 GWP Assessment for Solid Waste Management 426 12.4 Case Study 429 12.5 Systems Analysis 434 12.6 Final Remarks 436 References 436 IV INTEGRATED SYSTEMS PLANNING, DESIGN, AND MANAGEMENT 441 13 MULTIOBJECTIVE DECISION-MAKING FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT IN A CARBON-REGULATED ENVIRONMENT 443 13.1 Current Gaps of Cost–Benefit Analyses for Solid Waste Management 444 13.2 Background of System Planning 446 13.3 Formulation of Systems Engineering Models for Comparative Analysis 451 13.4 Interpretation of Modeling Output for Decision Analysis 459 13.5 Comparative Analysis 464 13.6 Final Remarks 470 References 470 14 PLANNING REGIONAL MATERIAL RECOVERY FACILITIES IN A FAST-GROWING URBAN REGION 475 14.1 Forecasting Municipal Solid Waste Generation and Optimal Siting of MRF in a Fast-growing Urban Region 476 14.2 Modeling Philosophy 478 14.3 Study Region and System Analysis Framework 480 14.4 Prediction of Solid Waste Generation 483 14.5 Regional Planning of Material Recovery Facilities 492 14.6 Final Remarks 506 References 508 15 OPTIMAL PLANNING FOR SOLID WASTE COLLECTION, RECYCLING, AND VEHICLE ROUTING 515 15.1 Systems Engineering Approaches for Solid Waste Collection 516 15.2 Simulation for Planning Solid Waste Recycling Drop-Off Stations 520 15.3 Multiobjective Programming for Planning Solid Waste Recycling Drop-Off Stations 533 15.4 Final Remarks 543 References 546 16 MULTIATTRIBUTE DECISION-MAKING WITH SUSTAINABILITY CONSIDERATIONS 553 16.1 Deterministic Multiple Attribute Decision-Making Process 554 16.2 MADM for Solid Waste Management 568 16.3 Final Remarks 579 References 580 17 DECISION ANALYSIS FOR OPTIMAL BALANCE BETWEEN SOLID WASTE INCINERATION AND RECYCLING PROGRAMS 585 17.1 Systems Analysis for Integrated Material Recycling and Waste-to-Energy Programs 586 17.2 Refuse-Derived Fuel Process for Solid Waste Management 587 17.3 Regional Shipping Strategies 594 17.4 Final Remarks 606 References 609 18 ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATICS FOR INTEGRATED SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 611 18.1 How Does Environmental Informatics Help Solid Waste Management? 611 18.2 Sensors and Sensor Networks for Solid Waste Management 612 18.3 Database Design for Solid Waste Management 615 18.4 Spatial Analysis with GIS and GPS for Solid Waste Management 616 18.5 Expert Systems, Decision Support Systems, and Computational Intelligence Techniques 624 18.6 Integrated Environmental Information Systems 641 18.7 Final Remarks 644 References 646 V UNCERTAINTY ANALYSES AND FUTURE PERSPECTIVES 665 19 STOCHASTIC PROGRAMMING AND GAME THEORY FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT DECISION-MAKING 667 19.1 Background of Stochastic Programming 667 19.2 Model Formulations of Stochastic Programming 668 19.3 Stochastic Programming with Multiple Objective Functions 682 19.4 Stochastic Dynamic Programming 686 19.5 Game Theory 689 19.6 Final Remarks 698 References 699 20 FUZZY MULTIATTRIBUTE DECISION-MAKING FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT WITH SOCIETAL COMPLICATIONS 703 20.1 Fundamentals of Fuzzy Set Theory 703 20.2 Siting a Regional Landfill with Fuzzy Multiattribute Decision-Making and GIS Techniques 713 20.3 Fair Fund Redistribution and Environmental Justice with GIS-based Fuzzy AHP Method 731 20.4 Final Remarks 751 References 753 21 FUZZY MULTIATTRIBUTE DECISION-MAKING FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT WITH TECHNOLOGICAL COMPLICATIONS 759 21.1 Integrated Fuzzy Topsis and AHP Method for Screening Solid Waste Recycling Alternatives 759 21.2 The Algorithm of FIMADM Method 765 21.3 The Solid Waste Management System 771 21.4 Final Remarks 788 References 788 22 FUZZY MULTIOBJECTIVE DECISION-MAKING FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 791 22.1 Fuzzy Linear Programming 791 22.2 Fuzzy Multiobjective Programming—Fuzzy Global Criterion Method 796 22.3 Fuzzy Goal Programming 800 22.4 Case Study 802 22.5 Final Remarks 823 References 826 23 GREY SYSTEMS THEORY FOR SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT 829 23.1 Grey Systems Theory 829 23.2 Grey Linear Programming 831 23.3 The Stability Issues of Grey Programming Models 840 23.4 The Hybrid Approach for Various Cases of Uncertainty Quantification 843 23.5 Final Remarks 844 References 845 24 SYSTEMS ANALYSIS FOR THE FUTURE OF SOLID WASTE MANAGEMENT: CHALLENGES AND PERSPECTIVES 849 24.1 The Evolution of Systems Analysis for Solid Waste Management 850 24.2 Trend Analysis 862 24.3 Technical Barriers and Socioeconomic Challenges 869 24.4 Future Perspectives 872 24.5 Final Remarks 874 References 875 INDEX 895

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book covers the study of electromagnetic wave theory and describes how electromagnetic technologies affect our daily lives. From ER to ET: How Electromagnetic Technologies Are Changing Our Lives explores electromagnetic wave theory including its founders, scientific underpinnings, ethical issues, and applications through history. Utilizing a format of short essays, this book explains in a balanced, and direct style how electromagnetictechnologies are changing the world we live in and the future they may create for us. Quizzes at the end of each chapter provide the reader with a deeper understanding of the material. This book is a valuable resource for microwave engineers of varying levels of experience, and for instructors to motivate their students and add depth to their assignments. In addition, this book: Presents topics that investigate all aspects of electromagnetic technology throughout history Explores societal and global issues Table of ContentsABOUT THE AUTHOR ix PREFACE xi 1 ON THE SHOULDERS OF GIANTS 1 1.1 He(a)dy Stuff / 1 1.2 From Russia without English / 3 1.3 On the Shoulders of Giants / 5 1.4 Do-it-yourself Execution? / 8 1.5 Franklin: Did He or Didn’t He? / 10 1.6 De Magnete (“On the Magnet”) / 12 1.7 A Eureka Moment / 15 1.8 Auld Lang Syne / 17 1.9 As Singular as a Delta Function? / 19 1.10 Publish or Perish? / 21 DID YOU KNOW? 24 2 THE EARTH AND BEYOND 27 2.1 In the Eye of the Beholder / 27 2.2 Roses are Red, Violets are Blue… / 30 2.3 2003: An Earth Odyssey? / 32 2.4 Which Came First: Big Bang or Big Crunch? / 34 2.5 Whistling in the Dark? / 36 2.6 Going Beyond a Selfie / 38 DID YOU KNOW? 41 3 SEARCH FOR EXTRATERRESTRIAL INTELLIGENCE (SETI) 45 3.1 Little Green Men: A Phantom Menace? / 45 3.2 Waiting for Godot? / 47 3.3 Is There Anybody There? / 49 3.4 Science or Science Fiction? / 51 DID YOU KNOW? 54 4 PROFESSIONALISM: ETHICS AND LAW 59 4.1 Did Maxwell Pull a Fast One? / 59 4.2 Cell Phones and Cancer: Anatomy of a Legal Opinion / 61 4.3 Happy 200th Anniversary! / 64 4.4 Einstein Doesn’t Work Here Anymore / 66 4.5 It is a Bird. It is a Plane. It is… / 68 DID YOU KNOW? 71 5 HEALTH EFFECTS OF ELECTROMAGNETIC FIELDS 75 5.1 Say Au Revoir to Cell Phones? / 75 5.2 Electromagnetic Hypersensitivity / 78 5.3 From Bell Tower to Cell Tower / 80 5.4 Nocebo: Reading This Column may Affect Your Health / 83 5.5 Magnetic Pull: Biological Effects or Medical Applications? / 85 5.6 Close Encounters With Radiation of the Other Kind / 88 DID YOU KNOW? 91 6 BIOMEDICAL APPLICATIONS 95 6.1 How Many Biologists Does it Take to Fix a Radio? / 95 6.2 The Grand Challenges / 97 6.3 Biomedical Applications: Taking Stock / 99 6.4 Tugging at the Heartstrings / 101 6.5 A Jolt from the Blue? / 103 6.6 Channeling the Voice Within / 105 6.7 Battling Cancer: Microwave Hyperthermia / 107 DID YOU KNOW? 110 7 DEFENSE APPLICATIONS 113 7.1 Where is Waldo? / 113 7.2 Antimagnet / 115 7.3 Cutting to the Chase / 117 7.4 Twenty-First Century Warfare / 119 7.5 On a Wing and a Prayer / 121 7.6 ELF Communication: An Obituary / 122 7.7 Catching up with Professor Scarry / 124 7.8 Criminal Interference / 126 7.9 Wireless Networks: An Electronic Battlefield? / 130 DID YOU KNOW? 133 8 DOMESTIC AND INDUSTRIAL APPLICATIONS 137 8.1 Blowin’ in the Wind / 137 8.2 Sharing the Road / 139 8.3 Rare no More? / 141 8.4 Local Heating? / 143 8.5 Coming Soon to a Wal-Mart Near You / 145 8.6 Has Your Cat Gone Phishing? / 148 8.7 The Future of Wireless Charging / 150 8.8 Electropollution or Sustainable Energy? / 151 DID YOU KNOW? 154 9 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 157 9.1 Small is Beautiful / 157 9.2 Gigabit Wi-Fi / 159 9.3 Open Spectrum: A Tragedy of the Commons? / 161 9.4 Near-Field Communication / 163 9.5 A New Digital Phone? / 165 9.6 Electronic Countermeasures / 167 DID YOU KNOW? 170 10 LIFELONG LEARNING 175 10.1 Back to Basics / 175 10.2 Preaching to the Choir? / 177 10.3 The Other Davos? / 180 10.4 Mirror, Mirror on the Wall; who is the Fairest of Them All? / 182 10.5 Equations Redux / 184 10.6 New Year’s Resolutions Laws / 185 10.7 Through a Glass Darkly / 187 10.8 Stranger Than Fiction? / 189 10.9 High Frequency Education: What Do You Think? / 191 AFTERWORD 195 INDEX 197

Read more less

Book SynopsisWith emphasis on the physical and engineering principles, this book provides a comprehensive and highly accessible treatment of modern lasers and optoelectronics. Divided into four parts, it explains laser fundamentals, types of lasers, laser electronics & optoelectronics, and laser applications, covering each of the topics in their entirety, from basic fundamentals to advanced concepts. Key features include: exploration of technological and application-related aspects of lasers and optoelectronics, detailing both existing and emerging applications in industry, medical diagnostics and therapeutics, scientific studies and Defence. simple explanation of the concepts and essential information on electronics and circuitry related to laser systems illustration of numerous solved and unsolved problems, practical examples, chapter summaries, self-evaluation exercises, and a comprehensive list of references for further reading This volume Table of ContentsPreface xix Part I LASER FUNDAMENTALS 1 1 Laser Basics 3 1.1 Introduction 3 1.2 Laser Operation 3 1.3 Rules of Quantum Mechanics 3 1.4 Absorption, Spontaneous Emission and Stimulated Emission 4 1.5 Population Inversion 10 1.6 Two-, Three- and Four-Level Laser Systems 11 1.7 Gain of Laser Medium 16 1.8 Laser Resonator 17 1.9 Longitudinal and Transverse Modes 18 1.10 Types of Laser Resonators 21 1.11 Pumping Mechanisms 23 1.12 Summary 29 2 Laser Characteristics 34 2.1 Introduction 34 2.2 Laser Characteristics 34 2.3 Important Laser Parameters 41 2.4 Measurement of Laser Parameters 49 2.5 Laser Beam Diagnostic Equipment 56 2.6 Summary 59 Part II TYPES OF LASERS 65 3 Solid-state Lasers 67 3.1 Introduction: Types of Laser 67 3.2 Importance of Host Material 67 3.3 Operational Modes 68 3.4 Ruby Lasers 76 3.5 Neodymium-doped Lasers 78 3.6 Erbium-doped Lasers 85 3.7 Vibronic Lasers 88 3.8 Colour Centre Lasers 90 3.9 Fibre Lasers 91 3.10 Summary 101 4 Gas Lasers 105 4.1 Introduction to Gas Lasers 105 4.2 Helium-neon Lasers 107 4.3 Carbon Dioxide Lasers 111 4.4 Metal Vapour Lasers 115 4.5 Rare Gas Ion Lasers 118 4.6 Excimer Lasers 120 4.7 Chemical Lasers 121 4.8 Carbon Dioxide Gas Dynamic Lasers 125 4.9 Dye Laser 125 4.10 Free-electron Lasers 127 4.11 X-Ray Lasers 129 4.12 Summary 129 5 Semiconductor Lasers 132 5.1 Introduction 132 5.2 Operational Basics 132 5.3 Semiconductor Laser Materials 135 5.4 Types of Semiconductor Lasers 136 5.5 Characteristic Parameters 148 5.6 Gain- and Index-guided Diode Lasers 152 5.7 Handling Semiconductor Diode Lasers 152 5.8 Semiconductor Diode Lasers: Application Areas 153 5.9 Summary 154 Part III LASER ELECTRONICS AND OPTOELECTRONICS 159 6 Building Blocks of Laser Electronics 161 6.1 Introduction 161 6.2 Linear Power Supplies 161 6.3 Switched-mode Power Supplies 173 6.4 Constant Current Sources 186 6.5 Integrated-circuit Timer Circuits 191 6.6 Current-to-voltage Converter 197 6.7 Peak Detector 199 6.8 High-voltage Trigger Circuit 200 6.9 Summary 202 7 Solid-state Laser Electronics 208 7.1 Introduction 208 7.2 Spectrum of Laser Electronics 208 7.3 Electronics for Solid-state Lasers 213 7.4 Electronics for Pulsed Solid-state Lasers 214 7.5 Electronics for CW Solid-state Lasers 233 7.6 Solid-state Laser Designators and Rangefinders 237 7.7 Summary 238 8 Gas Laser Electronics 242 8.1 Introduction 242 8.2 Gas Discharge Characteristics 242 8.3 Gas Laser Power Supplies 242 8.4 Helium-Neon Laser Power Supply 244 8.5 Carbon Dioxide Laser Power Supplies 257 8.6 Power Supplies for Metal Vapour Lasers 260 8.7 Power Supplies for Excimer Lasers 261 8.8 Power Supplies for Ion Lasers 262 8.9 Frequency Stabilization of Gas Lasers 263 8.10 Summary 267 9 Laser Diode Electronics 271 9.1 Introduction 271 9.2 Laser Diode Protection 271 9.3 Operational Modes 276 9.4 Laser Diode Driver Circuits 278 9.5 Laser Diode Temperature Control 291 9.6 Summary 308 10 Optoelectronic Devices and Circuits 315 10.1 Introduction 315 10.2 Classification of Photosensors 315 10.3 Radiometry and Photometry 316 10.4 Characteristic Parameters 318 10.5 Photoconductors 324 10.6 Photodiodes 329 10.7 Phototransistors 340 10.8 Photo- FET, SCR and TRIAC 343 10.9 Photoemissive Sensors 345 10.10 Thermal Sensors 347 10.11 Displays 349 10.12 Light-emitting Diodes 351 10.13 Liquid-crystal Displays 356 10.14 Cathode Ray Tube Displays 361 10.15 Emerging Display Technologies 362 10.16 Optocouplers 363 10.17 Summary 370 Part IV LASER APPLICATIONS 379 11 Lasers in Industry 381 11.1 Introduction 381 11.2 Material-processing Applications 381 11.3 Laser Cutting 385 11.4 Laser Welding 390 11.5 Laser Drilling 393 11.6 Laser Marking and Engraving 396 11.7 Laser Micromachining 401 11.8 Photolithography 407 11.9 Rapid Manufacturing 411 11.10 Lasers in Printing 414 11.11 Summary 418 12 Lasers in Medicine 422 12.1 Introduction 422 12.2 Light–tissue Interaction 422 12.3 Laser Diagnostics 430 12.4 Therapeutic Techniques: Application Areas 442 12.5 Ophthalmology 443 12.6 Dermatology 449 12.7 Laser Dentistry 453 12.8 Vascular Surgery 455 12.9 Photodynamic Therapy 456 12.10 Thermal Therapy 459 12.11 Summary 460 13 Lasers in Science and Technology 466 13.1 Introduction 466 13.2 Optical Metrology 466 13.3 Laser Velocimetry 478 13.4 Laser Vibrometry 482 13.5 Electronic Speckle Pattern Interferometry 484 13.6 Satellite Laser Ranging 490 13.7 Lasers in Astronomy 494 13.8 Holography 496 13.9 Summary 503 14 Military Applications: Laser Instrumentation 508 14.1 Introduction 508 14.2 Military Applications of Lasers 508 14.3 Laser-based Instrumentation 512 14.4 Guided Munitions 532 14.5 Laser Communication 556 14.6 Summary 561 15 Military Applications: Directed-energy Laser Systems 566 15.1 Introduction 566 15.2 Laser Technology for Low-intensity Conflict (LIC) Applications 566 15.3 Electro-optic Countermeasures 580 15.4 Directed-energy Laser Weapons 585 15.5 Summary 592 Review Questions 595 Self-evaluation Exercise 596 Bibliography 598 Appendix A: Laser Safety 597 Index 603

Read more less

Book Synopsis. a much-needed handbook with contributions from well-chosen practitioners.Table of ContentsForeword xi List of Contributors xiii Notes on Contributors xvii List of Acronyms xxxi Part I Overview and Introduction 1. Overview and Introduction to Modeling and Simulation Support for System of Systems Engineering Applications 3Larry B. Rainey and Andreas Tolk 2. The Role of Modeling and Simulation in System of Systems Development 11Mark W. Maier Part II Theoretical and Methodological Considerations 3. Composability 45Michael C. Jones 4. An Approach for System of Systems Tradespace Exploration 75Adam M. Ross and Donna H. Rhodes 5. Data Policy Definition and Verification for System of Systems Governance 99Daniele Gianni 6. System Health Management 131Stephen B. Johnson 7. Model Methodology for a Department of Defense Architecture Design 145R. William Maule Part III Theoretical and Methodological Considerations with Applications and Lessons Learned 8. An Agent-Oriented Perspective on System of Systems for Multiple Domains 187Agostino G. Bruzzone, Alfredo Garro, Francesco Longo, and Marina Massei 9. Building Analytical Support for Homeland Security 219Sanjay Jain, Charles W. Hutchings, and Yung-Tsun Tina Lee 10. Air Transportation Systems 249William Crossley and Daniel DeLaurentis 11. Systemigram Modeling for Contextualizing Complexity in System of Systems 273Brian Sauser and John Boardman 12. Using Modeling and Simulation for System of Systems Engineering Applications in the European Space Agency 303Joachim Fuchs and Niklas Lindman 13. System of Systems Modeling and Simulation for Microgrids Using DDDAMS 337Aristotelis E. Thanos, DeLante E. Moore, Xiaoran Shi, and Nurcin Celik 14. Composition of Behavior Models for Systems Architecture 361Clifford A. Whitcomb, Mikhail Auguston, and Kristin Giammarco 15. Joint Training 393James Harrington, Laura Hinton, and Michael Wright 16. Human in the Loop in System of Systems (SoS) Modeling and Simulation: Applications to Live, Virtual, and Constructive (LVC) Distributed Mission Operations (DMO) Training 415Saurabh Mittal, Margery J. Doyle, and Antoinette M. Portrey 17. On Analysis of Ballistic Missile Defense Architecture through Surrogate Modeling and Simulation 453Tommer R. Ender, Philip D. West, William Dale Blair, and Paul A. Miceli 18. Medical Enhancements to Sustain Life during Extreme Trauma Care 479L. Drew Pihera, Nathan L. Adams, Tommer R. Ender, and Matthew L. Paden 19. Utility: Problem-Focused, Effects-Based Analysis (aka Information Value Chain Analysis) 515Thomas W. O’Brien and John F. Sarkesain 20. A Framework for Achieving Dynamic Cyber Effects through Distributed Cyber Command and Control/Battle Management (C2/BM) 531John F. Sarkesain and Thomas W. O’Brien 21. System of Systems Security 565Bharat B. Madan Part IV Conclusions 22. Toward a Research Agenda for M&S Support of System of Systems Engineering 583Andreas Tolk and Larry B. Rainey Index 593

Read more less

Book SynopsisIf we had computers that knew everything there was to know about things?using data they gathered without any help from us?we would be able to track and count everything, and greatly reduce waste, loss, and cost. We would know when things needed replacing, repairing or recalling, and whether they were fresh or past their best. The Internet of Things has the potential to change the world, just as the Internet did. Maybe even more so. ?Kevin Ashton, originator of the term, Internet of Things An examination of the concept and unimagined potential unleashed by the Internet of Things (IoT) with IPv6 and MIPv6 What is the Internet of Things? How can it help my organization? What is the cost of deploying such a system? What are the security implications? Building the Internet of Things with IPv6 and MIPv6: The Evolving World of M2M Communications answers these questions and many more. This essential book explains the concept and potential that the IoTable of ContentsPREFACE xiii ABOUT THE AUTHOR xvii 1 WHAT IS THE INTERNET OF THINGS? 1 1.1 Overview and Motivations 1 1.2 Examples of Applications 12 1.3 IPv6 Role 17 1.4 Areas of Development and Standardization 20 1.5 Scope of the Present Investigation 23 Appendix 1.A: Some Related Literature 25 References 26 2 INTERNET OF THINGS DEFINITIONS AND FRAMEWORKS 28 2.1 IoT Definitions 28 2.1.1 General Observations 28 2.1.2 ITU-T Views 31 2.1.3 Working Definition 33 2.2 IoT Frameworks 38 2.3 Basic Nodal Capabilities 44 References 46 3 INTERNET OF THINGS APPLICATION EXAMPLES 48 3.1 Overview 49 3.2 Smart MeteringAdvanced Metering Infrastructure 52 3.3 e-HealthBody Area Networks 55 3.4 City Automation 62 3.5 Automotive Applications 64 3.6 Home Automation 67 3.7 Smart Cards 70 3.8 Tracking (Following and Monitoring Mobile Objects) 77 3.9 Over-The-Air-Passive SurveillanceRing of Steel 79 3.10 Control Application Examples 86 3.11 Myriad Other Applications 93 References 94 4 FUNDAMENTAL IoT MECHANISMS AND KEY TECHNOLOGIES 97 4.1 Identification of IoT Objects and Services 97 4.2 Structural Aspects of the IoT 101 4.2.1 Environment Characteristics 101 4.2.2 Traffic Characteristics 102 4.2.3 Scalability 102 4.2.4 Interoperability 103 4.2.5 Security and Privacy 103 4.2.6 Open Architecture 103 4.3 Key IoT Technologies 103 4.3.1 Device Intelligence 103 4.3.2 Communication Capabilities 104 4.3.3 Mobility Support 104 4.3.4 Device Power 105 4.3.5 Sensor Technology 107 4.3.6 RFID Technology 111 4.3.7 Satellite Technology 118 References 119 5 EVOLVING IoT STANDARDS 120 5.1 Overview and Approaches 120 5.2 IETF IPv6 Routing Protocol for RPL Roll 123 5.3 Constrained Application Protocol (CoAP) 126 5.3.1 Background 126 5.3.2 Messaging Model 129 5.3.3 RequestResponse Model 129 5.3.4 Intermediaries and Caching 129 5.4 Representational State Transfer (REST) 130 5.5 ETSI M2M 130 5.6 Third-Generation Partnership Project Service Requirements for Machine-Type Communications 131 5.6.1 Approach 131 5.6.2 Architectural Reference Model for MTC 134 5.7 CENELEC 135 5.8 IETF IPv6 Over Lowpower WPAN (6LoWPAN) 137 5.9 ZigBee IP (ZIP) 137 5.10 IP in Smart Objects (IPSO) 138 Appendix 5.A: Legacy Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) Systems 138 References 142 6 LAYER 12 CONNECTIVITY: WIRELESS TECHNOLOGIES FOR THE IoT 144 6.1 WPAN Technologies for IoTM2M 145 6.1.1 ZigbeeIEEE 802.15.4 155 6.1.2 Radio Frequency for Consumer Electronics (RF4CE) 170 6.1.3 Bluetooth and its Low-Energy Profile 170 6.1.4 IEEE 802.15.6 WBANs 180 6.1.5 IEEE 802.15 WPAN TG4j MBANs 181 6.1.6 ETSI TR 101 557 184 6.1.7 NFC 187 6.1.8 Dedicated Short-Range Communications (DSRC) and Related Protocols 189 6.1.9 Comparison of WPAN Technologies 192 6.2 Cellular and Mobile Network Technologies for IoTM2M 195 6.2.1 Overview and Motivations 195 6.2.2 Universal Mobile Telecommunications System 196 6.2.3 LTE 197 Appendix 6.A: Non-Wireless Technologies for IoT: Powerline Communications 209 References 216 7 LAYER 3 CONNECTIVITY: IPv6 TECHNOLOGIES FOR THE IoT 220 7.1 Overview and Motivations 220 7.2 Address Capabilities 224 7.2.1 IPv4 Addressing and Issues 224 7.2.2 IPv6 Address Space 225 7.3 IPv6 Protocol Overview 231 7.4 IPv6 Tunneling 239 7.5 IPsec in IPv6 242 7.6 Header Compression Schemes 242 7.7 Quality of Service in IPv6 245 7.8 Migration Strategies to IPv6 246 7.8.1 Technical Approaches 246 7.8.2 Residential Broadband Services in an IPv6 Environment 250 7.8.3 Deployment Opportunities 252 References 254 8 LAYER 3 CONNECTIVITY: MOBILE IPv6 TECHNOLOGIES FOR THE IoT 257 8.1 Overview 257 8.2 Protocol Details 266 8.2.1 Generic Mechanisms 267 8.2.2 New IPv6 Protocol, Message Types, and Destination Option 271 8.2.3 Modifications to IPv6 Neighbor Discovery 277 8.2.4 Requirements for Various IPv6 Nodes 278 8.2.5 Correspondent Node Operation 278 8.2.6 HA Node Operation 285 8.2.7 Mobile Node Operation 286 8.2.8 Relationship to IPV4 Mobile IPv4 (MIP) 291 References 292 9 IPv6 OVER LOW-POWER WPAN (6LoWPAN) 293 9.1 BackgroundIntroduction 294 9.2 6LoWPANs Goals 296 9.3 Transmission of IPv6 Packets Over IEEE 802.15.4 297 References 301 GLOSSARY 302 INDEX 356

Read more less

Book SynopsisElectric drives in sustainable energy systems use a physics-based approach to electric drive control. The proper control of electric motors and systems represents significant energy savings and has applications in factory automation, clean transportation, and renewable energy resource management.Table of ContentsPreface xiii Notation xv 1 Applications: Speed and Torque Control 1 1-1 History 1 1-2 Background 2 1-3 Types of ac Drives Discussed and the Simulation Software 2 1-4 Structure of this Textbook 3 1-5 “Test” Induction Motor 3 1-6 Summary 4 References 4 Problems 4 2 Induction Machine Equations in Phase Quantities: Assisted by Space Vectors 6 2-1 Introduction 6 2-2 Sinusoidally Distributed Stator Windings 6 2-2-1 Three-Phase, Sinusoidally Distributed Stator Windings 8 2-3 Stator Inductances (Rotor Open-Circuited) 9 2-3-1 Stator Single-Phase Magnetizing Inductance Lm,1-phase 9 2-3-2 Stator Mutual-Inductance Lmutual 11 2-3-3 Per-Phase Magnetizing-Inductance Lm 12 2-3-4 Stator-Inductance Ls 12 2-4 Equivalent Windings in a Squirrel-Cage Rotor 13 2-4-1 Rotor-Winding Inductances (Stator Open-Circuited) 13 2-5 Mutual Inductances between the Stator and the Rotor Phase Windings 15 2-6 Review of Space Vectors 15 2-6-1 Relationship between Phasors and Space Vectors in Sinusoidal Steady State 17 2-7 Flux Linkages 18 2-7-1 Stator Flux Linkage (Rotor Open-Circuited) 18 2-7-2 Rotor Flux Linkage (Stator Open-Circuited) 19 2-7-3 Stator and Rotor Flux Linkages (Simultaneous Stator and Rotor Currents) 20 2-8 Stator and Rotor Voltage Equations in Terms of Space Vectors 21 2-9 Making the Case for a dq -Winding Analysis 22 2-10 Summary 25 Reference 25 Problems 26 3 Dynamic Analysis of Induction Machines in Terms of dq Windings 28 3-1 Introduction 28 3-2 dq Winding Representation 28 3-2-1 Stator dq Winding Representation 29 3-2-2 Rotor dq Windings (Along the Same dq-Axes as in the Stator) 31 3-2-3 Mutual Inductance between dq Windings on the Stator and the Rotor 32 3-3 Mathematical Relationships of the dq Windings (at an Arbitrary Speed ωd) 33 3-3-1 Relating dq Winding Variables to Phase Winding Variables 35 3-3-2 Flux Linkages of dq Windings in Terms of Their Currents 36 3-3-3 dq Winding Voltage Equations 37 3-3-4 Obtaining Fluxes and Currents with Voltages as Inputs 40 3-4 Choice of the dqWinding Speed ωd 41 3-5 Electromagnetic Torque 42 3-5-1 Torque on the Rotor d -Axis Winding 42 3-5-2 Torque on the Rotor q -Axis Winding 43 3-5-3 Net Electromagnetic Torque Tem on the Rotor 44 3-6 Electrodynamics 44 3-7 d- and q-Axis Equivalent Circuits 45 3-8 Relationship between the dq Windings and the Per-Phase Phasor-Domain Equivalent Circuit in Balanced Sinusoidal Steady State 46 3-9 Computer Simulation 47 3-9-1 Calculation of Initial Conditions 48 3-10 Summary 56 Reference 56 Problems 57 4 Vector Control of Induction-Motor Drives: A Qualitative Examination 59 4-1 Introduction 59 4-2 Emulation of dc and Brushless dc Drive Performance 59 4-2-1 Vector Control of Induction-Motor Drives 61 4-3 Analogy to a Current-Excited Transformer with a Shorted Secondary 62 4-3-1 Using the Transformer Equivalent Circuit 65 4-4 d- and q -Axis Winding Representation 66 4-5 Vector Control with d-Axis Aligned with the Rotor Flux 67 4-5-1 Initial Flux Buildup Prior to t = 0−67 4-5-2 Step Change in Torque at t = 0+68 4-6 Torque, Speed, and Position Control 72 4-6-1 The Reference Current isq t * ( ) 72 4-6-2 The Reference Current isd t ( ) 73 4-6-3 Transformation and Inverse-Transformation of Stator Currents 73 4-6-4 The Estimated Motor Model for Vector Control 74 4-7 The Power-Processing Unit (PPU) 75 4-8 Summary 76 References 76 Problems 77 5 Mathematical Description of Vector Control in Induction Machines 79 5-1 Motor Model with the d-Axis Aligned Along the Rotor Flux Linkage λ r-Axis 79 5-1-1 Calculation of ωdA 81 5-1-2 Calculation of Tem 81 5-1-3 d-Axis Rotor Flux Linkage Dynamics 82 5-1-4 Motor Model 82 5-2 Vector Control 84 5-2-1 Speed and Position Control Loops 86 5-2-2 Initial Startup 89 5-2-3 Calculating the Stator Voltages to Be Applied 89 5-2-4 Designing the PI Controllers 90 5-3 Summary 95 Reference 95 Problems 95 6 Detuning Effects in Induction Motor Vector Control 97 6-1 Effect of Detuning Due to Incorrect Rotor Time Constant τr 97 6-2 Steady-State Analysis 101 6-2-1 Steady-State isd /is*d 104 6-2-2 Steady-State isq /is*q 104 6-2-3 Steady-State θerr 105 6-2-4 Steady-State Tem /Te*m 106 6-3 Summary 107 References 107 Problems 108 7 Dynamic Analysis of Doubly Fed Induction Generators and Their Vector Control 109 7-1 Understanding DFIG Operation 110 7-2 Dynamic Analysis of DFIG 116 7-3 Vector Control of DFIG 116 7-4 Summary 117 References 117 Problems 117 8 Space Vector Pulse Width-Modulated (SV-PWM) Inverters 119 8-1 Introduction 119 8-2 Synthesis of Stator Voltage Space Vector vsa 119 8-3 Computer Simulation of SV-PWM Inverter 124 8-4 Limit on the Amplitude ˆVs of the Stator Voltage Space Vectov sa 125 Summary 128 References 128 Problems 129 9 Direct Torque Control (DTC) and Encoderless Operation of Induction Motor Drives 130 9-1 Introduction 130 9-2 System Overview 130 9-3 Principle of Encoderless DTC Operation 131 9-4 Calculation of λs, λ r, Tem, and ωm 132 9-4-1 Calculation of the Stator Flux λ s 132 9-4-2 Calculation of the Rotor Flux λ r 133 9-4-3 Calculation of the Electromagnetic Torque Tem 134 9-4-4 Calculation of the Rotor Speed ωm 135 9-5 Calculation of the Stator Voltage Space Vector 136 9-6 Direct Torque Control Using dq-Axes 139 9-7 Summary 139 References 139 Problems 139 Appendix 9-A 140 Derivation of Torque Expressions 140 10 Vector Control of Permanent-Magnet Synchronous Motor Drives 143 10-1 Introduction 143 10-2 d-q Analysis of Permanent Magnet (Nonsalient-Pole) Synchronous Machines 143 10-2-1 Flux Linkages 144 10-2-2 Stator dq Winding Voltages 144 10-2-3 Electromagnetic Torque 145 10-2-4 Electrodynamics 145 10-2-5 Relationship between the dq Circuits and the Per-Phase Phasor-Domain Equivalent Circuit in Balanced Sinusoidal Steady State 145 10-2-6 dq-Based Dynamic Controller for “Brushless DC” Drives 147 10-3 Salient-Pole Synchronous Machines 151 10-3-1 Inductances 152 10-3-2 Flux Linkages 153 10-3-3 Winding Voltages 153 10-3-4 Electromagnetic Torque 154 10-3-5 dq-Axis Equivalent Circuits 154 10-3-6 Space Vector Diagram in Steady State 154 10-4 Summary 156 References 156 Problems 156 11 Switched-Reluctance Motor (SRM) Drives 157 11-1 Introduction 157 11-2 Switched-Reluctance Motor 157 11-2-1 Electromagnetic Torque Tem 159 11-2-2 Induced Back-EMF ea 161 11-3 Instantaneous Waveforms 162 11-4 Role of Magnetic Saturation 164 11-5 Power Processing Units for SRM Drives 165 11-6 Determining the Rotor Position for Encoderles Operation 166 11-7 Control in Motoring Mode 166 11-8 Summary 167 References 167 Problems 167 Index 169

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents the latest methods for designing and fabricating self-powered micro-generators and energy harvester systems Design and Fabrication of Self-Powered Micro-Harvesters introduces the latest trends of self-powered generators and energy harvester systems, including the design, analysis and fabrication of micro power systems.Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Preface xiii Acknowledgments xv 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Background 1 1.2 Energy Harvesters 2 1.2.1 Piezoelectric ZnO Energy Harvester 3 1.2.2 Vibrational Electromagnetic Generators 3 1.2.3 Rotary Electromagnetic Generators 4 1.2.4 NFES Piezoelectric PVDF Energy Harvester 4 1.3 Overview 5 2 Design and Fabrication of Flexible Piezoelectric Generators Based on ZnO Thin Films 7 2.1 Introduction 7 2.2 Characterization and Theoretical Analysis of Flexible ZnO-Based Piezoelectric Harvesters 10 2.2.1 Vibration Energy Conversion Model of Film-Based Flexible Piezoelectric Energy Harvester 10 2.2.2 Piezoelectricity and Polarity Test of Piezoelectric ZnO Thin Film 12 2.2.3 Optimal Thickness of PET Substrate 15 2.2.4 Model Solution of Cantilever Plate Equation 15 2.2.5 Vibration-Induced Electric Potential and Electric Power 18 2.2.6 Static Analysis to Calculate the Optimal Thickness of the PET Substrate 19 2.2.7 Model Analysis and Harmonic Analysis 21 2.2.8 Results of Model Analysis and Harmonic Analysis 23 2.3 The Fabrication of Flexible Piezoelectric ZnO Harvesters on PET Substrates 27 2.3.1 Bonding Process to Fabricate UV-Curable Resin Lump Structures on PET Substrates 27 2.3.2 Near-Field Electro-Spinning with Stereolithography Technique to Directly Write 3D UV-Curable Resin Patterns on PET Substrates 29 2.3.3 Sputtering of Al and ITO Conductive Thin Films on PET Substrates 29 2.3.4 Deposition of Piezoelectric ZnO Thin Films by Using RF Magnetron Sputtering 31 2.3.5 Testing a Single Energy Harvester under Resonant and Non-Resonant Conditions 34 2.3.6 Application of ZnO/PET-Based Generator to Flash Signal LED Module 39 2.3.7 Design and Performance of a Broad Bandwidth Energy Harvesting System 40 2.4 Fabrication and Performance of Flexible ZnO/SUS304-Based Piezoelectric Generators 48 2.4.1 Deposition of Piezoelectric ZnO Thin Films on Stainless Steel Substrates 48 2.4.2 Single-Sided ZnO/SUS304-Based Flexible Piezoelectric Generator 50 2.4.3 Double-Sided ZnO/SUS304-Based Flexible Piezoelectric Generator 51 2.4.4 Characterization of ZnO/SUS304-Based Flexible Piezoelectric Generators 52 2.4.5 Structural and Morphological Properties of Piezoelectric ZnO Thin Films on Stainless Steel Substrates 54 2.4.6 Analysis of Adhesion of ZnO Thin Films on Stainless Steel Substrates 56 2.4.7 Electrical Properties of Single-Sided ZnO/SUS304-Based Flexible Piezoelectric Generator 59 2.4.8 Characterization of Double-Sided ZnO/SUS304-Based Flexible Piezoelectric Generator: Analysis and Modification of Back Surface of SUS304 61 2.4.9 Electrical Properties of Double-Sided ZnO/SUS304-Based Piezoelectric Generator 63 2.5 Summary 66 References 67 3 Design and Fabrication of Vibration-Induced Electromagnetic Microgenerators 71 3.1 Introduction 71 3.2 Comparisons between MCTG and SMTG 74 3.2.1 Magnetic Core-Type Generator (MCTG) 74 3.2.2 Sided Magnet-Type Generator (SMTG) 76 3.3 Analysis of Electromagnetic Vibration-Induced Microgenerators 76 3.3.1 Design of Electromagnetic Vibration-Induced Microgenerators 77 3.3.2 Analysis Mode of the Microvibration Structure 78 3.3.3 Analysis Mode of Magnetic Field 81 3.3.4 Evaluation of Various Parameters of Power Output 84 3.4 Analytical Results and Discussion 88 3.4.1 Analysis of Bending Stress within the Supporting Beam of the Spiral Microspring 90 3.4.2 Finite Element Models for Magnetic Density Distribution 93 3.4.3 Power Output Evaluation 97 3.5 Fabrication of Microcoil for Microgenerator 103 3.5.1 Microspring and Induction Coil 103 3.5.2 Microspring and Magnet 105 3.6 Tests and Experiments 106 3.6.1 Measurement System 106 3.6.2 Measurement Results and Discussion 107 3.6.3 Comparison between Measured Results and Analytical Values 110 3.7 Conclusions 112 3.7.1 Analysis of Microgenerators and Vibration Mode and Simulation of the Magnetic Field 112 3.7.2 Fabrication of LTCC Microsensor 112 3.7.3 Measurement and Analysis Results 113 3.8 Summary 113 References 114 4 Design and Fabrication of Rotary Electromagnetic Microgenerator 117 4.1 Introduction 117 4.1.1 Piezoelectric, Thermoelectric, and Electrostatic Generators 119 4.1.2 Vibrational Electromagnetic Generators 119 4.1.3 Rotary Electromagnetic Generators 120 4.1.4 Generator Processes 121 4.1.5 Lithographie Galvanoformung Abformung Process 122 4.1.6 Winding Processes 123 4.1.7 LTCC 123 4.1.8 Printed Circuit Board Processes 124 4.1.9 Finite-Element Simulation and Analytical Solutions 126 4.2 Case 1: Winding Generator 126 4.2.1 Design 127 4.2.2 Analytical Formulation 132 4.2.3 Simulation 134 4.2.4 Fabrication Process 138 4.2.5 Results and Discussion (1) 139 4.2.6 Results and Discussion (2) 142 4.3 Case 2: LTCC Generator 146 4.3.1 Simulation 147 4.3.2 Analytical Theorem of Microgenerator Electromagnetism 148 4.3.3 Simplification 152 4.3.4 Analysis of Vector Magnetic Potential 153 4.3.5 Analytical Solutions for Power Generation 154 4.4 Fabrication 157 4.4.1 LTCC Process 157 4.4.2 Magnet Process 159 4.4.3 Measurement Set-up 160 4.5 Results and Discussion 162 4.5.1 Design 162 4.5.2 Analytical Solutions 168 4.5.3 Fabrication 170 References 178 5 Design and Fabrication of Electrospun PVDF Piezo-Energy Harvesters 183 5.1 Introduction 183 5.2 Fundamentals of Electrospinning Technology 187 5.2.1 Introduction to Electrospinning 187 5.2.2 Alignment and Assembly of Nanofibers 190 5.3 Near-Field Electrospinning 191 5.3.1 Introduction and Background 191 5.3.2 Principles of Operation 194 5.3.3 Process and Experiment 196 5.3.4 Summary 202 5.4 Continuous NFES 202 5.4.1 Introduction and Background 202 5.4.2 Principles of Operation 202 5.4.3 Controllability and Continuity 205 5.4.4 Process Characterization 208 5.4.5 Summary 211 5.5 Direct-Write Piezoelectric Nanogenerator 211 5.5.1 Introduction and Background 211 5.5.2 Polyvinylidene Fluoride 212 5.5.3 Theoretical Studies for Realization of Electrospun PVDF Nanofibers 213 5.5.4 Electrospinning of PVDF Nanofibers 216 5.5.5 Detailed Discussion of Process Parameters 219 5.5.6 Experimental Realization of PVDF Nanogenerator 223 5.5.7 Summary 241 5.6 Materials, Structure, and Operation of Nanogenerator with Future Prospects 241 5.6.1 Material and Structural Characteristics 241 5.6.2 Operation of Nanogenerator 243 5.6.3 Summary and Future Prospects 248 5.7 Case Study: Large-Array Electrospun PVDF Nanogenerators on a Flexible Substrate 248 5.7.1 Introduction and Background 248 5.7.2 Working Principle 249 5.7.3 Device Fabrication 249 5.7.4 Experimental Results 251 5.7.5 Summary 252 5.8 Conclusion 253 5.8.1 Near-Field Electrospinning 253 5.8.2 Continuous Near-Field Electrospinning 254 5.8.3 Direct-Write Piezoelectric PVDF 254 5.9 Future Directions 255 5.9.1 NFES Integrated Nanofiber Sensors 255 5.9.2 NFES One-Dimensional Sub-Wavelength Waveguide 256 5.9.3 NFES Biological Applications 257 5.9.4 Direct-Write Piezoelectric PVDF Nanogenerators 258 References 258 Index 265

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis bookpresents material on both the analysis of the classical concepts of correlation and on the development of their robust versions, as well as discussing the related concepts of correlation matrices, partial correlation, canonical correlation, rank correlations, with the corresponding robust and non-robust estimation procedures.Trade Review“This book can be used as a reference book for professional statisticians and users of statistical methods. It can also serve as a graduate level textbook for a special topic course on robust correlation” Yuehua Wu, MathSciNet, Aug 2017Table of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgements xvii About the Companion Website xix 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Historical Remarks 1 1.2 Ontological Remarks 4 1.2.1 Forms of data representation 5 1.2.2 Types of data statistics 5 1.2.3 Principal aims of statistical data analysis 6 1.2.4 Prior information about data distributions and related approaches to statistical data analysis 6 References 8 2 Classical Measures of Correlation 10 2.1 Preliminaries 10 2.2 Pearson’s Correlation Coefficient: Definitions and Interpretations 12 2.2.1 Introductory remarks 13 2.2.2 Correlation via regression 13 2.2.3 Correlation via the coefficient of determination 16 2.2.4 Correlation via the variances of the principal components 18 2.2.5 Correlation via the cosine of the angle between the variable vectors 21 2.2.6 Correlation via the ratio of two means 22 2.2.7 Pearson’s correlation coefficient between random events 23 2.3 Nonparametric Measures of Correlation 24 2.3.1 Introductory remarks 24 2.3.2 The quadrant correlation coefficient 26 2.3.3 The Spearman rank correlation coefficient 27 2.3.4 The Kendall 𝜏-rank correlation coefficient 28 2.3.5 Concluding remark 29 2.4 Informational Measures of Correlation 29 2.5 Summary 31 References 31 3 Robust Estimation of Location 33 3.1 Preliminaries 33 3.2 Huber’s Minimax Approach 35 3.2.1 Introductory remarks 35 3.2.2 Minimax variance M-estimates of location 36 3.2.3 Minimax bias M-estimates of location 43 3.2.4 L-estimates of location 44 3.2.5 R-estimates of location 45 3.2.6 The relations between M-, L- and R-estimates of location 46 3.2.7 Concluding remarks 47 3.3 Hampel’s Approach Based on Influence Functions 47 3.3.1 Introductory remarks 47 3.3.2 Sensitivity curve 47 3.3.3 Influence function and its properties 49 3.3.4 Local measures of robustness 51 3.3.5 B- and V-robustness 52 3.3.6 Global measure of robustness: the breakdown point 52 3.3.7 Redescending M-estimates 53 3.3.8 Concluding remark 56 3.4 Robust Estimation of Location: A Sequel 56 3.4.1 Introductory remarks 56 3.4.2 Huber’s minimax variance approach in distribution density models of a non-neighborhood nature 57 3.4.3 Robust estimation of location in distribution models with a bounded variance 62 3.4.4 On the robustness of robust solutions: stability of least informative distributions 69 3.4.5 Concluding remark 73 3.5 Stable Estimation 73 3.5.1 Introductory remarks 73 3.5.2 Variance sensitivity 74 3.5.3 Estimation stability 76 3.5.4 Robustness of stable estimates 78 3.5.5 Maximin stable redescending M-estimates 83 3.5.6 Concluding remarks 84 3.6 Robustness Versus Gaussianity 85 3.6.1 Introductory remarks 85 3.6.2 Derivations of the Gaussian distribution 87 3.6.3 Properties of the Gaussian distribution 92 3.6.4 Huber’s minimax approach and Gaussianity 100 3.6.5 Concluding remarks 101 3.7 Summary 102 References 102 4 Robust Estimation of Scale 107 4.1 Preliminaries 107 4.1.1 Introductory remarks 107 4.1.2 Estimation of scale in data analysis 108 4.1.3 Measures of scale defined by functionals 110 4.2 M- and L-Estimates of Scale 111 4.2.1 M-estimates of scale 111 4.2.2 L-estimates of scale 115 4.3 Huber Minimax Variance Estimates of Scale 116 4.3.1 Introductory remarks 116 4.3.2 The least informative distribution 117 4.3.3 Minimax variance M- and L-estimates of scale 118 4.4 Highly Efficient Robust Estimates of Scale 119 4.4.1 Introductory remarks 119 4.4.2 The median of absolute deviations and its properties 120 4.4.3 The quartile of pair-wise absolute differences Qn estimate and its properties 121 4.4.4 M-estimate approximations to the Qn estimate: MQ𝛼n, FQ𝛼n , and FQn estimates of scale 122 4.5 Monte Carlo Experiment 130 4.5.1 A remark on the Monte Carlo experiment accuracy 131 4.5.2 Monte Carlo experiment: distribution models 131 4.5.3 Monte Carlo experiment: estimates of scale 132 4.5.4 Monte Carlo experiment: characteristics of performance 133 4.5.5 Monte Carlo experiment: results 134 4.5.6 Monte Carlo experiment: discussion 136 4.5.7 Concluding remarks 138 4.6 Summary 138 References 139 5 Robust Estimation of Correlation Coefficients 140 5.1 Preliminaries 140 5.2 Main Groups of Robust Estimates of the Correlation Coefficient 141 5.2.1 Introductory remarks 141 5.2.2 Direct robust counterparts of Pearson’s correlation coefficient 142 5.2.3 Robust correlation via nonparametric measures of correlation 143 5.2.4 Robust correlation via robust regression 143 5.2.5 Robust correlation via robust principal component variances 145 5.2.6 Robust correlation via two-stage procedures 147 5.2.7 Concluding remarks 147 5.3 Asymptotic Properties of the Classical Estimates of the Correlation Coefficient 148 5.3.1 Pearson’s sample correlation coefficient 148 5.3.2 The maximum likelihood estimate of the correlation coefficient at the normal 149 5.4 Asymptotic Properties of Nonparametric Estimates of Correlation 151 5.4.1 Introductory remarks 151 5.4.2 The quadrant correlation coefficient 152 5.4.3 The Kendall rank correlation coefficient 152 5.4.4 The Spearman rank correlation coefficient 153 5.5 Bivariate Independent Component Distributions 155 5.5.1 Definition and properties 155 5.5.2 Independent component and Tukey gross-error distribution models 156 5.6 Robust Estimates of the Correlation Coefficient Based on Principal Component Variances 158 5.7 Robust Minimax Bias and Variance Estimates of the Correlation Coefficient 161 5.7.1 Introductory remarks 161 5.7.2 Minimax property 162 5.7.3 Concluding remarks 163 5.8 Robust Correlation via Highly Efficient Robust Estimates of Scale 163 5.8.1 Introductory remarks 163 5.8.2 Asymptotic bias and variance of generalized robust estimates of the correlation coefficient 164 5.8.3 Concluding remarks 165 5.9 Robust M-Estimates of the Correlation Coefficient in Independent Component Distribution Models 165 5.9.1 Introductory remarks 165 5.9.2 The maximum likelihood estimate of the correlation coefficient in independent component distribution models 165 5.9.3 M-estimates of the correlation coefficient 166 5.9.4 Asymptotic variance of M-estimators 166 5.9.5 Minimax variance M-estimates of the correlation coefficient 167 5.9.6 Concluding remarks 168 5.10 Monte Carlo Performance Evaluation 168 5.10.1 Introductory remarks 168 5.10.2 Monte Carlo experiment set-up 168 5.10.3 Discussion 171 5.10.4 Concluding remarks 173 5.11 Robust Stable Radical M-Estimate of the Correlation Coefficient of the Bivariate Normal Distribution 173 5.11.1 Introductory remarks 173 5.11.2 Asymptotic characteristics of the stable radical estimate of the correlation coefficient 174 5.11.3 Concluding remarks 175 5.12 Summary 176 References 176 6 Classical Measures of Multivariate Correlation 178 6.1 Preliminaries 178 6.2 Covariance Matrix and Correlation Matrix 179 6.3 Sample Mean Vector and Sample Covariance Matrix 181 6.4 Families of Multivariate Distributions 182 6.4.1 Construction of multivariate location-scatter models 182 6.4.2 Multivariate symmetrical distributions 183 6.4.3 Multivariate normal distribution 184 6.4.4 Multivariate elliptical distributions 184 6.4.5 Independent component model 186 6.4.6 Copula models 186 6.5 Asymptotic Behavior of Sample Covariance Matrix and Sample Correlation Matrix 187 6.6 First Uses of Covariance and Correlation Matrices 189 6.7 Working with the Covariance Matrix–Principal Component Analysis 191 6.7.1 Principal variables 191 6.7.2 Interpretation of principal components 193 6.7.3 Asymptotic behavior of the eigenvectors and eigenvalues 194 6.8 Working with Correlations–Canonical Correlation Analysis 195 6.8.1 Canonical variates and canonical correlations 195 6.8.2 Testing for independence between subvectors 197 6.9 Conditionally Uncorrelated Components 199 6.10 Summary 200 References 200 7 Robust Estimation of Scatter and Correlation Matrices 202 7.1 Preliminaries 202 7.2 Multivariate Location and Scatter Functionals 202 7.3 Influence Functions and Asymptotics 205 7.4 M-functionals for Location and Scatter 208 7.5 Breakdown Point 210 7.6 Use of Robust Scatter Matrices 211 7.6.1 Ellipticity assumption 211 7.6.2 Robust correlation matrices 212 7.6.3 Principal component analysis 212 7.6.4 Canonical correlation analysis 213 7.7 Further Uses of Location and Scatter Functionals 213 7.8 Summary 215 References 215 8 Nonparametric Measures of Multivariate Correlation 217 8.1 Preliminaries 217 8.2 Univariate Signs and Ranks 218 8.3 Marginal Signs and Ranks 220 8.4 Spatial Signs and Ranks 222 8.5 Affine Equivariant Signs and Ranks 226 8.6 Summary 229 References 230 9 Applications to Exploratory Data Analysis: Detection of Outliers 231 9.1 Preliminaries 231 9.2 State of the Art 232 9.2.1 Univariate boxplots 232 9.2.2 Bivariate boxplots 234 9.3 Problem Setting 237 9.4 A New Measure of Outlier Detection Performance 239 9.4.1 Introductory remarks 240 9.4.2 H-mean: motivation, definition and properties 241 9.5 Robust Versions of the Tukey Boxplot with Their Application to Detection of Outliers 243 9.5.1 Data generation and performance measure 243 9.5.2 Scale and shift contamination 243 9.5.3 Real-life data results 244 9.5.4 Concluding remarks 245 9.6 Robust Bivariate Boxplots and Their Performance Evaluation 245 9.6.1 Bivariate FQ-boxplot 245 9.6.2 Bivariate FQ-boxplot performance 247 9.6.3 Measuring the elliptical deviation from the convex hull 249 9.7 Summary 253 References 253 10 Applications to Time Series Analysis: Robust Spectrum Estimation 255 10.1 Preliminaries 255 10.2 Classical Estimation of a Power Spectrum 256 10.2.1 Introductory remarks 256 10.2.2 Classical nonparametric estimation of a power spectrum 258 10.2.3 Parametric estimation of a power spectrum 259 10.3 Robust Estimation of a Power Spectrum 259 10.3.1 Introductory remarks 259 10.3.2 Robust analogs of the discrete Fourier transform 261 10.3.3 Robust nonparametric estimation 262 10.3.4 Robust estimation of power spectrum through the Yule–Walker equations 263 10.3.5 Robust estimation through robust filtering 263 10.4 Performance Evaluation 264 10.4.1 Robustness of the median Fourier transform power spectra 264 10.4.2 Additive outlier contamination model 264 10.4.3 Disorder contamination model 264 10.4.4 Concluding remarks 270 10.5 Summary 270 References 270 11 Applications to Signal Processing: Robust Detection 272 11.1 Preliminaries 272 11.1.1 Classical approach to detection 272 11.1.2 Robust minimax approach to hypothesis testing 273 11.1.3 Asymptotically optimal robust detection of a weak signal 274 11.2 Robust Minimax Detection Based on a Distance Rule 275 11.2.1 Introductory remarks 275 11.2.2 Asymptotic robust minimax detection of a known constant signal with the 𝜌-distance rule 276 11.2.3 Detection performance in asymptotics and on finite samples 278 11.2.4 Concluding remarks 283 11.3 Robust Detection of a Weak Signal with Redescending M-Estimates 285 11.3.1 Introductory remarks 285 11.3.2 Detection error sensitivity and stability 287 11.3.3 Performance evaluation: a comparative study 289 11.3.4 Concluding remarks 291 11.4 A Unified Neyman–Pearson Detection of Weak Signals in a Fusion Model with Fading Channels and Non-Gaussian Noises 296 11.4.1 Introductory remarks 296 11.4.2 Problem setting—an asymptotic fusion rule 298 11.4.3 Asymptotic performance analysis 299 11.4.4 Numerical results 303 11.4.5 Concluding remarks 305 11.5 Summary 306 References 306 12 Final Remarks 308 12.1 Points of Growth: Open Problems in Multivariate Statistics 308 12.2 Points of Growth: Open Problems in Applications 309 Index 311

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book is aimed at students in communications and signal processing who want to extend their skills in the energy area. It describes power systems and why these backgrounds are so useful to smart grid, wireless communications being very different to traditional wireline communications.Table of ContentsPreface xv Acknowledgments xix Some Notation xxi 1 Introduction 1 1.1 Big Data: Basic Concepts 1 1.2 Data Mining with Big Data 9 1.3 A Mathematical Introduction to Big Data 13 1.4 A Mathematical Theory of Big Data 28 1.5 Smart Grid 34 1.6 Big Data and Smart Grid 36 1.7 Reading Guide 37 Bibliographical Remarks 39 Part I Fundamentals of Big Data 41 2 The Mathematical Foundations of Big Data Systems 43 2.1 Big Data Analytics 44 2.2 Big Data: Sense, Collect, Store, and Analyze 45 2.3 Intelligent Algorithms 48 2.4 Signal Processing for Smart Grid 48 2.5 Monitoring and Optimization for Power Grids 48 2.6 Distributed Sensing and Measurement for Power Grids 49 2.7 Real-time Analysis of Streaming Data 50 2.8 Salient Features of Big Data 51 2.9 Big Data for Quantum Systems 54 2.10 Big Data for Financial Systems 55 2.11 Big Data for Atmospheric Systems 73 2.12 Big Data for Sensing Networks 74 2.13 Big Data forWireless Networks 75 2.14 Big Data for Transportation 78 Bibliographical Remarks 78 3 Large Random Matrices: An Introduction 79 3.1 Modeling of Large Dimensional Data as Random Matrices 79 3.2 A Brief of Random MatrixTheory 81 3.3 Change Point of Views: From Vectors to Measures 85 3.4 The Stieltjes Transform of Measures 86 3.5 A Fundamental Result: The Marchenko–Pastur Equation 88 3.6 Linear Eigenvalue Statistics and Limit Laws 89 3.7 Central LimitTheorem for Linear Eigenvalue Statistics 99 3.8 Central LimitTheorem for Random Matrix S−1T 101 3.9 Independence for Random Matrices 103 3.10 Matrix-Valued Gaussian Distribution 110 3.11 Matrix-ValuedWishart Distribution 112 3.12 Moment Method 112 3.13 Stieltjes Transform Method 113 3.14 Concentration of the Spectral Measure for Large Random Matrices 114 3.15 Future Directions 117 Bibliographical Remarks 117 4 Linear Spectral Statistics of the Sample Covariance Matrix 121 4.1 Linear Spectral Statistics 121 4.2 Generalized Marchenko–Pastur Distributions 122 4.3 Estimation of Spectral Density Functions 127 4.4 Limiting Spectral Distribution of Time Series 146 Bibliographical Remarks 154 5 Large Hermitian Random Matrices and Free Random Variables 155 5.1 Large Economic/Financial Systems 156 5.2 Matrix-Valued Probability 157 5.3 Wishart-Levy Free Stable Random Matrices 166 5.4 Basic Concepts for Free Random Variables 168 5.5 The Analytical Spectrum of theWishart–Levy Random Matrix 172 5.6 Basic Properties of the Stieltjes Transform 176 5.7 Basic Theorems for the Stieltjes Transform 179 5.8 Free Probability for Hermitian Random Matrices 185 5.9 Random Vandermonde Matrix 196 5.10 Non-Asymptotic Analysis of State Estimation 200 Bibliographical Remarks 201 6 Large Non-Hermitian Random Matrices and Quatartenionic Free Probability Theory 203 6.1 Quatartenionic Free ProbabilityTheory 204 6.2 R-diagonalMatrices 209 6.3 The Sum of Non-Hermitian Random Matrices 216 6.4 The Product of Non-Hermitian Random Matrices 220 6.5 Singular Value Equivalent Models 226 6.6 The Power of the Non-Hermitian Random Matrix 234 6.7 Power Series of Large Non-Hermitian Random Matrices 239 6.8 Products of Random Ginibre Matrices 246 6.9 Products of Rectangular Gaussian Random Matrices 249 6.10 Product of ComplexWishart Matrices 252 6.11 Spectral Relations between Products and Powers 254 6.12 Products of Finite-Size I.I.D. Gaussian Random Matrices 258 6.13 Lyapunov Exponents for Products of Complex Gaussian Random Matrices 260 6.14 Euclidean Random Matrices 264 6.15 Random Matrices with Independent Entries and the Circular Law 273 6.16 The Circular Law and Outliers 275 6.17 Random SVD, Single Ring Law, and Outliers 285 6.18 The Elliptic Law and Outliers 295 Bibliographical Remarks 305 7 The Mathematical Foundations of Data Collection 307 7.1 Architectures and Applications for Big Data 307 7.2 Covariance Matrix Estimation 308 7.3 Spectral Estimators for Large Random Matrices 312 7.4 Asymptotic Framework for Matrix Reconstruction 319 7.5 Optimum Shrinkage 329 7.6 A Shrinkage Approach to Large-Scale Covariance Matrix Estimation 331 7.7 Eigenvectors of Large Sample Covariance Matrix Ensembles 338 7.8 A General Class of Random Matrices 351 Bibliographical Remarks 359 8 Matrix Hypothesis Testing using Large RandomMatrices 361 8.1 Motivating Examples 362 8.2 Hypothesis Test of Two Alternative Random Matrices 363 8.3 Eigenvalue Bounds for Expectation and Variance 364 8.4 Concentration of Empirical Distribution Functions 369 8.5 Random Quadratic Forms 381 8.6 Log-Determinant of Random Matrices 382 8.7 General MANOVA Matrices 383 8.8 Finite Rank Perturbations of Large Random Matrices 386 8.9 Hypothesis Tests for High-Dimensional Datasets 391 8.9.1 Motivation for Likelihood Ratio Test (LRT) and Covariance Matrix Tests 392 8.10 Roy’s Largest Root Test 428 8.11 Optimal Tests of Hypotheses for Large Random Matrices 431 8.12 Matrix Elliptically Contoured Distributions 444 8.13 Hypothesis Testing for Matrix Elliptically Contoured Distributions 446 Bibliographical Remarks 452 Part II Smart Grid 455 9 Applications and Requirements of Smart Grid 457 9.1 History 457 9.2 Concepts and Vision 458 9.3 Today’s Electric Grid 459 9.4 Future Smart Electrical Energy System 464 10 Technical Challenges for Smart Grid 471 Bibliographical Remarks 483 11 Big Data for Smart Grid 485 11.1 Power in Numbers: Big Data and Grid Infrastructure 485 11.2 Energy’s Internet:The Convergence of Big Data and the Cloud 486 11.3 Edge Analytics: Consumers, Electric Vehicles, and Distributed Generation 486 11.4 CrosscuttingThemes: Big Data 486 11.5 Cloud Computing for Smart Grid 488 11.6 Data Storage, Data Access and Data Analysis 488 11.7 The State-of-the-Art Processing Techniques of Big Data 488 11.8 Big Data Meets the Smart Electrical Grid 488 11.9 4Vs of Big Data: Volume, Variety, Value and Velocity 489 11.10 Cloud Computing for Big Data 490 11.11 Big Data for Smart Grid 490 11.12 Information Platforms for Smart Grid 491 Bibliographical Remarks 491 12 Grid Monitoring and State Estimation 493 12.1 Phase Measurement Unit 493 12.2 Optimal PMU Placement 495 12.3 State Estimation 495 12.4 Basics of State Estimation 495 12.5 Evolution of State Estimation 496 12.6 Static State Estimation 497 12.7 Forecasting-Aided State Estimation 500 12.8 Phasor Measurement Units 501 12.9 Distributed System State Estimation 502 12.10 Event-Triggered Approaches to State Estimation 502 12.11 Bad Data Detection 502 12.12 Improved Bad Data Detection 504 12.13 Cyber-Attacks 504 12.14 Line Outage Detection 504 Bibliographical Remarks 504 13 False Data Injection Attacks against State Estimation 505 13.1 State Estimation 505 13.2 False Data Injection Attacks 507 13.3 MMSE State Estimation and Generalized Likelihood Ratio Test 508 13.4 Sparse Recovery from Nonlinear Measurements 512 13.5 Real-Time Intrusion Detection 515 Bibliographical Remarks 515 14 Demand Response 517 14.1 Why Engage Demand? 517 14.2 Optimal Real-time Pricing Algorithms 520 14.3 Transportation Electrification and Vehicle-to-Grid Applications 522 14.4 Grid Storage 522 Bibliographical Remarks 523 Part III Communications and Sensing 525 15 Big Data for Communications 527 15.1 5G and Big Data 527 15.2 5GWireless Communication Networks 527 15.3 Massive Multiple Input, Multiple Output 528 15.4 Free Probability for the Capacity of the Massive MIMO Channel 537 15.5 Spectral Sensing for Cognitive Radio 539 Bibliographical Remarks 539 16 Big Data for Sensing 541 16.1 Distributed Detection and Estimation 541 16.2 Euclidean Random Matrix 547 16.3 Decentralized Computing 548 Appendix A: Some Basic Results on Free Probability 551 Appendix B: Matrix-Valued Random Variables 557 References 567 Index 601

Read more less

Book SynopsisAddresses recent advances from both the clinical and technological perspectives to provide a comprehensive presentation of m-Health This book introduces the concept of m-Health, first coined by Robert S.H. Istepanian in 2003.Trade ReviewTwo of the biggest technology breakthroughs of the 20th century have been mobile communication and the internet, improving accessibility to information and services for everyone. “M-Health” brings the best of these together to support more inclusive and connected healthcare in different ways around the world. The authors guide the readers through the recent origins of m-Health through to today`s examples, showing how m-Health is helping consumers and clinicians across a digital divide in healthcare. The book also illustrates how m-Health systems will help with illness prevention, health system productivity and more effective care for many years to come. Whether in the home or hospital, sports clinic or surgery, this book covers the entire field of m-health. —Dr Mike Short CBE, Vice President, Telefónica A review from the MHealth Journal: http://mhealth.amegroups.com/article/view/14688/14870Table of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Foreword xv Preface xvii Acknowledgments xxi Acronyms xxiii 1 Introduction to m-Health 1 1.1 Introduction, 1 1.2 The Concept of m-Health: The Beginnings, 2 1.3 Taxonomy of Telemedicine, Telehealth, e-Health, and m-Health, 5 1.4 m-Health and Digital Ubiquity, 9 1.5 The Paradigm Shift of Mobile Connectivity and m-Health Services, 12 1.6 Impact of m-Health on Cultural, Commercial, and Operational Changes, 16 1.7 Summary, 18 References, 18 2 Smart m-Health Sensing 23 2.1 Introduction, 23 2.2 Fundamentals of m-Health Sensing and a New Taxonomy, 24 2.3 Health and Wellness Monitoring Sensors, 26 2.4 Who is Monitored? 30 2.5 What is Monitored? 31 2.6 Wearable Sensors for m-Health Monitoring, 36 2.7 Wearable Fitness and Health-Tracking Devices, 45 2.8 Design Considerations for Wireless Health Sensing and Monitoring, 47 2.9 Diagnostic Sensors, 52 2.10 Prognostic and Treatment Sensors, 54 2.11 Assistive Sensors, 55 2.12 Summary, 55 References, 58 3 m-Health Computing: m-Health 2.0, Social Networks, Health Apps, Cloud, and Big Health Data 67 3.1 Introduction, 67 3.2 The Evolution of m-Health with Web 2.0 and Medicine 2.0: m-Health 2.0, 68 3.3 Mobile Health Applications (m-Health Apps), 76 3.4 Cloud Computing and m-Health, 90 3.5 m-Health and "Big Data", 101 3.6 Summary, 109 References, 110 4 m-Health and Mobile Communication Systems 119 4.1 Introduction, 119 4.2 Wireless Communications for m-Health: From "Unwired Health" to "4G-Health", 123 4.3 Wireless Metropolitan Area Networks for m-Health, 144 4.4 Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN) for m-Health, 147 4.5 Personal Area Networks (PAN) and Body Area Networks (BAN) for m-Health, 151 4.6 Machine-to-Machine Communications and Internet of Things, 166 4.7 Summary, 177 References, 179 5 m-Health Care Models and Applications 189 5.1 Introduction, 189 5.2 Mobile Phone m-Health Systems and Their Impact on Future Healthcare Services, 191 5.3 m-Health for Chronic Disease Management and Monitoring Applications, 200 5.4 Mobile Health for Other Healthcare Services, 229 5.5 Summary, 234 References, 237 6 m-Health and Global Healthcare 251 6.1 Introduction, 251 6.2 m-Health Technologies for Global Health, 254 6.3 Global m-Health Initiatives for the Developing World: Healthcare Challenges and Impacts, 260 6.4 Global m-Health for the Developing World: Barriers and Recommendations, 294 6.5 Summary, 309 References, 311 7 m-Health Ecosystems, Interoperability Standards, and Markets 323 7.1 Introduction, 323 7.2 m-Health Stakeholders and Ecosystems, 325 7.3 m-Health Interoperability and Standardization, 337 7.4 m-Health Markets and Business Models, 345 7.5 Summary, 351 References, 352 8 The Future of m-Health: Progress or Retrogression? 355 8.1 Introduction, 355 8.2 Future Trends of m-Health, 357 8.3 Challenges and Expectations: m-Health "Market" Versus "Science", 366 8.4 Future m-Health Scenarios, 370 8.5 Summary, 374 References, 375 Appendix 379 Index 381

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis book aims to provide insights on new trends in power systems operation and control and to present, in detail, analysis methods of the power system behavior (mainly its dynamics) as well as the mathematical models for the main components of power plants and the control systems implemented in dispatch centers. Particularly, evaluation methods for rotor angle stability and voltage stability as well as control mechanism of the frequency and voltage are described. Illustrative examples and graphical representations help readers across many disciplines acquire ample knowledge on the respective subjects.Trade Review“For power electronics professionals there is great opportunity to assist society energy security needs with innovations in power electronics for reactive power control, power flow control, advanced energy storage technologies for frequency regulation, secure communications, and other aspects of the smart grid.” (IEEE Power Electronics Society, 1 May 2013)Table of ContentsForeword xxiii Acknowledgments xxv Contributors xxvii 1. INTRODUCTION 1Mircea Eremia and Mohammad Shahidehpour PART I POWER SYSTEM MODELING AND CONTROL 7 2. SYNCHRONOUS GENERATOR AND INDUCTION MOTOR 9Mircea Eremia and Constantin Bulac 2.1. Theory and Modeling of Synchronous Generator 9 2.2. Theory and Modeling of the Induction Motor 114 3. MODELING THE MAIN COMPONENTS OF THE CLASSICAL POWER PLANTS 137Mohammad Shahidehpour, Mircea Eremia, and Lucian Toma 3.1. Introduction 137 3.2. Types of Turbines 138 3.3. Thermal Power Plants 143 3.4. Combined-Cycle Power Plants 158 3.5. Nuclear Power Plants 167 3.6. Hydraulic Power Plants 169 4. WIND POWER GENERATION 179Mohammad Shahidehpour and Mircea Eremia 4.1. Introduction 179 4.2. Some Characteristics of Wind Power Generation 181 4.3. State of the Art Technologies 184 4.4. Modeling the Wind Turbine Generators 200 4.5. Fault Ride-Through Capability 223 5. SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENTS CALCULATION 229Nouredine Hadjsaid, Ion TriSstiu, and Lucian Toma 5.1. Introduction 229 5.2. Characteristics of Short-Circuit Currents 232 5.3. Methods of Short-Circuit Currents Calculation 236 5.4. Calculation of Short-Circuit Current Components 264 6. ACTIVE POWER AND FREQUENCY CONTROL 291Les Pereira 6.1. Introduction 291 6.2. Frequency Deviations in Practice 293 6.3. Typical Standards and Policies for "Active Power and Frequency Control" or "Load Frequency Control" 294 6.4. System Modeling, Inertia, Droop, Regulation, and Dynamic Frequency Response 297 6.5. Governor Modeling 302 6.6. AGC Principles and Modeling 328 6.7. Other Topics of Interest Related to Load Frequency Control 336 7. VOLTAGE AND REACTIVE POWER CONTROL 340Sandro Corsi and Mircea Eremia 7.1. Relationship Between Active and Reactive Powers and Voltage 342 7.2. Equipments for Voltage and Reactive Power Control 347 7.3. Grid Voltage and Reactive Power Control Methods 374 7.4. Grid Hierarchical Voltage Regulation 399 7.5. Implementation Study of the Secondary Voltage Regulation in Romania 423 7.6. Examples of Hierarchical Voltage Control in the World 429 PART II POWER SYSTEM STABILITY AND PROTECTION 451 8. BACKGROUND OF POWER SYSTEM STABILITY 453S.S. (Mani) Venkata, Mircea Eremia, and Lucian Toma 8.1. Introduction 453 8.2. Classification of Power Systems Stability 453 8.3. Parallelism Between Voltage Stability and Angular Stability 469 8.4. Importance of Security for Power System Stability 469 9. SMALL-DISTURBANCE ANGLE STABILITY AND ELECTROMECHANICAL OSCILLATION DAMPING 477Roberto Marconato and Alberto Berizzi 9.1. Introduction 477 9.2. The Dynamic Matrix 478 9.3. A General Simplified Approach 482 9.4. Major Factors Affecting the Damping of Electromechanical Oscillations 501 9.5. Damping Improvement 546 9.6. Typical Cases of Interarea Or Low-Frequency Electromechanical Oscillations 564 10. TRANSIENT STABILITY 570Nikolai Voropai and Constantin Bulac 10.1. General Aspects 570 10.2. Direct Methods for Transient Stability Assessment 572 10.3. Integration Methods for Transient Stability Assessment 603 10.4. Dynamic Equivalents 614 10.5. Transient Stability Assessment of Large Electric Power Systems 638 10.6. Application 645 11. VOLTAGE STABILITY 657Mircea Eremia and Constantin Bulac 11.1. Introduction 657 11.2. System Characteristics and Load Modeling 658 11.3. Static Aspects of Voltage Stability 667 11.4. Voltage Instability Mechanisms: Interaction Between Electrical Network, Loads, and Control Devices 674 11.5. Voltage Stability Assessment Methods 688 11.6. Voltage Instability Countermeasures 716 11.7. Application 724 12. POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION 737Klaus-Peter Brand and Ivan De Mesmaeker 12.1. Introduction 737 12.2. Summary of IEC 61850 744 12.3. The Protection Chain in Details 746 12.4. Transmission and Distribution Power System Structures 753 12.5. Properties of the Three-Phase Systems Relevant for Protection 755 12.6. Protection Functions Sorted According to the Objects Protected 759 12.7. From Single Protection Functions to System Protection 773 12.8. Conclusions 780 PART III GRID BLACKOUTS AND RESTORATION PROCESS 787 13. MAJOR GRID BLACKOUTS: ANALYSIS, CLASSIFICATION, AND PREVENTION 789Yvon Besanger, Mircea Eremia, and Nikolai Voropai 13.1. Introduction 789 13.2. Description of Some Previous Blackouts 792 13.3. Analysis of Blackouts 835 13.4. Economical and Social Effects 847 13.5. Recommendations for Preventing Blackouts 849 13.6. On Some Defense and Restoration Actions 850 13.7. Survivability/vulnerability of Electric Power Systems 856 13.8. Conclusions 860 14. RESTORATION PROCESSES AFTER BLACKOUTS 864Alberto Borghetti, Carlo Alberto Nucci, and Mario Paolone 14.1. Introduction 864 14.2. Overview of The Restoration Process 865 14.3. Black-Start-Up Capabilities of Thermal Power Plant: Modeling and Computer Simulations 869 14.4. Description of Computer Simulators 888 14.5. Concluding Remarks 896 15. COMPUTER SIMULATION OF SCALE-BRIDGING TRANSIENTS IN POWER SYSTEMS 900Kai Strunz and Feng Gao 15.1. Bridging of Instantaneous and Phasor Signals 901 15.2. Network Modeling 903 15.3. Modeling of Power System Components 909 15.4. Application: Simulation of Blackout 923 References 926 Index 929

Read more less

Book SynopsisProviding an extensive overview of the radio resource management problem in femtocell networks, this invaluable book considers both code division multiple access femtocells and orthogonal frequency-division multiple access femtocells.Table of ContentsPREFACE xv CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW OF MULTI-TIER CELLULAR WIRELESS NETWORKS 1 CHAPTER 2 RESOURCE ALLOCATION APPROACHES IN MULTI-TIER NETWORKS 31 CHAPTER 3 RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN OFDMA-BASED MULTI-TIER CELLULAR NETWORKS 51 CHAPTER 4 RESOURCE ALLOCATION FOR CLUSTERED SMALL CELLS IN TWO-TIER OFDMA NETWORKS 84 CHAPTER 5 RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN TWO-TIER NETWORKS USING FRACTIONAL FREQUENCY REUSE 102 CHAPTER 6 CALL ADMISSION CONTROL IN FRACTIONAL FREQUENCY REUSE-BASED TWO-TIER NETWORKS 123 CHAPTER 7 GAME THEORETIC APPROACHES FOR RESOURCE MANAGEMENT IN MULTI-TIER NETWORKS 155 CHAPTER 8 RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN CDMA-BASED MULTI-TIER HETNETS 206 CHAPTER 9 SELF-ORGANIZING SMALL CELL NETWORKS 250 CHAPTER 10 RESOURCE ALLOCATION IN MULTI-TIER NETWORKS WITH COGNITIVE SMALL CELLS 302 INDEX 321

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive reference book codifying the various standards releases for High Speed Packet Access (HSPA) wireless technology HSPA evolution has maintained its prominence through Releases 7-11 but the evolution is coming to an end with Release 12, with the focus moving to LTE.Table of ContentsForeword xv Preface xvii Abbreviations xix 1 Introduction 1 Harri Holma 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 HSPA Global Deployments 1 1.3 Mobile Devices 3 1.4 Traffic Growth 3 1.5 HSPA Technology Evolution 5 1.6 HSPA Optimization Areas 7 1.7 Summary 7 2 HSDPA and HSUPA in Release 5 and 6 9 Antti Toskala 2.1 Introduction 9 2.2 3GPP Standardization of HSDPA and HSUPA 9 2.3 HSDPA Technology Key Characteristics 10 2.4 HSDPA Mobility 16 2.5 HSDPA UE Capability 17 2.6 HSUPA Technology Key Characteristics 17 2.7 HSUPA Mobility 22 2.8 HSUPA UE Capability 23 2.9 HSPA Architecture Evolution 23 2.10 Conclusions 24 References 24 3 Multicarrier and Multiantenna MIMO 27 Antti Toskala, Jeroen Wigard, Matthias Hesse, Ryszard Dokuczal, and Maciej Januszewski 3.1 Introduction 27 3.2 Dual-Cell Downlink and Uplink 27 3.2.1 Dual-Cell Downlink 28 3.2.2 Dual-Cell HSUPA 32 3.3 Four-Carrier HSDPA and Beyond 33 3.4 Multiband HSDPA 36 3.5 Downlink MIMO 38 3.5.1 Space Time Transmit Diversity – STTD 39 3.5.2 Closed-Loop Mode 1 Transmit Diversity 39 3.5.3 2 × 2 MIMO and TxAA 40 3.5.4 4-Branch MIMO 42 3.6 Uplink MIMO and Uplink Closed-Loop Transmit Diversity 46 3.6.1 Uplink MIMO Channel Architecture 47 3.6.2 Scheduling and Rank Selection with Uplink MIMO 49 3.6.3 Uplink MIMO Performance Evaluation 50 3.7 Conclusions 52 References 52 4 Continuous Packet Connectivity and High Speed Common Channels 53 Harri Holma and Karri Ranta-aho 4.1 Introduction 53 4.2 Continuous Packet Connectivity (CPC) 54 4.2.1 Uplink DTX 55 4.2.2 Downlink DRX 58 4.2.3 HS-SCCH-Less Transmission 59 4.3 High Speed FACH 61 4.4 High Speed RACH 63 4.5 High Speed FACH and RACH Enhancements 66 4.6 Fast Dormancy 67 4.7 Uplink Interference Reduction 68 4.8 Terminal Power Consumption Minimization 72 4.9 Signaling Reduction 73 4.10 Latency Optimization 74 4.11 Summary 75 References 75 5 HSDPA Multiflow 77 Thomas Höhne, Karri Ranta-aho, Alexander Sayenko, and Antti Toskala 5.1 Introduction 77 5.2 Multiflow Overview 77 5.2.1 Multiflow Principle 78 5.2.2 Multiflow Configurations 78 5.3 Multiflow Protocol Stack 80 5.4 Multiflow Impacts on UE Architecture 80 5.5 Uplink Feedback for Multiflow 81 5.5.1 HS-DPCCH Structure with Multiflow 81 5.5.2 Dynamic Carrier Activation 84 5.5.3 Timing of Uplink Feedback 84 5.5.4 HS-DPCCH Power Levels 86 5.6 RLC Impact 87 5.6.1 RLC Timer_Reordering 87 5.6.2 RLC Reset 88 5.7 Iub/Iur Enhancements 89 5.7.1 Flow Control 89 5.7.2 Multiflow Extensions 90 5.8 Multiflow Combined with Other Features 91 5.8.1 Downlink MIMO 91 5.8.2 Uplink Closed-Loop Transmit Diversity and Uplink MIMO 91 5.8.3 DTX/DRX 92 5.9 Setting Up Multiflow 93 5.10 Robustness 94 5.10.1 Robustness for RRC Signaling 94 5.10.2 Radio Link Failure 94 5.10.3 Robustness for User Plane Data 96 5.11 Multiflow Performance 96 5.11.1 Multiflow Performance in Macro Networks 96 5.11.2 Multiflow Performance with HetNets 96 5.12 Multiflow and Other Multipoint Transmission Techniques 100 5.13 Conclusions 100 References 100 6 Voice Evolution 103 Harri Holma and Karri Ranta-aho 6.1 Introduction 103 6.2 Voice Quality with AMR Wideband 103 6.3 Voice Capacity with Low Rate AMR 106 6.4 VoIP Over HSPA 107 6.5 Circuit-Switched Voice Over HSPA 111 6.6 Voice Over HSPA Mobility 112 6.7 Circuit-Switched Fallback 114 6.8 Single Radio Voice Call Continuity 115 6.9 Summary 116 References 116 7 Heterogeneous Networks 117 Harri Holma and Fernando Sanchez Moya 7.1 Introduction 117 7.2 Small Cell Drivers 117 7.3 Base Station Categories 118 7.4 Small Cell Dominance Areas 119 7.5 HetNet Uplink–Downlink Imbalance 122 7.6 HetNet Capacity and Data Rates 124 7.7 HetNet Field Measurements 128 7.8 Femto Cells 130 7.9 WLAN Interworking 133 7.9.1 Access Network Discovery and Selection Function (ANDSF) 133 7.9.2 Hotspot 2.0 135 7.9.3 Differences between ANDSF and Hotspot 2.0 136 7.10 Summary 136 References 137 8 Advanced UE and BTS Algorithms 139 Antti Toskala and Hisashi Onozawa 8.1 Introduction 139 8.2 Advanced UE Receivers 139 8.3 BTS Scheduling Alternatives 143 8.4 BTS Interference Cancellation 145 8.5 Further Advanced UE and BTS Algorithms 149 8.6 Conclusions 150 References 151 9 IMT-Advanced Performance Evaluation 153 Karri Ranta-aho and Antti Toskala 9.1 Introduction 153 9.2 ITU-R Requirements for IMT-Advanced 153 9.3 3GPP Features to Consider in Meeting the IMT-Advanced Requirements 155 9.4 Performance Evaluation 157 9.4.1 Eight-Carrier HSDPA 157 9.4.2 Four-Antenna MIMO for HSDPA 159 9.4.3 Uplink Beamforming, MIMO and 64QAM 160 9.4.4 HSPA+ Multiflow 162 9.4.5 Performance in Different ITU-R Scenarios 163 9.4.6 Latency and Handover Interruption Analysis 164 9.5 Conclusions 168 References 168 10 HSPA+ Performance 169 Pablo Tapia and Brian Olsen 10.1 Introduction 169 10.2 Test Tools and Methodology 170 10.3 Single-Carrier HSPA+ 173 10.3.1 Test Scenarios 173 10.3.2 Latency Measurements 174 10.3.3 Good Signal Strength Scenario 175 10.3.4 Mid Signal Strength Scenario 177 10.3.5 Poor Signal Strength Scenario 179 10.3.6 Summary of Stationary Tests 182 10.3.7 Drive Test Performance of Single-Carrier HSPA+ 183 10.4 Dual-Cell HSPA+ 188 10.4.1 Stationary Performance 189 10.4.2 Dual-Carrier Drive Performance 192 10.4.3 Impact of Vendor Implementation 196 10.5 Analysis of Other HSPA Features 198 10.5.1 64 QAM Gains 198 10.5.2 UE Advanced Receiver Field Results 200 10.5.3 2 × 2 MIMO 203 10.5.4 Quality of Service (QoS) 206 10.6 Comparison of HSPA+ with LTE 209 10.7 Summary 211 References 212 11 Network Planning 213 Brian Olsen, Pablo Tapia, Jussi Reunanen, and Harri Holma 11.1 Introduction 213 11.2 Radio Frequency Planning 213 11.2.1 Link Budget 215 11.2.2 Antenna and Power Planning 219 11.2.3 Automatic Cell Planning (ACP) Tools 222 11.2.4 Neighbor Planning 223 11.3 Multilayer Management in HSPA 224 11.3.1 Layering Strategy within Single Band 225 11.3.2 Layering Strategy with Multiple UMTS Bands 230 11.3.3 Summary 233 11.4 RAN Capacity Planning 233 11.4.1 Discussion on Capacity Triggers 234 11.4.2 Effect of Voice/Data Load 237 11.4.3 Uplink Noise Discussion 238 11.4.4 Sector Dimensioning 240 11.4.5 RNC Dimensioning 242 11.5 Packet Core and Transport Planning 243 11.5.1 Backhaul Dimensioning 244 11.6 Spectrum Refarming 246 11.6.1 Introduction 246 11.6.2 UMTS Spectrum Requirements 247 11.6.3 GSM Features for Refarming 249 11.6.4 Antenna Sharing Solutions 249 11.7 Summary 250 References 251 12 Radio Network Optimization 253 Pablo Tapia and Carl Williams 12.1 Introduction 253 12.2 Optimization of the Radio Access Network Parameters 254 12.2.1 Optimization of Antenna Parameters 255 12.2.2 Optimization of Power Parameters 257 12.2.3 Neighbor List Optimization 262 12.2.4 HS Cell Change Optimization 265 12.2.5 IRAT Handover Optimization 268 12.2.6 Optimization of Radio State Transitions 271 12.2.7 Uplink Noise Optimization 275 12.3 Optimization Tools 281 12.3.1 Geolocation 284 12.3.2 User Tracing (Minimization of Drive Tests) 285 12.3.3 Self Organizing Network (SON) Tools 286 12.4 Summary 292 Reference 292 13 Smartphone Performance 293 Pablo Tapia, Michael Thelander, Timo Halonen, Jeff Smith, and Mika Aalto 13.1 Introduction 293 13.2 Smartphone Traffic Analysis 294 13.3 Smartphone Data Consumption 297 13.4 Smartphone Signaling Analysis 299 13.4.1 Smartphone Profiling 301 13.4.2 Ranking Based on Key Performance Indicators 302 13.4.3 Test Methodology 303 13.4.4 KPIs Analyzed during Profiling 304 13.4.5 Use Case Example: Analysis of Signaling by Various Mobile OSs 306 13.5 Smartphone Performance 308 13.5.1 User Experience KPIs 310 13.5.2 Battery Performance 311 13.5.3 Coverage Limits for Different Services 313 13.5.4 Effect of TCP Performance 315 13.5.5 Web Browsing Performance 318 13.5.6 Video Streaming 321 13.6 Use Case Study: Analysis of Smartphone User Experience in the US 330 13.7 Summary 334 References 335 14 Multimode Multiband Terminal Design Challenges 337 Jean-Marc Lemenager, Luigi Di Capua, Victor Wilkerson, Mikaël Guenais, Thierry Meslet, and Laurent Noël 14.1 Cost Reduction in Multimode Multiband Terminals 340 14.1.1 Evolution of Silicon Area and Component Count 340 14.1.2 Transceiver Architecture Evolutions 342 14.1.3 RF Front End 350 14.2 Power Consumption Reduction in Terminals 369 14.2.1 Smartphone Power Consumption 369 14.2.2 Application Engines 371 14.2.3 Power Amplifiers 378 14.2.4 Continuous Packet Connectivity 382 14.3 Conclusion 387 References 389 15 LTE Interworking 393 Harri Holma and Hannu Raassina 15.1 Introduction 393 15.2 Packet Data Interworking 394 15.2.1 Example Trace of 3G to LTE Cell Reselection 398 15.2.2 Example Trace of LTE to 3G Redirection 400 15.3 Circuit-Switched Fallback 406 15.3.1 Example Circuit-Switched Fallback with Location Area Update 410 15.3.2 Example Circuit-Switched Fallback without Location Area Update 413 15.4 Matching of LTE and 3G Coverage Areas 415 15.5 Single Radio Voice Call Continuity (SRVCC) 417 15.6 Summary 419 References 419 16 HSPA Evolution Outlook 421 Antti Toskala and Karri Ranta-aho 16.1 Introduction 421 16.2 HSPA-LTE and WLAN Interworking 421 16.3 Scalable Bandwidth UMTS 423 16.4 DCH Enhancements 425 16.5 HSUPA Enhancements 427 16.6 Heterogenous Networks 428 16.7 Other Areas of Improvement for Release 12 and Beyond 430 16.8 Conclusions 430 References 431 Index 433

Read more less

Book SynopsisThis valuable resource offers a wealth of practical and conceptual guidance to all those engaged in struggles for social justice around the world. It explains in accessible language and painstaking detail how to deploy and to understand the tools of media and communication in advancing the goals of social, cultural, and political change.Trade Review“As a whole, this collection provides an international perspective on development communication and social change, making it a strong addition to courses on activist rhetoric, development communication, and international communication.” (Technical Communication, 1 February 2015) Table of ContentsNotes on Contributors viii Series Editor’s Preface xiii Acknowledgmentsxiv Introduction 1 Karin Gwinn Wilkins, Thomas Tufte, and Rafael Obregon Part I Communicating Development and Social Change 5 1 Development Communication and Social Change in Historical Context 7 Pradip Ninan Thomas 2 Globalization and Development 20 Toby Miller 3 Political Economy of Development 40 James Pamment 4 Advocacy Communication 57 Karin Gwinn Wilkins 5 Equality and Human Rights 72 Cees J. Hamelink 6 Public Health 92 Colin Tinei Chasi 7 Indigenous Communication: From Multiculturalism to Interculturality 108 Alfonso Gumucio-Dagron 8 Communication, Development, and the Natural Environment 125 Elske van de Fliert 9 Emerging Issues in Communicating Development and Social Change 138 Karin Gwinn Wilkins Part II Developing Strategic Communication for Social Change 145 10 The Strategic Politics of Participatory Communication 147 Silvio Waisbord 11 Rethinking Entertainment-Education for Development and Social Change 168 Rafael Obregon and Thomas Tufte 12 Storytelling for Social Change 189 Kate Winskell and Daniel Enger 13 Theater for Development 207 David Kerr 14 Media Development 226 James Deane 15 Economics and Communication for Development and Social Change 242 Emile G. McAnany 16 Peace Communication for Social Change: Dealing with Violent Conflict 259 Ana Fernández Viso 17 Social and Behavior Change Communication 278 Neill McKee, Antje Becker-Benton, and Emily Bockh 18 A Participatory Framework for Researching and Evaluating Communication for Development and Social Change 298 Jo Tacchi and June Lennie 19 Emerging Issues in Strategic Communication for Development and Social Change 321 Rafael Obregon Part III Activist Approaches for Development and Social Change 329 20 Social Movement Media in the Process of Constructive Social Change 331 John D.H. Downing 21 Transnational Civil Society and Social Movements 351 Anastasia Kavada 22 Communication for Transparency and Social Accountability 370 Norbert Wildermuth 23 Citizens’ Journalism: Shifting Public Spheres from Elites to Citizens 393 Clemencia Rodríguez and Ana María Miralles 24 Citizens’ Media: Citizens’ Watchdog Groups and Observatories 411 Rosa María Alfaro Moreno 25 Community Radio 426 Tanja Bosch 26 Youth-Generated Media 439 Joe F. Khalil 27 Video for Change 453 Tina Askanius 28 Emerging Issues in Activism and Social Change Communication 471 Thomas Tufte Index 478

Read more less

Book SynopsisA comprehensive summary of theoretical and practical developments in LTE Heterogeneous Networks The last decade has witnessed the proliferation of mobile broadband data and the trend is likely to increase in the coming years. Current cellular networks are ill equipped to deal with this surge in demand. To satisfy user demand and maximize profits, a new paradigm to operate networks is needed. Heterogeneous networks, that deploy an overlay of small cells with limited coverage and transmit power, over a macro coverage area is the solution by providing capacity and coverage where it is needed. This book presents a comprehensive overview of small cell based heterogeneous networks within the framework of 3GPP LTE-Advanced which is the major enabler of current and future heterogeneous networks. The book first establishes the basics of LTE standards 8 -10. Wherever relevant, the underlying theory of wireless communications is explained and the signaling and protoTable of ContentsAbout the Authors xi Foreword xiii Preface xv Acknowledgements xvii List of Acronyms xix 1 An Introduction to Heterogeneous Networks 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 Heterogeneous Network Deployments 3 1.2.1 Distributed Antenna Systems 3 1.2.2 Public Access Picocells/Metrocells 4 1.2.3 Consumer-Grade Femtocells 4 1.2.4 WiFi Systems 5 1.3 Features of Heterogeneous Networks 5 1.3.1 Association and Load Balancing 5 1.3.2 Interference Management 6 1.3.3 Self-Organizing Networks 6 1.3.4 Mobility Management 7 1.4 Evolution of Cellular Technology and Standards 7 1.4.1 3GPP Standardization Process 9 References 10 Part I OVERVIEW 2 Fundamentals of LTE 15 2.1 Introduction 15 2.2 LTE Core Network 17 2.2.1 Control Plane 18 2.2.2 User Plane 19 2.2.3 Practical Implementations of the Core Network 19 2.3 LTE Radio Access Network 20 2.3.1 Control Plane 20 2.3.2 User Plane 23 2.4 Connectivity Among eNodeBs: The X2 Interface 24 2.4.1 Load- and Interference-Related Information 26 2.4.2 Handover-Related Information 26 2.5 Technologies in LTE 27 2.5.1 Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing 27 2.5.2 Multiple Antenna Communications 36 References 42 3 LTE Signal Structure and Physical Channels 45 3.1 Introduction 45 3.2 LTE Signal Structure 45 3.3 Introduction to LTE Physical Channels and Reference Signals 48 3.4 Resource Block Assignment 51 3.5 Downlink Physical Channels 54 3.5.1 Physical Broadcast Channel (PBCH) 55 3.5.2 Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH) 57 3.5.3 Physical Multicast Channel (PMCH) 58 3.5.4 Physical Control Format Indicator Channel (PCFICH) 58 3.5.5 Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel (PHICH) 59 3.5.6 Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) 60 3.6 Uplink Physical Channels 67 3.6.1 Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH) 67 3.6.2 Physical Uplink Control Channel (PUCCH) 68 3.6.3 Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) 70 References 71 4 Physical Layer Signal Processing in LTE 73 4.1 Introduction 73 4.2 Downlink Synchronization Signals 73 4.2.1 Primary Synchronization Signal 74 4.2.2 Secondary Synchronization Signal 76 4.3 Reference Signals 77 4.3.1 Downlink Reference Signals 77 4.3.2 Uplink Reference Signals 84 4.4 Channel Estimation and Feedback 85 4.4.1 Basics of Link Adaptation 85 4.4.2 Feedback for MIMO OFDM Channels 88 4.4.3 New Features in LTE-Advanced 92 4.5 Design Paradigm of LTE Signaling 94 4.6 Scheduling and Resource Allocation 94 4.6.1 Scheduling Algorithms 96 4.6.2 Inter-eNodeB Coordination for Resource Allocation in LTE 98 References 100 Part II INTER-CELL INTERFERENCE COORDINATION 5 Release 10 Enhanced ICIC 103 5.1 Introduction 103 5.2 Typical Deployment Scenarios 103 5.2.1 Macro–Pico Deployment Scenario 104 5.2.2 Macro–Femto Deployment Scenario 107 5.3 Time Domain Techniques 110 5.3.1 Almost Blank Subframe 110 5.3.2 ABS Use Cases 113 5.3.3 UE Measurement and Reporting 116 5.3.4 Backhaul Support 118 5.3.5 Simulation Results 119 5.4 Power Control Techniques 123 5.4.1 Target Scenario 123 5.4.2 Power Control Schemes 124 5.4.3 Results from Realistic Deployments 125 5.5 Carrier Aggregation-Based eICIC 127 References 130 6 Release 11 Further Enhanced ICIC: Transceiver Processing 133 6.1 Introduction 133 6.2 Typical Deployment Scenarios 133 6.3 Techniques for Mitigating CRS Interference 136 6.3.1 Receiver-Based Techniques 136 6.3.2 Transmitter-Based Techniques 140 6.4 Weak Cell Detection 142 6.5 Non-Zero-Power ABS 144 References 147 7 Release 11 Further Enhanced ICIC: Remaining Topics 149 7.1 Carrier-Based Interference Coordination 149 7.1.1 Operational Carrier Selection 150 7.1.2 Primary and Secondary Cell Selection 153 7.2 Enhanced PDCCH for Interference Coordination 154 References 159 Part III COORDINATED MULTI-POINT TRANSMISSION RECEPTION 8 Downlink CoMP: Signal Processing 163 8.1 Introduction 163 8.2 CoMP Scenarios in 3GPP 164 8.2.1 Homogeneous Networks with Intra-Site CoMP 164 8.2.2 Homogeneous Networks with High-Power RRHs 165 8.2.3 Heterogeneous Networks with Low-Power RRHs with Cell IDs Different from the Macro 165 8.2.4 Heterogeneous Networks with Low-Power RRHs with Cell IDs the Same as the Macro 166 8.3 CoMP Sets 167 8.3.1 RRM Measurement Set/CoMP Resource Management Set 167 8.3.2 CoMP Measurement Set 168 8.3.3 CoMP Cooperating Set 169 8.4 CoMP Transmission in 3GPP 169 8.4.1 Coordinated Scheduling/Beamforming 169 8.4.2 Dynamic Point Selection 172 8.4.3 Joint Transmission 177 8.5 Comparison of Different CoMP Categories 180 References 182 9 Downlink CoMP: Standardization Impact 185 9.1 Introduction 185 9.2 Modification of Reference Signals 185 9.2.1 Modifications in CSI-RS 185 9.2.2 Modifications in DMRS 186 9.3 CSI Processes 189 9.3.1 UE Processing Complexity and CSI Reference Resources 191 9.3.2 Inheritance and Reference Processes 192 9.4 PDSCH Rate Matching 193 9.5 Quasi-Co-Location of Antenna Ports 195 9.5.1 Quasi-Co-Location Between the Same Antenna Ports 197 9.5.2 Quasi-Co-Location Between Different Antenna Ports 198 9.6 New Transmission Mode and DCI Format 200 9.7 Backhaul Support for CoMP 201 9.8 Summary 203 References 203 Part IV UPCOMING TECHNOLOGIES 10 Dense Small Cell Deployments 207 10.1 Introduction 207 10.2 Evolution of Small Cells 207 10.2.1 Deployment Scenarios 209 10.3 Efficient Operation of Small Cells 212 10.3.1 Dual Connectivity 214 10.3.2 ICIC Mechanism 216 10.3.3 Small Cell Discovery 220 10.4 Control Signaling Enhancement 223 10.4.1 Multi-Subframe Scheduling 223 10.4.2 Cross-Subframe Scheduling 224 10.5 Reference Signal Overhead Reduction 225 10.5.1 Downlink DMRS 225 10.5.2 Uplink DMRS 227 References 228 11 TD-LTE Enhancements for Small Cells 231 11.1 Enhancements for Dynamic TDD 231 11.1.1 TDD UL/DL Reconfiguration Scenarios in 3GPP 232 11.1.2 Interference Mitigation Schemes 234 11.2 FDD-TDD Joint Operation 239 11.2.1 Deployment Scenarios 240 11.2.2 Issues and Potential Solutions 241 References 243 12 Full Dimension MIMO 245 12.1 Introduction 245 12.2 Antenna Systems Architecture: Passive and Active 245 12.3 Antenna Patterns 248 12.3.1 Passive Antenna Element Pattern 248 12.3.2 Active Antenna Systems 250 12.3.3 AAS with Additional Mechanical Tilt 253 12.3.4 Effect of Multipath Fading Channels 253 12.4 FD-MIMO Deployment Scenarios 254 12.4.1 UE-Specific FD-MIMO 254 12.4.2 Cell-Specific FD-MIMO 255 12.4.3 System-Specific FD-MIMO 255 12.5 Conclusion 256 References 256 13 Future Trends in Heterogeneous Networks 257 13.1 Summary 257 13.2 Small Cells and Cloud RAN 258 13.3 Small Cells, Millimeter Wave Communications and Massive MIMO 259 13.4 Small Cells and Big Data 260 13.5 Concluding Remarks 260 References 260 Index 263

Read more less

Book SynopsisFast-Tracking Your Career provides engineers and IT professionals with a complete set of soft skills they can use to become more effective on the job and gain recognition from management and colleagues. The 11 core skills covered here are accompanied by more than 40 detailed guidelines on how to master those skills. The book offers first-rate advice on how to go about acquiring communication skills, people skills, presentation skills, time management skills, and others. Specific examples about current situations are discussed, exploring the impact of the Facebook phenomenon and the subprime mortgage crisis.Visit the author''s website for more information:www.FastTrackingCareers.comTrade Review“Whether you're an engineer, IT professional, or other technical professional, Fast-Tracking Your Career helps you advance your career by developing business and personal skills that are as sharp as your technical abilities.” (New Tech Review, 1 June 2013)Table of ContentsForeword xiii Dr. Sorel Reisman Guest Introduction i xv Dr. Simon Y. Liu Guest Introduction ii xvii Dr. Arnold "Jay" Bragg Guest Introduction iii xix Frank E. Ferrante Preface xxi Acknowledgments xxiii About the Author xxv Introduction and Summary 1 Engineers Are Potentially Better Positioned as Executives, 1 Categorization of Smart Soft Skills, 2 Rules for Mastering Smart Soft Skills, 3 Relationships among the Soft Skills, 8 PART ONE: Communications: The Absolutely Necessary Chapter 1 Communications Smart 13 Rule 1: Being always ready for elevator pitches/speeches, 14 Rule 2: Mastering a presentation by mastering the onset, 16 Rule 3: Using three diagrams to simplify complexity, 18 Rule 4: Sizing up and resonating with the audience, 20 Rule 5: Being careful of careless comments, 23 Rule 6: Using plain language, 24 Rule 7: Using jokes and self-deprecating humor, 26 PART TWO: Dealing with People: The Essential Chapter 2 People Smart 31 Rule 1: Getting accepted by accepting others fi rst, 32 Rule 2: Winning by understanding both ourselves and our counterparts, 34 Rule 3: Being aggressive by being nonaggressive, 36 Rule 4: Gaining by giving, 38 Rule 5: Successful networking by networking less, 41 Rule 6: Being heard by listening, 46 Chapter 3 Marketing Smart 49 Rule 1: Sizing up and resonating with our "customers", 51 Rule 2: Putting a positive spin on our "product", 53 Rule 3: Making a convincing presentation with a well-crafted presentation, 53 Rule 4: Inciting enthusiasm with enthusiasm, 54 A Marketing Role Model: Steve Jobs (and His Embodiment, Apple), 55 PART THREE: Dealing with the Self: The Basic Chapter 4 Work Smart 59 Rule 1: Achieving outstanding results by not seeking perfection, 60 Rule 2: Avoiding blunders of overconfi dence, 62 Rule 3: Focusing on self-examination, not on blaming others, when things gone awry, 63 Chapter 5 Time Smart 65 Rule 1: Investing time with the same zeal as venture capitalists investing money, 66 Rule 2: Killing two birds with one stone, 68 Rule 3: Minding ROI, 70 Rule 4: Making nonproductive time productive, 71 Rule 5: Turning spare time into opportunities, 73 Rule 6: Keeping the mind sharp by taking catnaps, 74 Chapter 6 Career Smart 77 Rule 1: Opting to be a big fi sh in a small pond, 78 Rule 2: Hopping to a more opportune pond at opportune moments, 80 Rule 3: Never polishing a sneaker, 84 Rule 4: Making a good lasting impression by making a good first impression, 86 PART FOUR: Dealing with the Boss: Earning Trust and Recognition Chapter 7 Job-Interview Smart 89 Rule 1: Being well prepared by collecting relevant information, 90 Rule 2: Putting a positive spin on our qualifi cations, 91 Rule 3: Preparing targeted elevator pitches/speeches, 91 Rule 4: Sizing up and resonating with the interviewer, 92 Rule 5: Winning interviewers’ confi dence in us by exhibiting confidence, 93 Rule 6: Avoiding gaffes by avoiding overconfi dence, 93 Stories of Failed Interviews, 93 A Successful Interview Story, 98 Chapter 8 Boss Smart 101 Rule 1: Winning trust by showing loyalty, 102 Rule 2: Gaining gratitude by sharing credit and taking blame, 104 Rule 3: Being astute by watching for nuances, 105 Rule 4: Being proactive and farsighted, 107 Rule 5: Showing enthusiasm for challenging assignments, 108 PART FIVE: Dealing with Staff: Inspiring Loyalty and Productivity Chapter 9 Motivating Smart 111 Rule 1: Winning loyalty by being loyal, 112 Rule 2: Getting credit by not taking credit, 114 Rule 3: Motivating by complimenting, 115 Chapter 10 Delegating Smart 117 Rule 1: Getting more done by doing less, 118 Rule 2: Delegating successfully by matching tasks with staff, 119 Rule 3: Making controversial decisions by not making them, 122 PART SIX: Being Visionary: Leading to the C-Suite Chapter 11 Beyond the Box 127 Rule 1: Examining the big picture to identify opportunities, 128 Rule 2: Forming a visionary plan, 131 Rule 3: Marketing the vision, 131 Successful Fast-Tracking Stories, 132 Final Thoughts 137 The Book's Objective, 137 "Soft Skills" and "Rules" Outside the Scope of This Book, 137 High Achievers' Soft Skills, 139 Personal Career Goals, 140 Appendix Tables for Principles, Strategies, and Rules 141 Table A.1 Principles and Strategies, 141 Table A.2 Communications Smart, 142 Table A.3 People Smart, 143 Table A.4 Marketing Smart, 144 Table A.5 Work Smart, 145 Table A.6 Time Smart, 146 Table A.7 Career Smart, 146 Table A.8 Job-Interview Smart, 147 Table A.9 Boss Smart, 148 Table A.10 Motivating Smart, 149 Table A.11 Delegating Smart, 149 Table A.12 Beyond the Box, 150 Abbreviations 151 Index 153

Read more less

Book SynopsisThe book is a review of essential skills that an entry-level or experienced engineer must be able to demonstrate on a job interview and perform when hired. It will help engineers prepare for interviews by demonstrating application of basic principles to practical problems.Table of ContentsPreface xi Acknowledgments xiii About the Author xv About the Reviewers xvii Note to Instructors xxi 1 HOW TO DESIGN RESISTIVE CIRCUITS 1 1.1 Design of a Resistive Thevenin Source 2 1.2 Design of a Coupling Circuit 4 1.3 Design of a Pi Attenuator 8 Problems 14 References 17 2 HOW TO PREVENT A POWER TRANSISTOR FROM OVERHEATING 19 2.1 Electrical Model for Heat Transfer 20 2.2 Using Manufacturer’s Data for Thermal Analysis 23 2.3 Forced-Air Cooling 26 2.4 Dynamic Response of a Thermal System 27 Problems 30 Reference 32 3 HOW TO ANALYZE A CIRCUIT 33 3.1 Frequency Response of a Transfer Function 34 3.2 Frequency Response and Impedance of Simple Circuits 38 3.3 Frequency Response for Ladder Networks 51 3.4 Generalized Technique for Determining Frequency Response 54 Problems 58 References 60 4 HOW TO USE STATISTICS TO ENSURE A MANUFACTURABLE DESIGN 61 4.1 Independent Component Failures 62 4.2 Using the Gaussian Distribution 63 4.3 Setting a Manufacturing Test Limit 68 4.4 Procuring a Custom Component 71 Problems 76 References 77 5 HOW TO DESIGN A FEEDBACK CONTROL SYSTEM 79 5.1 Intuitive Description of a Control System 80 5.2 Review of Control System Operation 81 5.3 Performance of Control Systems 84 5.4 First-Order Control System Design 84 5.5 Second-Order Control System Design 88 5.6 Circuit Realization of a Second-Order Control System 94 5.7 First-Order Discrete Control System 95 Problems 101 References 102 6 HOW TO WORK WITH OP-AMP CIRCUITS 103 6.1 The Ideal Op-Amp 104 6.2 Practical Op-Amps 108 6.2.1 Effect of Input Offset Voltage 108 6.2.2 Noise Contribution from Op-Amp Circuits 110 6.2.3 Dynamic Characteristics of Op-Amp Circuits 113 6.2.4 Effect of Capacitive Loading 116 6.2.5 A Nagging Issue 118 Problems 119 References 121 7 HOW TO DESIGN ANALOG FILTERS 123 7.1 Passive Versus Active Filters 124 7.2 The Lowpass RC Filter 125 7.3 Filter Response Characteristics 129 7.4 Specification of Filter Type 131 7.5 Generalized Filter Design Procedure 132 7.6 Design of Active Lowpass Filters 136 7.7 Design of Passive RF Filters 139 Problems 146 References 148 8 HOW TO DESIGN DIGITAL FILTERS 149 8.1 Review of Sampling 150 8.2 Using the z-Transform to Determine the Transfer Function and Frequency Response of Digital Filters 155 8.3 FIR and IIR Digital Filters 161 8.3.1 FIR Filters 162 8.3.2 IIR Filters 165 8.3.3 Comparisons between FIR and IIR Filters 167 8.4 Design of Simple and Practical Digital Filters 168 8.4.1 Averaging Lowpass FIR Filter 168 8.4.2 Lowpass FIR/IIR Filter 171 Problems 177 References 181 9 HOW TO WORK WITH RF SIGNALS 183 9.1 Energy Transfer 185 9.2 Signal Reflections 187 9.3 Effect of Signal Reflections on Digital Signals 190 9.4 Effect of Signal Reflections on Narrowband Signals 195 9.5 The Smith Chart 198 9.6 Using the Smith Chart to Display Impedance Versus Frequency 205 9.7 Final Comments Regarding the Smith Chart 205 Problems 206 References 209 10 GETTING A JOB—KEEPING A JOB—ENJOYING YOUR WORK 211 10.1 Getting a Job 212 10.1.1 Getting an Interview 214 10.1.2 Preparing for an Interview 216 10.1.3 The Interview 217 10.1.4 Selecting the Right Offer 220 10.2 Keeping a Job 221 10.2.1 The First Year 221 10.2.2 After the First Year 224 10.3 Enjoying Your Work 227 Afterword 231 Answers to Problems 233 Index 243

Read more less

Book SynopsisPresents the theories and applications of determining the position of an object in space through the use of satellites As the importance of space reconnaissance technology intensifies, more and more countries are investing money in building their own space reconnaissance satellites. Due to the secrecy and sensitivity of the operations, it is hard to find published papers and journals on the topic outside of military and governmental agencies. This book aims to fill the gap by presenting the various applications and basic principles of a very modern technology. The space electronic reconnaissance system in mono/multi-satellite platforms is a critical feature which can be used for detection, localization, tracking or identification of the various kinds of signal sources from radar, communication or navigation systems. Localization technology in space electronic reconnaissance uses single or multiple satellite receivers which receive signals from radarTable of ContentsPreface xiii Acknowledgments xv Acronyms xvii 1 Introduction to Space Electronic Reconnaissance Geolocation 1 1.1 Introduction 1 1.2 An Overview of Space Electronic Reconnaissance Geolocation Technology 3 1.2.1 Geolocation of an Emitter on the Earth 3 1.2.2 Tracking of an Emitter on a Satellite 8 1.2.3 Geolocation by Near-Space Platforms 9 1.3 Structure of a Typical SER System 9 References 11 2 Fundamentals of Satellite Orbit and Geolocation 13 2.1 An Introduction to the Satellite and Its Orbit 13 2.1.1 Kepler’s Three Laws 13 2.1.2 Classification of Satellite Orbits 15 2.2 Orbit Parameters and State of Satellite 18 2.2.1 Orbit Elements of a Satellite 18 2.2.2 Definition of Several Arguments of Perigee and Their Correlations 20 2.3 Definition of Coordinate Systems and Their Transformations 21 2.3.1 Definition of Coordinate Systems 21 2.3.2 Transformation between Coordinate Systems 25 2.4 Spherical Model of the Earth for Geolocation 27 2.4.1 Regular Spherical Model for Geolocation 27 2.4.2 Ellipsoid Model of the Earth 27 2.5 Coverage Area of a Satellite 30 2.5.1 Approximate Calculation Method for the Coverage Area 30 2.5.2 Examples of Calculation of the Coverage Area 31 2.5.3 Side Reconnaissance Coverage Area 33 2.6 Fundamentals of Geolocation 33 2.6.1 Spatial Geolocation Plane 34 2.6.2 Spatial Line of Position (LOP) 34 2.7 Measurement Index of Geolocation Errors 38 2.7.1 General Definition of Error 38 2.7.2 Geometrical Dilution of Precision (GDOP) 40 2.7.3 Graphical Representation of the Geolocation Error 40 2.7.4 Spherical Error Probability (SEP) and Circular Error Probability (cep) 41 2.8 Observability Analysis of Geolocation 44 References 45 3 Single-Satellite Geolocation System Based on Direction Finding 47 3.1 Direction Finding Techniques 47 3.1.1 Amplitude Comparison DF Technique 48 3.1.2 Interferometer DF Technique 49 3.1.3 Array-Based DF Technique 55 3.1.4 Other DF Techniques 57 3.2 Single-Satellite LOS Geolocation Method and Analysis 57 3.2.1 Model of LOS Geolocation 57 3.2.2 Solution of LOS Geolocation 59 3.2.3 CRLB of the LOS Geolocation Error 60 3.2.4 Simulation and Analysis of the LOS Geolocation Error 62 3.2.5 Geometric Distribution of the LOS Geolocation Error 63 3.3 Multitimes Statistic LOS Geolocation 64 3.3.1 Single-Satellite Multitimes Triangulation 65 3.3.2 Average for Single-Satellite Multitimes Geolocation 66 3.3.3 Weighted Average for Single-Satellite Multitimes Geolocation 67 3.3.4 Simulation of Single-Satellite LOS Geolocation 67 3.4 Single HEO Satellite LOS Geolocation 73 3.4.1 Analysis of Single GEO Satellite LOS Geolocation 73 3.4.2 Geosynchronous Satellite Multitimes LOS Geolocation 74 References 77 4 Multiple Satellites Geolocation Based on TDOA Measurement 79 4.1 Three-Satellite Geolocation Based on a Regular Sphere 80 4.1.1 Three-Satellite Geolocation Solution Method 80 4.1.2 Multisatellite TDOA Geolocation Method 82 4.1.3 CRLB of a Multisatellite TDOA Geolocation Error 85 4.1.4 Osculation Error of the Spherical Earth Model 86 4.2 Three-Satellite Geolocation Based on the WGS-84 Earth Surface Model 88 4.2.1 Analytical Method 89 4.2.2 Spherical Iteration Method 92 4.2.3 Newton Iteration Method 94 4.2.4 Performance Comparison among the Three Solution Methods 96 4.2.5 Altitude Input Location Algorithm 100 4.3 Ambiguity and No-Solution Problems of Geolocation 102 4.3.1 Ambiguity Problem of Geolocation 102 4.3.2 No-Solution Problem of Geolocation 106 4.4 Error Analysis of Three-Satellite Geolocation 109 4.4.1 Analysis of the Random Geolocation Error 109 4.4.2 Analysis of Bias Caused by Altitude Assumption 112 4.4.3 Influence of Change of the Constellation Geometric Configuration on GDOP 114 4.5 Calibration Method of the Three-Satellite TDOA Geolocation System 117 4.5.1 Four-Station Calibration Method and Analysis 117 4.5.2 Three-Station Calibration Method 125 References 130 5 Dual-Satellite Geolocation Based on TDOA and FDOA 133 5.1 Introduction of TDOA–FDOA Geolocation by a Dual-Satellite 133 5.1.1 Explanation of Dual-Satellite Geolocation Theory 133 5.1.2 Structure of Dual-Satellite TDOA–FDOA Geolocation System 134 5.2 Dual LEO Satellite TDOA–FDOA Geolocation Method 136 5.2.1 Geolocation Model 136 5.2.2 Solution Method of Algebraic Analysis 138 5.2.3 Approximate Analytical Method for Same-Orbit Satellites 141 5.2.4 Method for Eliminating an Ambiguous Geolocation Point 143 5.3 Error Analysis for TDOA–FDOA Geolocation 144 5.3.1 Analytic Method for the Geolocation Error 144 5.3.2 GDOP of the Dual LEO Satellite Geolocation Error 146 5.3.3 Analysis of Various Factors Influencing GDOP 151 5.4 Dual HEO Satellite TDOA–FDOA Geolocation 152 5.4.1 Dual Geosynchronous Orbit Satellites TDOA–FDOA Geolocation 152 5.4.2 Calibration Method Based on Reference Sources 155 5.4.3 Calibration Method Using Multiple Reference Sources 159 5.4.4 Flow of Calibration and Geolocation 164 5.5 Method of Measuring TDOA and FDOA 165 5.5.1 The Cross-Ambiguity Function 165 5.5.2 Theoretical Analysis on the TDOA–FDOA Measurement Performance 166 5.5.3 Segment Correlation Accumulation Method for CAF Computation 168 5.5.4 Resolution of Multiple Signals of the Same Time and Same Frequency 172 References 174 6 Single-Satellite Geolocation System Based on the Kinematic Principle 177 6.1 Single-Satellite Geolocation Model 177 6.2 Single-Satellite Single-Antenna Frequency-Only Based Geolocation 179 6.2.1 Frequency-Only Based Geolocation Method 179 6.2.2 Analysis of the Geolocation Error 180 6.2.3 Analysis of the Frequency-Only Based Geolocation Error 181 6.3 Single-Satellite Geolocation by the Frequency Changing Rate Only 183 6.3.1 Model of Geolocation by the Frequency Changing Rate Only 183 6.3.2 CRLB of the Geolocation Error 185 6.3.3 Geolocation Simulation 186 6.4 Single-Satellite Single-Antenna TOA-Only Geolocation 186 6.4.1 Model and Method of TOA-Only Geolocation 186 6.4.2 Analysis of the Geolocation Error 189 6.4.3 Geolocation Simulation 192 6.5 Single-Satellite Interferometer Phase Rate of Changing-Only Geolocation 192 6.5.1 Geolocation Model 192 6.5.2 Geolocation Algorithm 195 6.5.3 CRLB of the Geolocation Error 196 6.5.4 Calculation Analysis of the Geolocation Error 197 References 201 7 Geolocation by Near-Space Platforms 203 7.1 An Overview of Geolocation by Near-Space Platforms 203 7.1.1 Near-Space Platform Overview 203 7.1.2 Geolocation by the Near-Space Platform 204 7.2 Multiplatform Triangulation 204 7.2.1 Theory of 2D Triangulation 204 7.2.2 Error Analysis for Dual-Station Triangulation 205 7.2.3 Optimal Geometric Configuration of Observers 207 7.3 Multiplatform TDOA Geolocation 211 7.3.1 Theory of Multiplatform TDOA Geolocation 211 7.3.2 2D TDOA Geolocation Algorithm 212 7.3.3 TDOA Geolocation Using the Altitude Assumption 215 7.3.4 3D TDOA Geolocation Algorithm 215 7.4 Localization Theory by a Single Platform 217 7.4.1 Measurement Model of Localization 218 7.4.2 A 2D Approximate Localization Method 219 7.4.3 MGEKF (Modified Gain Extended Kalman Filter) Localization Method 221 7.4.4 Simulation 223 References 225 8 Satellite-to-Satellite Passive Orbit Determination by Bearings Only 227 8.1 Introduction 227 8.2 Model and Method of Bearings-Only Passive Tracking 227 8.2.1 Mathematic Model in the Case of the Two-Body Problem 228 8.2.2 Tracking Method in the Case of the Two-Body Model 229 8.2.3 Mathematical Model Considering J2 Perturbation of Earth Oblateness 232 8.2.4 Tracking Method Considering J2 Perturbation of Earth Oblateness 233 8.3 System Observability Analysis 235 8.3.1 Description Method for System Observability 235 8.3.2 Influence of Factors on the State Equation 236 8.3.3 Influence of Factors on the Measurement Equation 237 8.4 Tracking Simulation and Analysis 239 8.4.1 Simulation in the Case of the Two-Body Model 241 8.4.2 Simulation Considering J2 Perturbation of Earth Oblateness 251 8.5 Summary 258 References 259 9 Satellite-to-Satellite Passive Tracking Based on Angle and Frequency Information 261 9.1 Introduction of Passive Tracking 261 9.2 Tracking Model and Method 262 9.2.1 Mathematic Model in the Case of the Two-Body Model 262 9.2.2 Tracking Method in the Case of the Two-Body Model 263 9.2.3 Mathematical Models Considering J2 Perturbation of Earth Oblateness 266 9.2.4 Tracking Method Considering J2 Perturbation of Earth Oblateness 267 9.3 System Observability Analysis 268 9.3.1 Influence of Factors of the State Equation 269 9.3.2 Influence of Factors of the Measurement Equation 269 9.4 Simulation and Its Analysis 277 9.4.1 Simulation in the Case of the Two-Body Model 278 9.4.2 Simulation Considering J2 Perturbation of Earth Oblateness 296 9.5 Summary 308 References 309 10 Satellite-to-Satellite Passive Orbit Determination Based on Frequency Only 311 10.1 The Theory and Mathematical Model of Passive Orbit Determination Based on Frequency Only 313 10.1.1 The Theory of Orbit Determination Based on Frequency Only 313 10.1.2 The System Model in the Case of the Two-Body Model 313 10.1.3 The System Model for J2 Perturbation of Earth Oblateness 315 10.2 Satellite-to-Satellite Passive Orbit Determination Based on PSO and Frequency 317 10.2.1 Introduction of Particle Swarm Optimization (PSO) 317 10.2.2 Orbit Determination Method Based on the PSO Algorithm 319 10.3 System Observability Analysis 320 10.3.1 Simulation Scenario 1 322 10.3.2 Simulation Scenario 2 323 10.3.3 Simulation Scenario 3 325 10.4 CRLB of the Orbit Parameter Estimation Error 329 10.5 Orbit Determination and Tracking Simulation and Its Analysis 333 10.5.1 Simulation in the Case of the Two-Body Model 334 10.5.2 Simulation in the Case of Considering the Perturbation 347 References 348 11 A Prospect of Space Electronic Reconnaissance Technology 349 Appendix Transformation of Orbit Elements, State and Coordinates of Satellites in Two-Body Motion 351 Index 355

Read more less